BSBRES801 Initiate and Lead Applied Research Assignment Sample

Question

Coffee Rome is a reputational coffee brand that operates 21,000 stores across the world. Along with the coffee stores, the business also has a wholesale business of whole bean and ground coffee.

Business Model

Coffee Rome operated as Franchise model. The company is known for its replicated consistency across the globe. Franchising helps this company to access capital easily as well as reduces risks that would tarnish its brand image.

Focus and Branding

Coffee Rome’s primarily brands itself as a provider of beverages offering a more typical coffee house dining experience. The firm’s locations are designed with their customer’s comfort in mind. Inviting décor and free internet provides a more enticing option for people who looks for a place to speak with friends, relax or read. All these attract customers who are willing to pay more for quality services.

Coffee Rome compared to its competitors has tighter margins as it operates its own stores. Also, the company offers an extensive menu while maintaining its quality which attracts more customers and makes more profits.

Coffee Rome, especially in its supply chain, has no room for inefficiency and waste.

Global Challenges Coffee Rome Faces in The Supply Chain

The company had exponential growth over the past few decades. But over the period of the last three years, the company has faced issues relating to increase in the operational cost coffee production. The supply chain has contributed to a great extent to the operational cost.

This is because there is a high degree of risk and uncertainty in supply chain, namely the threat of disease, significant rain or changing temperatures meaning coffee yields vary substantially from year to year.

The Global Challenges Coffee Rome Faces in The Supply Chain:

• First and foremost is climate change. Coffee is one of the agricultural products which fell victim to climate change impacts. Disproportional high rains, extreme temperature and severe hurricanes have enabled high-cost pests and disease onslaught that directly impacts the coffee farms as well as the coffee yields.

• Logistics is the largest global challenge that faces Coffee Rome. Logistically issues of this firm are only the starting point. The uncertainty of especially when working with numerous suppliers across the world is endless.

• Another challenge that the company faced is the rising prices of coffee beans. This has resulted partly by the increasing demand for coffee beans. The Coffee Rome margins are affected by price hikes of the coffee beans and the shortage in supply.

Supply Chain Risks That The Coffee Rome Faces

The company identified the following major risks to the coffee supply chain:

• Production risks

• Drought
• Pest and disease outbreaks
• Erratic rainfall

• Market risks

• Coffee price volatility risk
• Steep and prolonged price fall
• Counterparty risk
• Exchange rate & Interest rate volatility

• Enabling environment risks

• Reputational risk
• Theft

Considering the challenges and the risks that the company faces management has decided to change its strategic direction and develop strategies to introduce in Coffee Rome’s global supply-chain management with a view to cost reduction by developing a sustainable coffee supply chain management.

The main factors for sustainable supply chain network are:

• A centralised system to manage its logistics networks and its supply chain across the continents.

• Digital technologies to ensure the Coffee Rome supply chain is efficient and that the company can cope with the high-quality growing demand globally.

• Monitor the demand in real-time. Production, distribution, and schedules may be modified and developed in the time of need giving the supply chain of the company an added flexibility and allows Coffee Rome to address agility peaks of demand.

• Supply chain management: the innovation of supply chain and logistics management to reduce energy consumption and control the pollution levels from transportation and the production process.

• Reverse logistics: the recycling of containers, packaging materials and the use of environmentally friendly materials

• Corporate social responsibility towards farmers and the environment.

Task:

You are working as a Research and Development (R&D) Manager at Coffee Rome. The management
has asked you to initiate and lead applied research.

To do so, you need to complete the following project activities:

a) Formulate a research proposal or plan
b) Design an applied research project.
c) Compile a research report.
d) Present research findings.

Instructions This assignment help requires you to design an applied research project using applied research tools and techniques. Write case study report for me that must include:

A description of the review and evaluation of the applied research methods and techniques, including at least two methods and at least three techniques. You need to select the methods and techniques which will optimise the collection of useful data for your specific research. Justify the methods and techniques selected. Design three (3) data collection tools for your research project, which are examples of the techniques selected. Include the required specifications for participants, supporting documents and instructions and the proposed analysis procedures. Collect data using the selected data collection techniques. Provide evidence of how the selected research tools, resources and techniques were appropriate for the context. Provide a reference for the research tools, resources and techniques used. Conduct a review of the tools used with your trainer/assessor. Document any modifications made and why these were made.

Appendices

Appendix 1

Researcher’s Name(s):

Consent to take part in research

Project Title: STUDY ON STRATEGIC WAYS TO INCREASE THE DISTRIBUTION NETWORK OF COFFEE ROME

 I……………………………………… voluntarily agree to participate in this research study.

 I understand that even if I agree to participate now, I can withdraw at any time or refuse to answer any question without any consequences of any kind.

 I understand that I can withdraw permission to use data from my interview within two weeks after the interview, in which case the material will be deleted.

 I have had the purpose and nature of the study explained to me in writing and I have had the opportunity to ask questions about the study.

 I understand that participation involves…[outline briefly in simple terms what participation in your research will involve].

 I understand that I will not benefit directly from participating in this research

 I agree to my interview being audio-recorded if necessary.

 I understand that all information I provide for this study will be treated confidentially.

 I understand that in any report on the results of this research my identity will remain anonymous. This will be done by changing my name and disguising any details of my interview which may reveal my identity or the identity of people I speak about.

 I understand that disguised extracts from my interview may be quoted in…[list all forum in which you plan to use the data from the interview: dissertation, conference presentation, published papers, etc.].

 I understand that if I inform the researcher that I or someone else is at risk of harm they may have to report this to the relevant authorities - they will discuss this with me first but may be required to report with or without my permission.

 I understand that signed consent forms and original audio recordings will be retained in [specify the location, security arrangements, and who has access to data] until [specific relevant period – for students this will be until the exam board confirms the results of their dissertation].

 I understand that a transcript of my interview in which all identifying information has been removed will be retained for [specific relevant period – for students this will be two years from the date of the exam board].

 I understand that under freedom of information legalization I am entitled to access the information I have provided at any time while it is in storage as specified above.

 I understand that I am free to contact any of the people involved in the research to seek further clarification and information.

Names, degrees, affiliations, and contact details of researchers (and academic supervisors when relevant).

----------------------------------------- ----------------

Signature of participant                                                     Date

I believe the participant is giving informed consent to participate in this study

------------------------------------------ ----------------------

Signature of researcher                                                       Date

Appendix 2

SURVEY FORM

1. What is your gender?

• Male
• Female
• Others

2. How long are you employed in your company?

3. Do you think that the companies need to have more effective strategies for protecting the crops from diseases?

• Yes
• No
• Maybe

4. How does your company tackle the problems caused by climatic changes?

5. Do you face any issues in the supply chain of your firm?

• Yes
• No
• Maybe

6. Do you think the supply chain has any impact on the revenues of the employees?

• Yes
• No
• Maybe

7. Do you think that employing experienced farmers will lead to more revenue generation?

• Yes
• No
• Maybe

8. How does your company plan to optimize its profits by bringing in changes?

References

Snyder, H. (2019). Literature review as a research methodology: An overview and guidelines. Journal of Business Research, 104, 333-339.

Benti, T., Gebre, E., Tesfaye, K., Berecha, G., Lashermes, P., Kyallo, M., & Kouadio Yao, N. (2020). Genetic diversity among commercial arabica coffee (Coffea arabica L.) varieties in Ethiopia using simple sequence repeat markers. Journal of Crop Improvement, 1-22.

Wang, E. S. T., & Yu, J. R. (2016). Effect of product attribute beliefs of ready-to-drink coffee beverages on consumer-perceived value and repurchase intention. British Food Journal.

Paradis, E., O'Brien, B., Nimmon, L., Bandiera, G., & Martimianakis, M. A. T. (2016). Design: Selection of data collection methods. Journal of graduate medical education, 8(2), 263.

MBA600 Capstone Strategy Assessment Sample

Question

Assessment Instructions

Again, assuming the role of an organisational consultant, you are to write a report that clearly articulates the organisation’s strategy and business model and outlines a detailed approach to Competition Strategy (Week 3), how the chosen organisation’s performance is/can be measured against their strategies (Week 4). You will also be required to prepare a Balanced Scorecard for their chosen organisation (Week 7). Attention should be paid to the use of secondary research and insights (Week 8).

Areas covered should include:

• An executive summary.
• An introduction that summarises the purpose of the report.
• A summary of the organisation’s strategy.
• A specific outline of the organisation’s approach to competition strategy, performance measurement and the balanced scorecard.
• A summary of recommendations that identify areas of focus and opportunity to enhance the organisation’s performance in the future.
• A conclusion.
• Reference list.

You are encouraged to use a wide variety of information sources that include, where possible, primary research such as interviews with staff or executive members within their chosen organisation as well as the use of an appropriate mix of strategic and business analysis tools and references. These references should be presented as in-text citations and a reference list at the end of your business report.

Answer

Executive Summary:

Changing business scenario has been forcing the brands to analyse their internal and external business performance. These analyses aid the firm to have better performance to achieve sustainability. Through the analysis, organisational strategy has been analysed considering the business model canvas and their organisational approach towards competition strategy, performance measurement and balance scorecard for the firm has been made. Underpinning the finding of the analysis, recommendations are also provided to enable the brand enhance its performance. For the purpose of the analysis, here case of the Transurban group has been considered. As per the above analysis, it can be seen that the brand as the method of business strategy focus on the key partners, society and innovation. Through the development of tools and apps dedicated to provide road safety information and toll information, the brand aids their consumer to have a safe travel. As the key partners of the business as per the business model, consumers, investors, community and government has been found and these are the main value creators as well for the brand too. Underpinning the competition scenario, it can be seen that the brand has limited competition and as per the porter five force model, the brand has high bargaining power. To enhance the business performance of the brand following recommendations has been made:

• Enhancing communication with consumers
• Enhancing road safety
• Having board approved CEO
• Increasing financial reserves

Introduction:

During 21st century there has been lot of change in the business scenario ranging from change in business process to consumer behaviour. In order to keep up pace with the fast-changing business world, firms are now not only focusing on the innovation and sustainability factors, rather considering the internal retrospective analysis as well. These analyses aiding the firms to determine their organisational strategy backed by company values (Delerv & Roumpi 2017, p4). Moreover, through these analyses, firms are been able to check their organisational approach to competition strategy, performance measurement to internal controls, based on which future recommendations is also made for performance improvement. For the present study, here analysis has been made considering one of the largest toll road operators, known as Transurban Group. Through the analysis, organisational strategy has been analysed considering the business model canvas and their organisational approach towards competition strategy, performance measurement and balance scorecard for the firm has been made. Underpinning the finding of the analysis, recommendations are also provided to enable the brand enhance its performance.

Organisational strategy:

Strategic approach of organisation:

Transurban group is an Australia based toll road operation who has their existence in Melbourne, Brisbane, Sydney in Australia. Apart from these location, Transurban group operates in Washington of US and Montreal of Canada. In total it operates with 17 motorways in Australia, four in North America and one in Canada (Transurban.com 2021). The brand focused on the app and tool development to make travel easier. Besides, with special focus on climate change, Transurban is aimed to produce new solution as well as management road operation. With intuitive focus on the partnership and grant providing for the social cause and engaging with the local communities, Transurban group operate in a socialist approach(Transurban.com 2021). The brand creates its values through providing safe and accessible transportation system the to the people, engaging with the local communities through employment generation, providing education and training to the people for making them skilled employee. As the strategy for growth, the brand focus on enabling the consumer to have easy toll payment option, providing focused choice based on preference of paid and non-paid motorway. Thus, the brand presently considers as lenient socialist approach, where it not only focuses on making consumer lives better, rather focus on environment and community that aids the brand to create their success path smooth(Transurban.com 2021).

Figure 1: Business strategy of Transurban group
Source: (Transurban.com 2021)

Business model of organisation:

Organisational approach:

Competition strategy:

To determine the competition strategy of the Transurban group, porter five force model analysis along with SWOT has been done here. It demonstrates the market rivalry situation underpinning the bargaining powers of the supplier and consumer and threats from substitute and new entrant. On the other hand, SWOT demonstrates the specific business internal strengths and weaknesses (Block et al. 2015, p38).

Porter five force analysis of organisation: 

SWOT Analysis of organisation:

Performance measurement:

Transurban group considers financial and sustainability approach to analyse the performance of the firm. When it comes to the financial performance measurement, the firm depends on the asset performance analysis, long term value creation, average daily traffic value, proportional EBITDA and free cash. As per the Transurban.com (2021), proportional results of the business are considered as the best business performance indicator. Through the proportional results, ownership of individual assets, contribution to the group performance by them and core business development scope is determined.

Financial performance measurement – As per the Transurban.com (2021)proportional EBITDA is the best available performance measure tool as it is the collection of the outcomes from every resource induced by Transurban's rate proprietorship just as the commitment from focal Group capacities. Besides, proportional EBITDA reflects the commitment from individual resources for the group's working exhibition and spotlights on components of the outcome that administration can influence to drive enhancements in momentary profit. Apart from this, using the free cash, the firm can determine their cash performance and demonstrates the scope of cash distribution to the security holders (Delery & Roumpi 2017, p4). Hence, it is actually return on investment portfolio for the firm that aids it to check its performance. With the help of the daily traffic value, asset performance analysis the firm determines its cash flow and ability to produce return on asset. Hence, these measures, also help the firm to analyse its performance.

Social performance measurement – When it comes to the social value analysis, then the firm depends on its Social Development Goal (SDGs) achievement analysis. As per the SDGs, of the firm it is aimed to provide good health and wellbeing, gender equality, affordable and clean energy, decent work and economic growth, industry innovation and infrastructure, sustainable cities and responsible consumption of sustainable value creation for the investors(Transurban.com 2021). With the continuous stakeholder engagement and community engagement, the firm has achieved most of their SDGs and is aimed to achieve further in coming years ((Transurban.com 2021). The difference between the expectation and achievement in case of the SDGs, aids the firm to determine its performance.

Balance scorecard:

Balance scorecard approach is a crucial tool for the firms that enable them to understand its objectives, measure the same, determine future target and establish initiatives to achieve the target (Yacobet al. 2016l, p785). For the Transurban group, balance scorecard can be formed as below:

Recommendation:

Underpinning the above analysis, following recommendations can be made for the Transurban group:

Enhancing communication with consumers: Transurban has dedicated channel for the consumer communication. However, it has been alleged that the support team of the Transurban is not very responsive(Transurban.com 2021). This hampers the interest of the consumer and to enhance the business performance, firm should focus on this. To enhance consumer engagement, firms should consider social media, conventional media and digital media channel; as well as considering direct interaction with the riders through dedicated on road team to assess the consumer need and feedback.

Enhancing road safety: Transurban group provides good quality road safety to its consumers, however, in recent time there has been much amount of fall in road maintenance due to plummeted transportation owing to Covid19. This has made negative image for the road construction giant in Australia. The firm need to focus on providing better roads and good safety to its riders so that the users can feel encouraged to use the same.
Having board approved CEO: Present CEO of Scott Charlton has been with the Transurban since 2012 and he has generated significant growth to company. However, in recent time, he has faced fall in the CEO credibility due to poor performance of the firm during Covid19. Board members are not fully backing the CEO and it is hampering the brand image. As per the SWOT analysis, it has been found that brand image is a crucial factor for the Transurban company; thus, having poor reputation on CEO is not good for the brand.

Increasing financial reserves: As per the annual report of the Transurban, it was found that the firm has faced high loss during 2021 due to the Covid19. To, absorb future shock like this and to maintain a healthy dividend policy for the employees, Transurban need to maintain a high financial reserve. This will not only aid to achieve better performance and trust on the brand, additionally it will fetch higher investment to the firm as well.

Conclusion:

As per the above analysis, it can be seen that Transurban is one of the largest toll road service providers in Australia with its presence in US and Canada. The brand as the method of business strategy focus on the key partners, society and innovation. Through the development of tools and apps dedicated to provide road safety information and toll information, the brand aids their consumer to have a safe travel. As the key partners of the business as per the business model, consumers, investors, community and government has been found and these are the main value creators as well for the brand too. Underpinning the competition scenario, it can be seen that the brand has limited competition and as per the porter five force model, the brand has high bargaining power. Although the brand has strengths in its business due to brand value and name, yet it lacks in business due to missing communication with the consumer and falling CEO preference. To overcome the situation of the business post Covid19 and enhance the business performance, recommendations has been made that asks the Transurban to focus on consumer engagement, road safety enhancement and community engagement.
 

Reference:

Block, JH, Kohn, K, Miller, D & Ullrich, K, 2015, Necessity entrepreneurship and competitive strategy, Small Business Economics, 44(1), pp.37-54.

Delery, JE & Roumpi, D, 2017, Strategic human resource management, human capital and competitive advantage: is the field going in circles? Human Resource Management Journal, 27(1), pp.1-21.

Evans, S., Vladimirova, D, Holgado, M, Van Fossen, K, Yang, M, Silva, EA & Barlow, CY, 2017, Business model innovation for sustainability: Towards a unified perspective for creation of sustainable business models. Business Strategy and the Environment, 26(5), pp.597-608.

Geissdoerfer, M, Vladimirova, D & Evans, S, 2018, Sustainable business model innovation: A review, Journal of cleaner production, 198, pp.401-416.

Hornibrook, S, May, C & Fearne, A 2015, Sustainable development and the consumer: Exploring the role of carbon labelling in retail supply chains, Business Strategy and the Environment, 24(4), pp.266-276.

Jack, L, Florez-Lopez, R & Ramon-Jeronimo, JM, 2018, Accounting, performance measurement and fairness in UK fresh produce supply networks, Accounting, Organizations and Society, 64, pp.17-30.

Stott, RN, Stone, M & Fae, J 2016, Business models in the business-to-business and business-to-consumer worlds–what can each world learn from the other? Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, 31(8), pp. 943-954.

Transurban.com 2021. Annual report.https://www.transurban.com/content/dam/investor-centre/04/2020-Corporate-Report.pdf

Transurban.com 2021. Community and sustainability | Transurban Group. https://www.transurban.com/community-and-sustainability

Yacob, S, Sucherly, DS & Mulyana, A 2016, Do really competitive strategy and strategic alliances effect on retail business performance? International Journal of Economics, Management and Commerce, 4(2), pp.783-796.
 

MGT602 Business Decision Analytics Sample

Question

Context: Fast changing workplaces call for greater flexibility in the ways individuals and work teams make and implement decisions. Alongside the increasing rate of change are the demands for better decision making through understanding and mitigating personal preferences and biases.

This MBA Essay Help Has Been Designed To:

? Appraise your ability to research academic literature on decision making. You are expected to utilise the literature provided in Modules 1 and 2 as a foundation that guides your further academic research.

? Select and evaluate the usefulness of a range of decision-making tools and reflect on levels of rationality and intuition utilised during the decision-making process.

? Compare, contrast and critically evaluate sources of data as influences in the decision-making context

? Identify the relevant sources of influence and limitations in your decision-decision making process

MGT602 Assessment 1 Writing Online Custom Essay Help:

This assessment draws on learning activities and resources from Modules 1 and 2. It is designed for you to engage in the decision-making process and then reflectively analyse your decision-making process using only theories and concepts from the Business Decision Analytics course (MGT602).

You should include in your reflective report:

? The decision-making problem detailed by your learning facilitator

? Analysis of your decision-making preferences (see activity Module 1)

? Analysis and influence of your personality traits and the impact on your decision-making

? Details of the sources of data collected during the decision-making process and how this data was evaluated/analysed

? Analysis of the decision-making process using any of the models discussed in Modules 1 and 2 plus any of your further relevant readings

? Analysis of written feedback from at least 2 other people on your decision-making process in the topic nominated by your Learning Facilitator

? Visual interpretation of data / trends/ patterns

? As a reflective analysis you will present your analysis in the first person.

Submission Format

Cover Sheet: Every assessment must have a Torrens University Coversheet. (The Assignment Cover Sheet found in: https://www.torrens.edu.au/policies-and-forms)

1. Introduction: 100 words maximum. The introduction will present the reader with a clear and concise understanding of the following:

1. What is the submission about
2. What theories will be used
3 Your concise conclusion
4 The structure of the submission

2. Analysis and evaluation: 1300 words maximum. In this section you will analyse and evaluate your decision-making process using selected theories and concepts from the various Modules offered in Blackboard for this subject. You must include any blind spots or biases that you have identified in making this evaluative decision based on your research and formal feedback from others.

3. Conclusion: 100 words maximum. In this section you will provide a concise summation of your analysis and conclusion(s).

4. References: A minimum of 4 academic references are required from seminal sources and books. Referencing must be APA style. For referencing information refer to: http://library.laureate.net.au/research_skills/referencing

5. Appendix: If required.

6. NOTE: This submission is to be presented as a report. Any tables prepared must be identified and discussed in the text/body and included in an appendix.

Answers

Executive summary

Immense flexibility and team approach are considered as core variants in order to attain success in present competitive scenario. Present report provides my reflective assessment in context with my learning’s and acknowledgement. I assessed that one could make prominent decision through considering available information and insights i.e. making rational decision. Even I got opportunity to assess decision making as one of the comprehensive processes as it does require having the appropriate facts and information for taking the sound decisions. I acknowledged that in order to make decision with respect to selection of company for accounting job, I require collecting significant amount of data and information that will aid me in analysis of the issues thoroughly. I also learned about data management and analysis which would assist in evaluating data of company of which I would be part in future.

Introduction

In the current rapid changing scenario, there is requirement for higher flexibility in the manner in which individual and team works and applies decisions. In addition to this, the enhancing rate of change is the demands for better decision making by recognizing and removing personal preferences as well as prejudice. In this aspect, the primary aim of prevailing study is to evaluate the decision making procedure and then reflectively evaluate my decision making procedure by application of the theories and concepts learned from the Business Decision Analytics course (MGT 602).

Analysis and Evaluation

Discussion of Decision Making Model and Its Application

Bounded rationality model and dual processing model are some of the best model of decision making process. In order to evaluate and analyze my decision making process, I would like to apply Bounded Rationality Model. The reason behind the same is that, dual process model has restrictions in exclusive use of rational form of information process, decision making were illuminated through the acceptance of bounded rationality.Bounded rationality model runs under a supposition that decision taker should carry activities under three inevitable limitations. These being the accessibility of restricted or false information, process of significant amount of information, and the limited time (Zhang et al, 2020).Therefore, in the present case of decision making related to obtained position of accountant in MNCs, Bounded rationality model would be more appropriate. It is because of limitation constraints such as time, information, and other factors.

After the completion of my post-graduation I would like to engage in work of accounting in the multinational company and probably outside from my home nation. The reason behind the same is that, from the beginning I was very interested to experience the environment, work culture, and some other aspects of foreign country and even I think that it would be one of the unique experiences for me. Therefore the probable issue that would be confronted by me in living foreign nationconsists of bank arrangements, acceptance of new surroundings, accommodations, and many more. If such issues are not addressed in proper way then it leads towards adverse impact on my work performance as well as overall career. In this aspect, it is required by me to evaluate different companies and identify in which company I can perform by considering the salary, perks and benefits, working environment model, other employee’s benefits. At such point of time, I had taken some decision in irrational manner and some decisions by conducting significant examination and researches. It should be noted that, I have to take decision under the time constraints as when I completed the post-graduation; I have to find job in in earliest possible manner, and therefore dual process model would not supportive in my decision making. Further, there is also existence of limited information regarding my decision of working of accountant in overseas nation because currently I am not very much aware about who is working in overseas nation so that I can gain some useful information. Moreover, my decision would be limited to the type of the amount of data available to me that may be boundedly rational. However, such model would definitely assist towards satisfactory choices (Evans, Evans, & Cough, 2022).

Analysis of Personality Traits and Impact in Decision Making

By going through from my personality traits as given in appendix, it can be noticed that, my score was high with respect to logic score and balance score, and it comparatively it was less in context of intuition score. Because of such personality traits, I take the decision making process through holistic analysis of data and consideration of the values of others and interests could permit decisions to be taken that consider the impact of such decisions of others. It can be said that, because of my intuitive quality and rationality, I will make the balanced decision during this stage. Data refers to facts which does exist in any form and are not relating to other things but knowledge refers to collection of information which is meaningful and represented as patterns in specific heads. During my learning journey I got opportunity to assess data appropriately in order to transform into information. As I wanted to be at senior position of accounting department, these learning would assist me in data handling and management in better manner. Bounded rationality model relates to cognitive limitation of consumers i.e. the decision making procedure of consumer is dependent on cognitive ability, time constraint and imperfect information (Andrade and CarinhanaJr, 2021).

Details of Data Sources

The main aim of data processing is to develop information which could be applied to making prominent decision through human intervention. The transition from data assessment to knowledge management was one of main learning experience which I gained during this course.. The fact cannot be denied that complex external environment have increased pressure, thus it is necessary to evaluate different dimension while making final decision so that it could be rational rather than being dependent on individual insights (Chitpin, 2020). Thus, in order to make appropriate decision one has to consider internal environment data i.e. information available at workplace as well as external data so that changing scenarios and environment could be dealt in better manner.

Visual Interpretation of Data

I learned from specified approach that with adequate information one could make prominent decision in better manner. I did not realize my blind spot of not providing significance to visual interpretation of data which included assessment of trend and patterns. In order to evaluate performance, visual interpretation of data does play vital role as through same one could present actual position and desired goal easily. Further, as in future I wanted to be part of accounting department in multi-national organization, I would have to interpret data and make visual interpretations and I would not be able to do so as I only focus of reports and data rather than trends and patterns.

During one of academic test I got to know about my strength i.e. making decision and analyzing problems on the basis of logical thinking. Previously, I was habitual of making decision on the basis of emotional sentiments or by being influenced with the person or specific situation which can be specified as one of my blind spots. However, being at an executive position one needs to deal with data of large quantum along with ambiguous information as well as impact of external environmental risk on specified data.But learning’s attained during this journey made me realize that one could manage data and implement rational processing on order to ensure that emotions and feelings are not considered while decision making. I assessed that subjective approach is also considered to make decision which includes understanding other’s interest as well as insights; however rational approach does prevail over same as it is not biased (Sedevich-Fons, 2018).Subjective approach is also considered to make decision which includes understanding other’s interest as well as insights; however rational approach does prevail over same as it is not biased (Sedevich-Fons, 2018).

Analysis of Feedback

During the course, I came to know that, decision making is one of the comprehensive processes and one requires having the appropriate facts and information for taking the sound decisions. In order to make decision with respect to selection of company for accounting job, I require collecting significant amount of data and information that will aid me in analysis of the issues thoroughly. For this purpose, i perform the data analysis by primary and secondary method. In this aspect, primary sources included feedbacks from my friend, who is already doing the job of accountant in the multinational companies. He told me about salary consideration and working environment of the company. Though, in the current scenario of Covid-19, he told me that, company has taken adequate security measures for the safety of employees. This conversation with my friend accelerates my eagerness to work in this company. Further, i also obtained feedback from my cousin who is just obtained the job in MNCs. I make discussion with respect to preparation for interviews, how to respond on questions, how I should become more presentable, and some other aspects. She explained such things me in proper ways. Being an indecisive, I find very difficult to take most of decisions. However, obtaining feedback from friend and cousin, my anxiety was reduced and I become confident that, I can perform accounting work in the MNCs in well manner in my future career.

Conclusion

In nut shell it can be concluded that my whole learning journey was enthusiastic as I got an opportunity to assess various perspective of decision making. Further, the Bounded Rationality model changed my perception of decision making and provided insights through which I could make prominent decision in future. Lastly, as my main goal is to attain executive position in accounting department in a multinational organization, these learning would assist me in making adequate decision and accomplishing obligations relating to my role in best possible way.

References

Andrade, M. and CarinhanaJr, D. (2021) “Decision-Making Approach for Complex Problems Management in a Scarce Human Resources Environment,” Journal of Modelling in Management, 16(4), pp. 1302–1327.doi: 10.1108/JM2-11-2020-0289. https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9365468970?queryString=decision%20making%20in%20accounting%20and%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&year=2018..2022&subformat=Artchap%3A%3Aartchap_artcl&changedFacet=format

Chitpin, S. (2020) “Decision Making, Distributed Leadership and the Objective Knowledge Growth Framework,” The International Journal of Educational Management, 34(2), pp. 217–231. https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/8136669861?queryString=decision%20making%20in%20accounting%20and%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&year=2018..2022&subformat=Artchap%3A%3Aartchap_artcl&changedFacet=format

Evans, D., Evans, G. W., &McGough, B. (2022).Bounded rationality and unemployment dynamics.Economics Letters, 210.https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9339464431?queryString=bounded%20rationality%20model&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&year=2018..2022

Sedevich-Fons, L. (2018) “Linking Strategic Management Accounting and Quality Management Systems,” Business Process Management Journal, 24(6), pp. 1302–1320. Sedevich-Fons, L. (2018) “Linking Strategic Management Accounting and Quality Management Systems,” Business Process Management Journal, 24(6), pp. 1302–1320. https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9056218662?queryString=decision%20making%20in%20accounting%20and%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&year=2018..2022&subformat=Artchap%3A%3Aartchap_artcl&changedFacet=format.

Zhang, M., Wang, G., Xu, J., &Qu, C. (2020).Dynamic contest model with bounded rationality.Applied Mathematics and Computation, 370.https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/8440159171?queryString=bounded%20rationality%20model&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&year=2018..2022

PROJ6000 Principles of Project Management Assignment Sample

Assessment 1 - Project Management Lifecycle (PML) Opinion Post

Context: The project management lifecycle (PML) is an important component of project management methodology. It incorporates several areas of knowledge from the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBoK) and it affects and interacts with the application of PMBoK in a project. Different stages of the PML may require focussing on different areas of the PMBoK, and project managers need to assess the PML for their project to identify possible risks, plan for resourcing and commence communicating with stakeholders.

This Online Assignment Help Requires That You Answer The Following Question: “What areas of the PMBoK are affected by the Project Management Lifecycle the most and how do we ensure alignment between the lifecycle of the project and the implementation of PMBoK in projects?”.

To Answer This Question, You Will Need To: (a) Post a 600 word response to this question, based on your opinion, to the Discussion Forum on the learning portal. (b) Respond to one other student post by critiquing their opinion and comparing it with yours in 200 words. The online custom essay help requires that you critically read and interpret both the Project Management Lifecycle and the PMBoK.

Instructions: 1. Read about the PMBoK and the Project Management Lifecycle to familiarise yourself with their fundamental concepts. Critically reflect on your readings to form an opinion of both. Commence writing your opinion to answer the question and support that opinion by using at least six (6) references from academic or industry literature. Cite these references in your opinion of 600 words both in-text and as a reference list at the end of your opinion piece. The word count does not include the reference list and is +/-10%.

 Solution

1. INTRODUCTION

The outcome of this work is to discuss and analyze the Project Management Lifecycle, project management knowledge areas, and their relationship in terms of project management. The project management includes a code of conduct that helps the team members and project managers to successfully umbilicus the responsibilities and ethics. Furthermore, the works also include the application of the project selection methods through and by the use of real-life project case in point [ Hartley,2018].

2. PROJECT MANAGEMENT KNOWLEDGE AREAS AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT LIFECYCLE

Project management is a technique of accomplishing the goal line as per the needs of a business by applying techniques, skills, tools, and methodologies to project activities to achieve the goal.Project management holds project management tools, software, and a body of knowledge.[Wells, 2015]

PMBOK framework consists of 10 knowledge areas, 5 process groups, and 47 PM (project management) processes. Initiating, Planning, Executing, Managing and Controlling, and Closing are the 5 process group. In other words, the project management lifecycle is the cycle of managing a project.While Unification, Time, Quality, Acquisition, Human resources, Communications, the scope of work, Cost, Management of risks, Management of Stakeholders are the 10 knowledge areas of Project Management. The understandings of all these knowledge areas by the project managers crucial role, and thus proper management is required. Also, play will provide him complete familiarity with the project as every single knowledge area dealing with either a part or all of the processes [Marion, 2019].

Knowledge Areas:

? Time: Here, attention to planning the time required to complete the project or a part of the project the overall sequence of work, and the duration of the project.

? Cost: Here, the overall expenditures to complete the project calculate. The estimation of the total project cost calculates to simplify the task.

? Management of Stakeholders: The identification of the stakeholders with their requirements and role in the project performance. The edition of the standard will be ensured.

? Management of Risk: Here, The quantitative or qualitative risk is associated with project management.

? Communication: Here, the project plans by the project manager make followed by the establishment of effective communication of it to the team members perform.

? Scope of Work: Here, the proper outlines about the project with the purpose and what will include in the project. On that basis, only preparation of all the requirements and basic structure of the project [Project Management Institute, 2017].

? Human Resources: Here, to complete the project firstly, gathering of all available resources and group them to perform. For smooth and correct workflows proper management of the additional skills of our team members.

? Quality: Here, using the quality control and management stages of the project quality performs. That will confirm the expectations of the customer.

? Unification: The first step is gathering all information about PMBOK to manage the project.

? Acquisition: Here, for access requirements of all for acquiring the process work, obtaining, and managing perform. That makes it easy to finish the project at the mentioned time.

3. STEPS TO ENSURE ALIGNMENT:

Project alignment helps us to ensure that all the resources are assigned properly to stakeholders. Few steps are:

1. Evaluating The Project:

An organization needs to understand the overall strategy and goals for the smooth running of a project by understanding the overall strategy of the project by team members.

2. Consulting Stakeholders:

The project is implemented only after considering the ideas and opinions of stakeholders. This will help us in better understanding the project according to the current situation and to make strategies accordingly.

3. Making The Decisions:

Decision-makers should be able to decide in "Yes" or "No" with confidence.

4. Priorities are Given Accordingly.

Part B

The mathematical calculations method was adopted by him. Because in the study he is comparing three comparisons between Canada visa, Australia Visa, and finding jobs in India. As per the output, I would agree on migration to Australia because spouses can go with us, and the payment rate is also higher than Canada, and it is a diverse country. But as many risks are there which cannot be neglected like strict rules are there, chances of successfulness of project is low, getting of Permanent residence nowadays is getting harder. Therefore, I disagree with this methodology used by him. I would like to select PRINCE 2 methodology because of the flexibility of working at any location, size, scale, and sector. It defines the roles and responsibilities of each member of the team clearly which makes it easier to work with. It is available at low prices so that students can easily avail themselves of it. In short, it saves both time and energy [Davidson, J. 2019].

This approach has adaptability, consistency, good communication with stakeholders, and above all, it has a business emphasis approach. Therefore, it is the best methodology to work with by overcoming its demerits easily. It can better manage and easily overcome all the challenges and issues regarding time and money.

REFERENCES

Davidson, J. (2019). Everyday project management. Berrett-Koehler Publishers, Incorporated.

Hartley, S. (2018). Project management: a practical guide to planning and managing projects (Fourth). Allen & Unwin.

Kerzner, H. (2019). Using the project management maturity model: strategic planning for project management (Third). John Wiley & Sons.

Marion, J. W. (2019). Project management: a common sense guide to the pmbok (Vol. Part two, plan and execution /, Ser. Industrial and systems engineering collection). Momentum Press.

Project Management Institute. (2017). A guide to the project management body of knowledge (pmbok guide) (Sixth, Ser. Pmbok guide). Project Management Institute.

Wells, K., & Kloppenborg, T. J. (2015). Project management essentials (Ser. Portfolio and project management collection). Business Expert Press.

BMG872 Global Strategy, Development & Implementation Assignment Sample

RATIONALE

The strategic management process helps organisations identify what they intend to achieve and how they will accomplish valued outcomes. The magnitude of this challenge is greater today than ever before. A new competitive landscape is developing as a result of the increasing globalisation. When students take this module, they will already have considered the global environment in which organisations have to operate and survive. This module focuses on how firms’ sizes can become or remain international in scope. It analyses how organisations can use the strategic management process to understand those international competitive forces and develop competitive advantage systematically and consistently. This module links the internationalisation process examined in Semester one to focusing on multinational management of the firm.

AIMS

The primary aim of this module is to develop an understanding of the strategic management of an enterprise engaged in international business. This includes understanding how the competitive position of a firm is devised based on analysing structure, country-based sources of advantage and their distinctive competencies. Further, translating strategy into organisation action requires understanding the advantages and disadvantages of the many organisational forms and processes that may be used to attain the desired competitive position. The secondary aims are to (1) develop an understanding of the international business that integrates specific functional activities comprising the firm and (2) provide the opportunity to further develop analytical skills and decision-making in situations characterised by uncertainty and complexity.

OBJECTIVES

On successful completion of this module students will be able to:

• Understand the catalysts for international expansion, including country, industry, and firm influences;

• Understand unique management issues that confront international business units;

• Analyse different competitive strategies in globalising industries;

• Understand the process of international expansion generically;

• Examine how changes in strategy create organisational tension, especially in headquarter-subsidiary relations;

• Analyse historical globalisation patterns in strategic industries;

• Assess strategies needed to compete internationally.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

Successful Students Will Be Able To:

1 Demonstrate knowledge and thorough understanding of the fundamental concepts, principles, theories, practices and legislative frameworks underlying international business as an academic discipline and as a tool for improved management of international businesses.

2 Apply critical evaluation to complex arguments and evidence in the field of international business.

3 Formulate strategies to support successful international operations in diverse contexts.

4 Assess the implications, risks, security, integrity and confidentiality aspects of applying innovative solutions across multi-national and trans-national companies.

Solutions

The main concern of performing the present study is to develop an understanding of the strategic management of an enterprise engaged in international business. For developing such understandings the Volkswagen is selected as a brand, which belongs to the automobile industry. Company is presently running business activities in 153 nations, which wants to expand its business in international market of Indonesia. The turnover of company for the year 2020 was €222.884 billion, and it employed a total of 662575 (Volkswagen, 2021).

This study contains several models such as PEST, Porter’s five forces, diamond model, for analyzing the country of expansion. Additionally, potential managerial issues and their solutions also provided.

Main Analysis

Reasons behind international expansion-

In 1937 Volkswagen was established by Deutsche Arbeitsfront in Berlin (Volkswagen, 2021). Additionally it was reported that Volkswagen has faced highest increase in its market share between 2019-2020 as the % jumped from 24.3% to 26.2 % and with the revised strategy of the company, it aims at increasing such share to 5% by 2025 (Volkswagen, 2021). Thereby after such an amazing performance in around 153 countries the Volkswagen is planning to expand further its business in Indonesia. The company noticed potential growth in term of economy in Indonesia. Further, such international expansion would help them to achieve their target of attaining market share by +5% by 2025 (VW plans to build car factory in Indonesia, 2018).

Possible strategic choices available to the company

Also the economy of the country is growing vastly along with the need for the automobile companies (Global Strategic Choices, 2020). As per few reports it is estimated that around 80 vehicles per 1000 individuals in Indonesia which is even higher than in US. Further the reason behind Indonesia as a strategic choice is given through-

Figure 1 Porter's diamond model
(Source: Porter’s diamond model, 2018).

Factor Conditions:

The factor condition includes resources, climate, demographics and geographical locations. The Automotive industrial sector in Indonesia holds 10.16% of share in the market. As per 2020 reports the automotive sector had around 532 thousand of sales of motor vehicles in Indonesia. It could be said that the country is the primarily location for the manufacturing of innovative and luxury cars. Also the country is best performing care seller for brands like Toyota, Honda, and Brio etc. Further the flow of workforce within the country is also impressive as it provides with the more skilled, talented employees (Butt, Katuse, and Namada, 2019).

Demand Conditions:

These demand conditions states about the nature of the home market for demand for the particular industry’s goods and services. The demand for automotive sector is Indonesia is notably rising. It holds around 10% of share in the market and the sale of motor vehicle is seemed to be increasing year by year (Waluya, Iqbal, and Indradewa, 2019). Therefore it would be any fair and reasonable decision of Volkswagen to invest in Indonesia as this market would definitely provide them with lucrative returns on such investments.

Firm’s Strategy, Structure and Rivals:

This section reveal about the nature of rivalry created operational, management structure of companies, there vision and mission for success etc. The Volkswagen faces high competition in the market such as through its competitors BMW, Audi, Mercedes etc. The Indonesian market has the competence to adapt itself as per new technologies, new environmental conditions and protect its existing companies from new entrants.

Related and Supporting Industries:

This section includes the availability of the suppliers or supporting industries in the nation. Volkswagen is a high quality automotive brand and has a wide network of its suppliers around all over the globe (Wu, and Ang, 2020). Indonesia has also wide availability of supporting industries which could support the growth of Volkswagen in the region.

Strategies for Internationalization

Internationalization strategy is referred as strategies by which company sells its products and services exterior to its domestic market. Some of the internationalization strategies could be adopted by the cited organization is as follows –

Transnational: In this strategy, company is operating from its headquarter in its nation of origin, although, it also permit the organization to increase with full-scale operations in overseas market. Transnational organizations sell their goods and services in several nations in all over globe. The difference lies in the manner in which goods is marketed in every nation. Some of the main feature of the cited strategy consists of companies have distinct marketing, research and development department to address the local consumers, similar goods and services sold in distinct market, and some others (Bretos, Diaz-Foncea, and Marcuello, 2020).

Multi-domestic: The cited strategy makes investment in establishment of existence in overseas nation and tailoring its goods to the local market. This strategy can be adopted their goods and offering and reposition their marketing planning to participate in foreign audience. It considers foreign tradition, custom, and culture norms. In this strategy, usually headquarter is operated in the country of origin. However, company could set up localized headquarter in foreign nation from which they could manage the connection with foreign consumers (Kresnawan, et al. 2021). Some of the main features of the cited strategy consist of emphasis on establishment of existence and tailoring goods to suit in the new market, competitive benefits ascertained distinctively in every nation, and others.

Global: When the organization adopts global business strategies, the entire world is treated as one market and leverage economies of scale to increase revenue and reach. In this strategy, company has minimum local variations, like products and services are homogenized for reduction of cost while reaching as several individuals as possible. Usually, headquarter is established in the country of origin, while also setting up operations in the foreign market. Some of the main features of this strategy include integrated mechanism in all over distinct nations, homogenized goods for minimization costs, and fewer adjustments required to break into globalized market.

International: It is considered as one of the most common strategy, which emphasizes on exporting goods and services to overseas nations while keeping manufacturing headquarter at home. This suggests that, organizations avoid the requirement to invest in employees and facilities in foreign nation. Business goals are primarily in the direction of the home nation, but with some connecting to the international market.

Based on above strategies, translation strategy would be appropriate for the Volkswagen as it has combine factors of global and multi-domestic strategies. By adoption of the same, Volkswagen could increase full-scale operations in Indonesia. In this strategy, company’s international business activities are coordinated by cooperation and interdependence between its head office, operational department, and globalized situated subsidiaries. Volkswagen can gain several benefits due to transnational strategy inclusive of better market penetration, lower cost, better understanding of culture, and more efficiency.
Country analysis

Reasons behind choosing Indonesia as subsidiary company’s location

PEST analysis

Porter five forces

Table 2- Porter five forces model

The market is seemed to be safe and the Volkswagen already have and existing brand image which would help it to grow even more lucratively (Oh, Kim, and Shin, 2019).
Strategic methods of entry and possible consequences

Licensing

It is a type of business arrangement under which the one company provides permission to other company for the purpose of manufacturing its products against specific payments. The international licensing allow the firms to manufacture in the region for the specific period of time either exclusively or non- exclusively (Micek, et al, 2021). This way the firms could also take the advantage of the existing firm’s pipeline and generate revenue. This mode of entry comes with various benefit such as opportunity for passive income, new business creation opportunities in international markets, involvement of risk is very much less from both the sides.

Consequences

The chances of getting IP theft increasing generally in licensing type of mode of entry, the misuse of intellectually properties, exposure, privacy theft and other issues comes with it.

Joint Venture

This is the most preferred mode of entry as it creates the company with another partner especially in the emerging markets. Under this the company could take advantage of the partner company’s infrastructure, reputation and local knowledge. This also comes with the opportunity to get new capacity and expertise (Guzik, Doma?ski, and Gwosdz, 2020). The risk is also shared equally among the partners and enables the company to work comfortably in the new environment as well.

Consequences

The imbalance is created in the level of investment, expertise, assets and liabilities bought by both the parties in the venture.

Mergers and acquisitions

This mode of entry is solely based on the fundamental decisions made by the firms in order to enter in a new market. The merger and acquisition strategy wishes to expand the business of brand in term of geographical areas as well as the area of capabilities. This way the brand could also achieve the economies of scale. This mode of entry provides with the power and control over the market (Bretos, Diaz-Foncea, and Marcuello, 2020). Further the biggest and foremost advantage of such entry is that it benefits in tax.

Consequences

As a result of such merging and acquisition entry the workforce of small firms might get exhaustive re- skilling. Also the risk of getting over employed department could also be raised under such entry type. Due to the acquisition or merger process the loss of business understanding and loss of experienced workers could also be seen.

Based on above three modes of entry, it can be said that, joint venture would be appropriate mode of entry for the Volkswagen. The reason behind the same is that, it assists towards reduction of political risk that is reflected in the PEST analysis. Along with, it also enables transfer of technologies, knowledge of overseas market among the partnering firm. Since, Porter’s diamond model reflected that, in Indonesia, there is several related and supporting companies, and therefore by entering into joint venture with local firm, company can access success in that market.

The Potential Organizational and Managerial Problems in New International Environment

Organizational co-ordination

One of the major problems the company would face in the new international environment is the coordination in the organization. An inadequate coordination in the company could assists towards reduction in productivity, complicated procedures and significant time for completion of activities. One of the main reasons behind this issue is duplication and unclear departmental priorities (Dwijendra, 2020). In this aspect, planning of new projects would require to take into account content of information that distinct divisions would need by keeping their activities proper, along with the time when the information is needed. Therefore, if the Volkswagen’s management does not do proper planning and strategies for the international expansion, then they will suffer from issue of organizational co-ordination.

Culture Issue (Hofstede)

In this aspect, Hofstede proposed six culture dimension that reflects the cultural differences among distinct nations, and same is explained as follows –

Power distance: The greater power distance in Indonesia in comparison to Germany suggests a more acceptance of unequal power distribution, differences in hierarchy, and significant differences in pay.

Individualism v collectivism: The lesser individualism in Indonesia in comparison to Germany reflects that measures tending to emphasis or reward individual like performance related payment, individual appraisal system, does not observe fertile basis, or at least might be less successful as compared in Germany.

Masculinity v femininity: The lower masculinity in Indonesia in comparison to Germany suggests that the tendency of the Germans to desire to get the job done, notwithstanding of the emotional or relationship expenses that might be included, creates the Germans observe rude, while more femininity mechanism of Asian partners looks to the Germans like neglecting the issue (Stehle, and Erwee, 2007).

Uncertainty avoidance: In this aspect, uncertainty avoidance is high in Germany and low in Indonesia, which reflects that Germans have advanced wide formal system of rules, standards, or quality to control their environment purposely.

Long term orientation: Both Indonesia and Germany has low long term orientation, which reflects about culture of saving and planning for the future.

Table 1 Hofstede’s cultural dimension

Organizational Structure (Centralization v Decentralization)

Organizational structure reflects the number of layers for management and the manner of interaction with one another. In case of centralized organizational structure, business decisions are taken at the top of business and commands are given to subordinates (Nindito, et al, 2020). However, centralized management system usually is slow in responding to changes in business environment or domestic changes near their branches. Further, in case of decentralized organizational structure, authorities of decisions are shifted from senior management to the lower level employees, by which employees possess more decision making responsibilities (Witiastuti, et al, 2017). Therefore, management of Volkswagen at the time of international expansion may face the issue for ascertainment of which type of organizational structure should be implemented.

Recommendations to overcome potential problems

In order to overcomes the above confronted issues the management of Volkswagen is recommended to-
Harness local market expertise-

The local knowledge of the market is must when setting up business internationally (Braun, and Van Erp, 2021). With help of these local experts the business could easily operate and even expand its operation in the new international environment. These experts would help in providing the valuable insights to management which would help them to hire the talent as per the market required and would also help in reducing the burden of HR team. The local experts further would help the management to create their reputation in new location by demonstrating their commitment in regards of the local culture and community.

Navigating New Legislation

There are number of legislations and jurisdictions at the new global market which are to be fulfilled by the management (Bai, 2021). Understanding of these laws and regulations and applying them in the daily operational practices would help the business to achieve success in the new international market. This could be done by hiring a local lawyer for the firm which would advise regarding the local legislations and provide the best possible guidance to the company (Nindito, et al, 2020).

Cross Border Knowledge

Sharing of knowledge could also help the business to overcome the international business related problems as this would help the business to establish regional structure cross the market. Regular share of insights and best operational tips who help to motivate the employees as well as would increase the productivity and efficiency of the business by providing best possible services to the international market (Witiastuti, et al 2017).

Democratic Management Style

It is recommended that, company should implement democratic management style that encourage more collaborative manner of working. The reason behind selection of this management style by Volkswagen is that, in motivates creativity and involvement in decision taking procedure. Such involvement also assists towards commitment of teams for achieving outcomes, assisting towards greater productivity level. Some of the factors of successful management include planning, effective communication, integration, motivation, management of workload, and evaluation.

Conclusion

From the above analysis made for the purpose of international expansion of Volkswagen in Indonesia, it could be said that the new location selected by the company is worth to invest in. The rising demand for automotive sector in Indonesia makes it an appropriate choice by the Volkswagen brand to invest in such region as this would provide it with lucrative returns. Lastly some of the potential problems like cultural issue and organizational structure identified in the process of internationalization. In order to address such issues the recommendation of hiring local expert, democratic management style and cross border knowledge is provided to company.

References

Bai, Y., (2021).Analysis of Overseas Management Strategy of the Volkswagen Group. In 6th International Conference on Financial Innovation and Economic Development (ICFIED 2021) (pp. 229-234). Available from: https://www.atlantis-press.com/article/125954257.pdf [Accessed on 20th November].

Braun, C. and Van Erp, J., (2021). International regime complexes and corporate crime: a research agenda based on the Volkswagen diesel fraud case. Crime, Law and Social Change, pp.1-22.Available from: https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s10611-021-09980-z[Accessed on 20th November].

Bretos, I., Diaz-Foncea, M. and Marcuello, C., (2020). International expansion of social enterprises as a catalyst for scaling up social impact across borders. Sustainability, 12(8), p.3262.Available from: https://www.mdpi.com/693348[Accessed on 20th November].

Butt, M.A., Katuse, P. and Namada, J., (2019). Government’s role as moderator in relationship of porter’s diamond factor conditions and firm’s performance. International Journal of Research in Business and Social Science (2147-4478), 8(6), pp.40-48.Available from: http://www.ssbfnet.com/ojs/index.php/ijrbs/article/view/510[Accessed on 20th November].

Dwijendra, N.K.A., (2020). Identity Struggle Perspective in Car-Shaped Shrine in Paluang Temple, Nusa Penida Bali, Indonesia. International Journal of Psychosocial Rehabilitation, 24(4).Available from: https://www.academia.edu/download/62926501/PR201653_copy20200412-45691-e6r5cy.pdf[Accessed on 20th November].

Global Strategic Choices, (2020), (online), Available through <https://saylordotorg.github.io/text_international-business/s12-01-global-strategic-choices.html> [Accessed on 18th November].

Guzik, R., Doma?ski, B. and Gwosdz, K., (2020). Automotive industry dynamics in Central Europe. In New Frontiers of the Automobile Industry (pp. 377-397). Available from: https://link.springer.com/chapter/10.1007/978-3-030-18881-8_15[Accessed on 20th November].

Kresnawan, M.R., Yurnaidi, Z., Bilqis, A., Natasha, T. and Wijaya, B.S., (2021). Electric Vehicle Readiness in Southeast Asia: A PEST Policy Review. Perceptions of Energy Resources Efficiency for Sustainable Development in the Developing Context of Nigeria: Implications for Enterprise Development in the Energy Sector, p.105.Available from: https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Lukman[Accessed on 20th November].

Micek, G., Guzik, R., Gwosdz, K. and Doma?ski, B., (2021). Newcomers from the Periphery: The International Expansion of Polish Automotive Companies. Energies, 14(9), p.2617.https://www.mdpi.com/1996-1073/14/9/2617[Accessed on 20th November].

Nindito, H., Soeparno, H., Santoso, C.B. and Napitupulu, T.A., (2020). November. Technology Adoption of Smart Tourism in Indonesia: Systematic Literature Review. In 2020 International Conference on Informatics, Multimedia, Cyber and Information System (ICIMCIS) (pp. 13-17).Available from: https://ieeexplore.ieee.org/abstract/document/9354280/[Accessed on 20th November].

Nurhadi, H.Q.A., Nurcahyo, R. and Gabriel, D.S., (2021). Strategic Development for A Filter Automotive Component Company in Facing the Electric Vehicles Era in Indonesia. In 11th Annual International Conference on Industrial Engineering and Operations Management, IEOM 2021 (pp. 758-766). Available from: http://www.ieomsociety.org/singapore2021/papers/144.pdf[Accessed on 20th November].

Oh, C.H., Kim, M. and Shin, J.,( 2019). Paths and geographic scope of international expansion across industries. International Business Review, 28(3), pp.560-574.Available from: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0969593117306340[Accessed on 20th November].
Porter’s diamond model (2018). (Online). Available through<https://expertprogrammanagement.com/2018/04/porter-diamond-model/>[Accessed on 20th November]

Sijabat, R., (2019). Macro-environment analysis of the tourism industry in Indonesia: findings from the PEST analysis. Innovative issues and approaches in social sciences, 12(3), pp.96-118.Available from: https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/e06f/97c91de33529ccce4a4a07344e647e7b0e80.pdf#page=96[Accessed on 20th November].

Susilo, D., (2018). Macro environment analysis of automotive industry in Indonesia. BISE: Jurnal Pendidikan Bisnis dan Ekonomi, 4(2), pp.65-73.Available from: https://jurnal.uns.ac.id/bise/article/view/25342[Accessed on 20th November].

Volkswagen, 2021, (online), Available through <https://www.volkswagenag.com/> [Accessed on 18th November].
VW plans to build car factory in Indonesia, (2018), (online), Available through <https://en.antaranews.com/news/121433/vw-plans-to-build-car-factory-in-indonesia> [Accessed on 18th November].

Waluya, A.I., Iqbal, M.A. and Indradewa, R., (2019). How product quality, brand image, and customer satisfaction affect the purchase decisions of Indonesian automotive customers. International Journal of Services, Economics and Management, 10(2), pp.177-193.Available from: https://www.inderscienceonline.com/doi/abs/10.1504/IJSEM.2019.100944[Accessed on 20th November].

Witiastuti, R.S., Putri, V.W., Wijayanto, A. and Sudarma, K., (2017). Improvement Efforts in Marketing Value Drivers through E-Marketing for Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises (SMEs) in Superior Processed Products in Semarang Regency, Indonesia. International Journal of the Computer, the Internet and Management, 25(1), pp.21-24.Available from: http://www.ijcim.th.org/past_editions/2017V25N1/25n1Page21.pdf[Accessed on 20th November].

Wu, J. and Ang, S.H., (2020). Network complementaries in the international expansion of emerging market firms. Journal of World Business, 55(2), p.101045.Available from: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1090951618302979[Accessed on 20th November].

Stehle, W. and Erwee, R., (2007). Cultural differences influencing German HR policies in Asia. Journal of Asia Business Studies.

MIS606 Professional Practice Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Individual/Group Individual - Length 5,000 words (+/- 10%)

Learning Outcomes

a) Reflect on the role of a Business Analyst in the contemporary business environment and society more broadly.

b) Cultivate an understanding of who the student is as a professional and what their impact should be to the enterprise.

c) Deliver a substantial project that synthesises and integrates knowledge and practice gained from all other MBIS subjects.

Submission

This assessment brief will be made available from Monday, 12 noon (AEST) of Module 1.1. This assessment will close on Sunday 11.55pm (AEST) of Module 6.1.

For intensive class: This assessment will close on Sunday 11.55pm (AEST) of Module 6.1 (Week 6).

Weighting - 50%

Total Marks - 50 marks

Context

Remember that this subject is the culminating and integrating experience for the MBIS. It is assumed that you have kept a reflective diary from during your study in all other subjects and then put your knowledge to practice in a custom setting negotiated with the learning facilitator. This project enables you to demonstrate your ability to think strategically and apply the concepts and tools learned in the subject to an organisation of your choice. You combine a range of research methodologies to real business problems to demonstrate how the rigour and application of research processes can underpin the justification for change. In other words, you will experience what it means to be an IT professional.

Instructions

To start this assessment, you need to first choose an organization of your choice. After discussing it with your learning facilitator, you have to then find the business problems and needs that your knowledge obtained in all the subjects can address them. Remember that you need to use research methodologies to justify the changes and solutions that you proposed for the problems.

There is no specific format for the assessment. You are expected to cite all the academic references that you used in the body of the report conforming to the APA referencing style. In preparing for the assessment, remember that the activities included in the modules are specifically designed to scaffold your understanding. If you have attended class and engaged in the activities, this assessment will be very easy to write.

Submission Instructions:

Be sure to keep several drafts of your work as well as your notes and any sources you used to draw on in preparing your report. For assignment help, Extensions will be considered only in extenuating circumstances where the student has applied before the due date. At that point, students are required to provide the latest draft, in case the extension is not granted and to demonstrate they have earnestly done everything to avoid lateness. If you use any resource, you have to cite them in your report using the APA referencing style.

You are responsible for keeping appropriate back-ups and drafts of their assignments and to submit the correct version.

Torrens University Australia policies apply to the preparation and submission of this assignment.

Solution

THE SUPPLY CHAIN ISSUES FACED BY AMAZON DUE TO COVID-19 PANDEMIC

Introduction

Jeff Bezos is the founder of Amazon and in Washington, the company has its headquarters. In the world, the company is running its business on a digital platform and provides a different range of services. At the initial stage, the company deals in selling books in the online market but slowly its expanding product portfolio includes electronics, households, software, home appliances and many more. In the year 2018 Amazon overtook Microsoft and became one of the most popular brands in the online world. The main purpose of the report is to understand the major issues Amazon faces due to covid-19 pandemic issues in supply chain management. The report analyzes amazon different aspects in the context of the supply chain which gets affected and faces huge loss during covid-19. Although, different strategies are identified for overcoming the issues identified related to supply chain management. Lastly, the report provides brief recommendations on improving the supply chain for continuous growth and success.

Background

In the e-commerce market amazon not only just provides services as a third party but it also focuses on producing their own brand’s products. In addition, in the growth and success of the company amazon web services are considered as an essential role. In 2018 the company’s founder achieved the award of the world’s richest man. Many horizons are crossed by the company and every year the company focuses on adding new products to its products and services portfolio (Hobbs, 2020). Amazon online website, amazon fresh, amazon pantry, amazon web services, amazon TV and many more are different products and services of amazon which are produced as in-house brands of the company. Amazon web services work as a protective technique that is adopted by many large companies, individuals and different countries' governments for protecting their data. However, many physical store networks are built by the company and it includes delivery stations, distribution networks for fresh food, fulfilment centre and so on.

In the supply chain section, new operations are operated and invested by the company and give a name to the venture as Global supply chain by Amazon. This venture helps in providing the different features related to logistics all over the world. Supply chain systems are automated and revolutionized by this. It also helps in managing the document and freight booking and many other services (Sharma et al., 2020). Due to this, amazon gets help in emitting the requirement of middleman and booking can be done by suppliers directly with amazon which helps in developing effective transparency and increase competitive advantages in the online market.

With customers, difficulties arise in e-commerce at the time of setting safe web-based and developing effective online communication. Over the orders, the real-time visibility required to set and just provide tracking numbers to customers to track their ordered products is not sufficient. The expectations of customers are high, as per the specification the deliveries must be done which includes time span and quality. As per the report of Forrester Research Inc on an average of 4.5 digital devices the customers own and expect the company to deliver the products smoothly. It helps in delivering a consistent shopping experience and builds loyalty and trust between the company and customers (Tseng et al., 2019). Customer service teams developed by the company are under skilled and it leads to increased missteps and frustration. In e-commerce lack of expertise and technology costs force companies to outsource and run business with the help of third-party service providers. Due to the covid-19 situation, Amazon faces huge issues in managing the supply chain. It also creates a huge gap between the company and customers. It is essential for Amazon to revive its supply chain management for smooth functioning and overcome these challenges the company faced during covid-19 situations.

Aims and Objectives

Aim

The main aim of the research is to understand the supply chain issues faced by Amazon due to covid-19 pandemic situations. It also identifies the strategies which need to be developed for overcoming those challenges.

Objectives

To understand the covid-19 affect the supply chain of amazon face and its impacts on the amazon business performance in the market.

To identify the employed strategies for improving the supply chain and understand the way the company tackles business during covid-19.

To evaluate the market reach and business success of amazon for improving the business future by using IoT and digital technologies in SC management.

Research Questions

1. How did covid-19 affect the supply chain of amazon and its impact on the performance of amazon in the market?

2. Has currently employed any strategies to improve the supply chain and tackle the impact of a pandemic by using specific strategies?

3. How can the market reach and business success of Amazon be improved in future by using IoT and digital technologies to strategically optimise their SC management?

Research Motivation

The COVID-19 pandemic has caused huge disruptions to the supply chain of companies across the world. This resulted from the nationwide lockdown that was implemented by a large number of organizations to keep the spread of the virus in check (Nagurney, 2021). Thus, it has become increasingly important for organizations to revive from the losses suffered due to the pandemic. This paper shall enlist ways in which Amazon may revive its supply chain to ensure its smooth functioning in the market despite all the challenges faced by it.

Problem Statement

Although Amazon is the world’s most valuable brand that has achieved global recognition, the 2020 pandemic has adversely affected the company. Therefore, it is very important to study the supply chain management of the company in order to identify the potential threats and opportunities of the company (Sodhi & Tang, 2020). The detailed analysis and assessment of the supply chain management of the company shall help in providing solutions that could be beneficial for reviving the company in the present scenario

Research Gap

The current pandemic situation has opened the door of the online market for various players in the country that has significantly affected the sales and profitability of the company. However, experts have not been able to provide many options to revive from the disruptions caused to the supply chain. This paper will throw light on this subject so that technology may be incorporated in the plan of reviving the supply chain of Amazon to ensure its sustained success in the market.

Effect of Covid-19 on Supply Chain of Amazon and Its Impact on the Business

The coronavirus outbreak is wreaking havoc on Amazon's distribution networks, affecting all of the company's suppliers, retail outlets, and dealers (Craighead, Ketchen & Darby, 2020). The business is struggling to ensure a healthy supply of needed products and services since the world continues to manoeuvre through this tough period. The company will have to keep a strong check on maintaining the quality of their service along with maintaining all the safety measures that are being ordered by the government. There are several challenges that the company faced during Covid-19:

Increase in the shipping cost-Amazon Prime was founded in 2007 and offers its customers a one-day shipping loyalty service. Prime subscribers have a strong connection to higher freight prices, along with high delivery charges. By 2018, the Prime users surpassed over 100 million, resulting in a surge in customers' demands. Amazon shipping charges have indeed been increasing around the world and are likely to persist as the outbreak progresses, posing a significant challenge for end users. Due to the extreme effect of coronavirus, Amazon's distribution costs have gone up to more than $8 billion (Ivanov, 2021). The rise in delivery costs could minimize the economic utility, giving Amazon inventory a brief pessimistic outlook. The boom in electronic commerce adoption has fuelled recent increases in transportation costs, resulting in a major demand and supply gap and courier resource limitations. Consumers need quick and free delivery, but retailers are finding it difficult to meet this demand, especially because they are harmed by prolonged lockdown during the Covid-19 infection. As a result, people from all over the world are significantly dependent on the Amazon, which consequently creates a rise in demand. Thus, the supply chain is challenged by a crunch of time.

Disruption of timely delivery-Amazon provides its customers with the benefit of delivery within a day and this is possible only because of its strong supply chain. However, due to the coronavirus outbreak, Amazon is unable to deliver the product on the promised date. Critical goods such as kitchen objects, medicines, and emergency aid along with masks and hand sanitizer are in high demand on Amazon (Rajeev et al., 2017). Although it helps in generating a lot of money for Amazon, the rapid growth in the demand for these necessities is putting a strain on the supply chain of the company. Amazon is reorganizing the logistics to fulfil the demand for important things first. As a result, they are unable to satisfy demand for non-essential items such as appliances, sports equipment, and kitchen tools. The shortage of all such products is leading to the delay of delivery. Amazon's policy of prioritizing important products affects many of these suppliers. This action has a significant impact on sellers who depend exclusively on Amazon to transport their goods to consumers. Amazon's supply chain has become very inflexible. Good flows must be reconsidered because they lack a tradition of demand and sales are more impetuous than sensible. Furthermore, during incarceration, purchasing patterns have changed, as well as the duration that the buyer receives their purchased goods (Koberg & Longoni, 2019). Vast numbers of consumers are being forced to change their buying habits, and, as a result, their relationships with the company and the distribution network are being impacted.

The disruption of Amazon’s supply chain has caused some serious issues with the smooth functioning of the business. The global epidemic of COVID-19 has raised huge problems for Amazon's market. Numerous worldwide shutdowns threaten to stifle, if not completely halt, the distribution of commodities and services, causing Amazon to suffer. The growing number of cases is causing strike action, confusion, and an unparalleled problem for Amazon's software sector, which is at the epicenter of the coronavirus disease outbreak (Ardito et al., 2019). The infections and staff discontent come under scrutiny when Amazon wants all employees on board more than ever. Within a week after the virus made its way into the world, the company had seen a sharp increase in orders. Many orders have been postponed, and Amazon new customers in the United States have been unable to place orders. The staff in Amazon storehouses, on the other hand, are faced with tough choices and issues on their own. Workers at a variety of Amazon’s fulfillment centers are staging work stoppages in protest of the company's decision to partially shutter the premises for maintenance. It's a stance sponsored by company employees. The protests by the workers are causing a threat to the sales and functioning of the company. Due to a major supply deficit, COVID-19 is the most pressing problem for all suppliers around the world (Polacco & Backes, 2018). Furthermore, Chinese resources have ceased to satisfy goods that have a strong market for supplies. The shortage of raw materials and resources has created a huge threat to Amazon's business as it is failing to meet the demand of its customers.

The company tried to implement many new logistics to fight the negative impact of the virus. However, it is evident that since the company is incorporating something new into the business, the chances of failing at it are greater. The lack of support from the employees was also causing a problem because the employees did not want to risk their lives. As a huge number of people were using Amazon to fulfil their needs for basic amenities, the company was unable to meet the demand for so many goods. Ultimately, it was leaving a bad impression on the customers (Wieland, 2021). Furthermore, many states were in complete lockdown, causing the delivery person to be unable to deliver the product to the buyers or to be delayed. The employees of the company were losing their interest in their job and their confidence in the business was fluctuating. This might give rise to employee turnover in the future and the company will have to invest more to fulfill its demand for human resources. The increase in spending will force the company to sacrifice quality of work, such as product packaging and a fast delivery carrier option. Hence, the customers will not be satisfied with the service that the company will provide and choose another platform for their next purchase.

Strategies used by Amazon to improve the supply chain management and understand the way it tackled the business during Covid-19.

The typical ways of handling Amazon's distribution network have completely altered, owing to COVID-19's comprehensive sense of its vulnerability. All suppliers, transporters, and general staff recognize that future procurement and resource management may need a major paradigm change. COVID-19 has shifted the emphasis to a more proactive and protective material stock procurement plan, while timely shipping distribution and tight current assets metrics were the targets for reducing transport cost and quality. Shipping companies and logistics administrators have mitigated some of the threats that Amazon could face as a result of the COVID-19 crisis by proper preparation (Ketchen, & Craighead, 2020). During the eruption of COVID-19, Amazon's freight transport suppliers discovered that their vessels could easily become unstable, and that the distribution chain's reliance on freight movements from some nations could place it at risk. Container supply is now being seen as among the most significant threats to COVID-19's improving economy. Amazon's sellers and vendors are also planning for sufficient backup, including excess product procurement and network credibility. To maintain corporate competitiveness and ensure business stability over the next deadly virus, certain distributors and wholesalers may increase the warehouse inventory level. Amazon is extensively evaluating the issues to minimize risk, even though preparation, procurement, concept development, and logistics are all part of one integrated business framework. Any logistics challenge can be overcome with the aid of a solid supply chain network (Zhang & Golpayegani, 2018). This disease has appeared as one of the most important forces behind Amazon's global expansion. Consumers will now get a wide range of goods shipped to their home without putting their wellbeing in jeopardy. Suppliers have indeed been capable of keeping their businesses running while complying with safety measures and other health precautions.

Amazon is attempting to reflect the evolving customer requirements in order to sustain and improve revenue and traffic movement of customers on their websites in terms of maintaining a large number of regular active customers and customer retention. This necessitates major changes in a variety of ways, along with more personalized and immersive user models, new features, redesigning, and repositioning. Amazon is now dependent on robotics to significantly increase the performance of services, due to information technology (Yu et al., 2017). To facilitate the prompt and efficient fulfilment of a large volume of orders passing across the whole distribution chain network, the logistics division employs an insightful and systematic method of order processing, warehouse control, processing, and terminal allocation. Amazon also found the right balance between minimizing inventory and having enough room to satisfy consumer demands. Vulnerabilities with supply shortages are considered by the company long ahead of time, before they occur. The company's logistics network serves as the operating pivot point for the supply networking scheme. Anything, like pricing planning and distribution monitoring, is affected by distribution. Mostly with support of a group view or a systemic solution, Owing to the epidemic, Amazon is strengthening the logistics network by making it the primary goal (Koberg & Longoni, 2019). The corporation is examining the critical components of their delivery network and determining if they interact. They're still studying the ordering programme to examine how it interacts with the distribution system and to understand the factory director and development foreman's coordination system. When it isn't as effective as the company would want, it identifies the places where improvements can be made.

The cluster perspective integrates graphs, graphics, and certain other details to make it easy to take the necessary steps of a specific business's function. The process for supplier management must have a successful distribution plan. It improves the consumer experience while reducing product degradation. Amazon's long-term economic security is aided by the wider scope of distribution channel management. Creating a successful framework for selling goods and services aids in ensuring competitive advantages, especially if Amazon's executives consider expense, sales, and operating efficiency economically (Sharma et al., 2020). Amazon should keep track of concerns like manufacturing plants, bridges, factories, and, most of all, consumers, as well as the amount, venue, and interaction between the service providers during the Covid-19 while developing its logistics plan. They established a clear delivery target and then implemented strategies that were in alignment with the main supply chain plan. If the management plan calls for product creativity, superior support, or pricing strategy, Amazon consistently maintains that perhaps the supply chain is involved in delivering the method's important elements. They bring together executives from all areas of their company on a single forum to define an organizational structure that can function with the organisation in the context of a pandemic. Amazon ensures that the data which the enterprise requires is produced to comprehend market demand. The marketing segment will reveal whatever the organization's most significant clients want and how their preferences differ (Silvestre et al., 2018). Consumers who validate the expense of the best experience, which can be highly appreciated using a more streamlined strategy, should be identified by the company's functional departments.

The company gains useful information on distributor procurement and payment arrangements. There are a few other factors to remember, such as how to prevent purchasing excess inventory, minimizing costs associated with orders and supply corrections, and improving payment terms behaviour. Many automated systems are usually used in supplier collaborations, which are closely studied and streamlined by Amazon. On the financial side of things, businesses like Amazon have a lot of room for improvement. Invalid stocks may be due to a variety of factors. Rather than simply reviewing the appropriate order, Amazon looks for the specific step in the cycle where the anomaly occurred in an effort to stop repeating the same error (Polacco & Backes, 2018). The practice of managing the supply chain in spatial locations is outdated. Because of advanced data analytics, Amazon now manages distribution networks from start to finish. The business is certain that the supply-chain structure combines business performance with good analytical capabilities and statistics, multipurpose strategic thinking. It created innovative groups to aid judgment and uncover secret possibilities and challenges in unstructured information (Min, Zacharia & Smith, 2019). Amazon constantly assures that the information security department backs them up with software and apps that make teamwork and strategic decision-making easier. It's critical to calculate order delivery and optimize transaction receipt while enhancing the quality of relationships with clients and purchases. Amazon monitors when the correct commodity is shipped to the correct location in the correct amount as requested by the customer.

Impact of IoT and digital technologies on the future success of Amazon's market reach and business.

Many consumers were afraid to use the Amazon website when it was launched initially because they couldn't see or experience the items they were purchasing. They had to spend huge amounts and go through a lengthy and inconvenient digital payment method. Amazon has dramatically improved for the better as a part of the digital revolution and IoT, which now promises faster cash registers and secure online purchases (Morais & Silvestre, 2018). Amazon's information technology remains at the heart of the company, and it has been used to enable sellers to communicate with their consumers with the help of desktop and mobile applications. The adoption and implementation of digital technologies and systems in Amazon's corporate practices to meet competitive business priorities is known as digital transformation. It is a multidimensional mechanism that is capable of causing a significant cultural and operational change in the company. Digital technological advancements have aided in acknowledging the effectiveness of reach, whether geological or textual. This has made it easier to find brands, adapt customer tastes to products, and check consistency and credibility. The Amazon websites have grown in popularity in the lives of consumers as a result of this association (Esper, 2021). Those very effects will not be possible without the use of modern and advanced digital technologies. Quick, safe, and flexible payment solutions are critical for the Amazon Company’s rapid development. According to studies, shoppers quit 69 percent of their shopping baskets on a firm's website. One of several causes is a time-consuming and complex payment process.

As a result, Amazon websites must have a quick and simple payment process. Payment methods vary by region; for example, debit cards are common in Western Canada, but electronic payments and credit cards are common in other countries. Despite the fact that emerging countries are predominantly cash-based, they are increasingly moving toward digital transformation. Amazon's main mission is to have a greater consumer service, which can be accomplished by customization. This is where information technology comes into play. Amazon websites may use AI to sell items that a buyer is most likely to purchase depending on an insightful review of their browsing background (Hu et al., 2019). It provides insights which could be utilized to improve consumer relationships with the support of text or voicemail messages. Shoppers and the Amazon businesses get connected more than ever before due to social networking sites. Users can browse e-commerce items via photos and have references that guide them to the Amazon website with a tap on platforms such as Instagram, Google, and Facebook. Customers may also use the brand profiles of different brands to read product recommendations and assess the product's benefits and disadvantages, allowing them to make a more educated decision. Digital devices such as tablets and laptops are now an essential component of a company's day-to-day activities as their use has grown. According to research, nearly half of the smartphone owners have them under close reach at all times. As a result, Amazon's success will be supported by optimizing these smart devices (Gao et al., 2018). Given the popularity of fast broadband systems, the online platform has experienced tremendous growth, and the global mobile e-commerce market is thriving.

Customers have the freedom to buy wherever and wherever they choose. Amazon sites now have the potential to have a hassle-free market reach and revenue owing to digital transformation. Amazon information systems and speedy product distribution are critical factors in its business success. As a result, transforming the overall market distribution channel under high demand and digitizing data analytics are critical. Looker and Google analytics are examples of data processing tools that offer a digital interface for efficiently managing all manufacturing details (Polacco & Backes, 2018). This is critical since a comprehensive analysis of consumer data allows for more educated management decisions and contributes to the organization's growth. Instinctive delivery is among the most fascinating aspects that new technology has shaped Amazon around the world. This is a one-of-a-kind strategy in which an e-commerce company anticipates a user's future wishlist derived from past purchases and has the goods shipped to the closest supply chain collaborator until the order is placed. As a result, anticipatory delivery saves both shoppers and Amazon websites a great deal of effort and time. Scenario planning often aids the business in inventory control, ensuring that there is still sufficient supply to meet consumers' needs. Promotional activities that were screened out by advanced spam scanners or actually missed are gone for good. Amazon has introduced the ability to capture the interest of consumers straight on their main screen. Buyers are notified about forthcoming sales and promotions through push notifications from Amazon (Garrido-Hidalgo et al., 2019). These push alerts appear on consumers' portable apps or on the firm's site, which are an excellent way to keep customers' attention.

Amazon has been able to compete internationally as never before, attributable to technological and networking advancements. Communication used to take hours, if not weeks; today, all company activities can be completed in minutes. As the new technologies and IoT are becoming involved day by day, Amazon saves a lot of money on running expenses. The organization saves money by not having to maintain everything manually, and it saves time by providing quick results. Moreover, the chances of numerical mistakes are reduced with accurate and advanced technologies. Since the company saves lots of time, money and effort, it can work more on the quality of services. The company can strategize ways to attract more customers and then convert them into loyal clients (Ruel et al., 2021). These customers can help Amazon to promote itself to other people, which will ultimately help the company to generate more revenue. Hence, digital technology is essential for the development of the company and it also helps in improving the competitiveness of the company. The management of the business operations will not need detailed scrutiny that will help the employees to put their efforts in other work departments. Furthermore, the introduction of modern technologies will enhance the creativity of the workforce. Consequently, the company will experience improved sales and profitability. The youth nowadays are well aware of social media because of the evolving technologies. This makes it easier for Amazon to gain the attention of potential buyers (Sodhi & Tang, 2020). The company can classify the products properly on their website for the easy use of visitors by adding advanced features (Gao et al., 2020).

Research Methodology

The report is done based on the secondary research methodology. In this paper the data collected with the help of qualitative data technique and analysis information in theoretical format. Also, secondary data methods help in providing adequate information related to the subject. In this method, different sources are used like Google scholar, articles, journals, and books. All the collected data are analyzed by using the inductive approach and ensure to provide the relevant information in the paper (Abdirad & Krishnan, 2020). The major issue of the subject is to identify problems faced by amazon in supply chain management during a covid-19 pandemic. Due to this, the complete report is focusing on this particular topic and collecting the data. Also, the keywords are used while researching the article on the given topic. The keywords used in the paper are supply chain management, covid-19 pandemic, Amazon supply chain, and so on. This helps in providing the correct data on the topic and maintaining the flow of the information in the paper. Lastly, it can be said that secondary data methods help in providing the data in the form of the storyline which help in increasing the knowledge of readers regarding the subject.

Recommendation

Offering consumers the option of picking up their orders from a predetermined custom clearance location or imposing delivery charges are two potential immediate alternatives to generate more profit. Implementing shipping fees on goods would aid in the reduction of high freight costs. If the buyer wishes to collect the package, a coupon could be given. Customers will be more likely to use this product if they get a discount, and they will be able to put their money into buying more goods (Wen, Choi & Chung, 2019). These approaches have a positive effect on the business's import duties, which would potentially result in a high number of sales. It also eliminates reliance on numerous party logistics firms. Besides that, by providing a single collection location for shoppers, Amazon lowers its shipping costs by eliminating the need to sell to each individual household. The distribution centre just needs to ship the packages to one spot, lowering the chances of the order being sent to the wrong address. Instead of sending delivery to distribution centre, suppliers or retailers will deliver them straight to the collection site. This would improve the distribution facility's workforce quality and competitiveness. Since implementing distribution costs will only necessitate minor programme improvements and no maintenance, this approach is relatively simple to execute. Establishing a single picking point, on the other hand, would necessitate route improvements and the involvement of another distributor or suppliers (Abdirad & Krishnan, 2020). Alliances with local retailers or the construction of a collection point will be used to create such pick-up stations. The method of satisfying consumers by demonstrating genuine goods is inextricably linked to the range of suppliers. Quality of the product and out-of-stock supplies are also issues. Amazon must implement strict standards for selecting suppliers in order to improve the supply chain operations.

For each commodity, each supplier has a different price. Furthermore, the supply procurement process must be strengthened regarding product consistency along with inventory availability. To create a long-term partnership, the aim ought to be to please the consumer by meeting their requirement for certified goods. Distributors have fake and pretentious goods, so Amazon must use multiple authentication methods based on machinery algorithms. The approach to a better supplier procurement mechanism has a number of advantages, including increased customer loyalty and less returns. Amazon can actively adopt initiatives such as smart features and power tools to accomplish its moderate targets (Ivanov, 2021). At the time of the COVID-19 epidemic, interest in Amazon distribution techniques from its digital platform and food or groceries has nearly doubled as people looked for ways to get merchandise without having to leave their homes. It expanded the market over last shipping, allowing Amazon to begin implementing its standard size strategy sooner. Amazon should set a moderate target of delivering goods to consumers' homes in order to gain long-term sustainability. Amazon must concentrate on getting the goods from the factory to the buyer. Easy and quick delivery methods are the best fit for this reducing operational cost. Customers that do not have Amazon Prime are good candidates for Amazon's conventional distribution programme. The Amazon Prime subscriber has paid for multiple shipping, which should have been delivered as promised. As a result, improving the market model or implementing a new approach is critical for increasing customer loyalty and minimizing the difficulty of last-mile distribution (Zhao, Zuo & Blackhurst, 2019). Amazon could adopt a method of delivering goods from local retailers to customers' homes. Rather than major supermarkets, Amazon must concentrate on local outlets, warehouse shops, and niche stores. The design should be implemented as a stand-alone system or as a niche Amazon Prime program. It could prove to be economically beneficial to Amazon if they divided their memberships as per the shipping date.

Conclusion

From the above study, it can be concluded that excessive freight costs, growing reliance on certain freight forwarders, instability in last-mile distribution, low priority on Amazon digital chain outlets relative to Amazon websites, and lack of supply owing to the Covid-19 disease outbreak are among the concerns found. Furthermore, several prospects have been reported for possible improvements, including booming online retail purchases, Amazon Prime Fly distribution center, and grocery channel expansion to become multitasking shops. Delays in deliveries, increased freight costs, decreased customer loyalty, and lower operating earnings are all significant consequences of these perceived opportunities and challenges. The goal here is to strengthen the distribution network by reducing the effect that reduces Amazon's economic output. To resolve problems and increase opportunities, supply customers with a collection spot, enhance the distributor procurement process, and strengthen last-mile distribution. The introduction of the proposed devices and hybrid cars, in order to boost the climate pillar, increases Amazon's emissions emission forecast. The social cornerstone should be implemented by inspiring workers and promoting their creativity, so that the company's success can be accelerated in the coronavirus scenario. Additionally, to address the quick problem, the financial review and its progress have been described by the construction of collection points in separate areas, namely retail shopping malls.

Amazon is expanding its distribution network in response to the demands of its clients by providing packages on time. Amazon is now working to make the industry more competitive for its consumers and the environment by combating climate change by 2040. At the time of the COVID-19 crisis, Amazon created several new employment opportunities to meet the need for essential products from customers. Amazon is now assisting the Health Organization by offering outstanding technology platforms and scientific resources in order to track down the outbreak, recognize the disease, and effectively contain its spread. Amazon will cut construction and acquisition costs even more by forming a joint alliance with retail outlets or other department stores, which would boost traffic congestion to the supermarkets where another collection spot will be installed. By introducing the short-term approach of customers collecting their orders from the specified address, Amazon would be allowed to conserve a significant amount of revenue. It will also work with governments to implement collection booths at subway stations and bus stops, which would make it easier for people to pick up their belongings and minimize carbon emissions, demonstrating local communities' contribution to the atmosphere.

MGT602 Business Decision Analytics Assignment 2 Sample

Assignment Brief

Individual/Group - Individual
Length - Up to 2,000 words

Learning Outcomes

a) Select and evaluate the usefulness of a range of decision making tools and reflect on your decision-making styles and contrast with other styles to determine the respective levels of rationality and intuition utilized

b) Compare, contrast and critically evaluate sources of data as influences for decision-making in arrange of business contexts

c) Examine and evaluate decision making systems and techniques to engage group decisions and
analyse how these can enhance sustainable outcomes

d) Critically examine emerging tools and technologies for decision making

Submission: 12-week class: By 11:55pm AEST/AEDT Friday of Module 6.1 (Week 11)
Intensive 6-week class. By 11.55pm AEST Friday of module 6.1 (week 6)

Weighting - 40%
Total Marks - 40 marks

Context:

Workplaces today are changing rapidly in parallel with rapid advances in technology and means of communication with teams separated in terms of space and time, that is different geographic locations and time zones, not only within countries, but also across continents. This is something that we in Torrens adapt to on a daily basis as part of a global organization. We need to take into account not only time and space, but other elements of diversity to collaborate effectively for organizational outcomes.

Task:

This assignment is designed for you to critically reflect on key themes for this subject: individual and group decision-making processes; sources of data and analysis, including usage of data analytics for organizational decision-making, and the influence of bias in effective decision-making.
In doing so, you should consider a meaningful work challenge – a project that requires many
decisions to be made- that is relevant for you- in your current, or recent workplace.
[NOTE: Torrens University is a workplace and you have a special role in it.].

CHECKPOINT:

Submit a draft of your outline and discuss your report proposal with your Learning Facilitator by WEEK 9.

Your task is to analyse the project from the perspective of decision-making points/stages. In the analysis, for assignment help you are to consider:

1. The sources of data, and the use of data analytics to identify trends/ patterns that form the evidence for decision-making;

2. Show visualizations of the decision-making process, and analytics to support the decision making;

3. Select at least three decision-making tools and technologies from within the subject modules and show their application for your project. Consider if the decision would be the same/ different by using multiple methods.

4. Present the findings of your results in a business style report that includes clear headings to guide the reader and visualization of the data sources/trends/ patterns, and is underpinned with evidence from relevant contemporary literature, including major resources from within the subject modules.

5. Reference according to the APA 6th. Ed. reference style guide, available at Student Hub@ Torrens.

Submission Instructions:

1. Submit your report to Turn-It-In.
2. Submit your report and TII report via the Assessment link in MGT602 Business Decision
Analytics on the Student Portal.
3. The Learning Facilitator will provide feedback via Grade Centre in the Student Portal.
Feedback can be viewed in My Grades.

Solution

Introduction

Selection of university is one of the prime procedures through which students enter into the field of tertiary education. The selection often becomes a major challenge on part of the students involved. This is mainly owing to the presence of a wide range of educational institutions all at the same time making the procedure more complicated in turn. The fact that almost all students prefer to get into universities providing educational guidance of good standards backed by prevalence of adequate placement facilities as well as exposure to a good faculty throughout the course period makes the university selection process an ever-exhausting dilemma. In this particular paper, I have related my entire experience of finally undertaking admission into Torrens University only after consideration of a number of decision-making models such as the Market Examination Model, Rational decision-making Model and Intuitive Decision-making Model. Thus, this paper portrays the means by which the tools related to decision-making have played a vital role on my end to overcome the challenges and successfully select the university of my choice for further studies.

Scope of auxiliary decisions and associated challenges

Identification of related challenge

It is a largely known fact that almost every student all around the world find university selection to be an ambiguous, time-consuming job involving a greater number of challenges owing to a great deal of factors associated with it thus imposing psychological stress on their end. Like many other countries, in Australia too, there exists a number of modern universities well-known within the concerned educational field for their high brand image and excellent job placement record. Maintaining such a record year after year can be seen to have managed to play a vital role on their end to acquire a number of positive reviews from their students’ end thus enhancing their popularity or winning over confidence of the students showing interest to take admission in such universities from time to time (Su & Chang, 2018). Without any doubt, there remains a great deal of pressure on the students’ end to give more effort than actually necessary in the process of Australian university selection. This is because it is the very selection that somewhat helps pave their way towards success. For instance, in case a wrong institute is selected, it automatically becomes a concern for both the student concerned as well as the university as a whole. This can be supported by drawing reference to the fact that a wrong selection directly bears a high probability to hamper future of the student concerned in negative terms hurting the personal level of growth in the process. On the other hand, from the point of view of the university, in case of wrong selection of students, it is most likely to show a direct impact upon its overall academic level of performance and influence its enrolment process in future as a result (Amani & Kim, 2018). Taking all these factors into consideration, I initially made up my mind to enrol myself into the Torrens University of Australia mainly being influenced by its eye-catching services in actual terms.

Auxiliary decisions for future action source

At the time of making selection about university, identifying my source of action in the near future seemed to hold immense importance for me. This acted as a kind of guidance on my end to decide the subject combinations that are likely to work best for me and enable me to acquire better exposure to the external environment of working. Such exposure often tends to put students like us in a challenging position in case we fail to attain enough expertise or subject knowledge in our preferred area of interest.

Analysis of Data

Following adoption of an approach to rational decision-making, an initiative has been undertaken to analyse the existing challenging scenario through initiation of a decision-making approach which is qualitative by nature. The prime factors that have duly been involved within the adopted decision-making approach include scope of placement, ranking placed by authorities or brand image of the university, associated feedback of students, overall details of the faculty, total cost of the course as well as fees structure of the targeted university (Zhang, Liu & Gao, 2019). In subsequent terms, each of these factors have duly been marked out of a total of 10 thus managing to produce an overall score for each of the universities targeted at large. A detailed analysis of the scores obtained in the form of a matrix made it quite clear for me to undertake admission in Torrens University. While making score it has been taken care that no biasness is there in making score matrix. However, some blind spots were there regarding information of future exposure to students regarding each university. On this note, the scores obtained managed to give me a rough idea or rather indication of the high level of exposure that I am likely to acquire as well as the better-quality knowledge of my preferred area of education following admission into it in comparison to the other alternative universities otherwise available.

Reflect upon the decisions with help of decision-making models

It is the decision-making procedure duly based on multiple criteria that has grown out to be a major part of the study of operation in order to support performance standards of decision-makers like us. In this regard, it has been a largely observed fact that students belonging to Torrens University in Australia manage to acquire heights from job opportunities coming from some of the popular brands of the world thus enjoying admittance to technology that seems to be cutting-edge through ages. Besides this, a number of graduates often seem to secure placement with organisations they have already been associated with at time of learning through the counselling department of the university concerned mainly to enhance opportunities to socialise. Such decision-making measures thus has contributed to shift the entire academic procedure into the one driven by data through implementation of appropriate statistical techniques for analysis (Azizan et al. 2017).

For instance, from the university point of view, a number of factors hold responsibility at the time of selecting students for their desired course and handle the international based students. This often involves consideration of a number of variables such as ability to pay the course fees, grades obtained, parental support, level of seriousness and dedication of the students concerned. Similar to the way students usually select their desired colleges, application of sufficient statistical techniques upon the estimated values of the factors taken into consideration is likely to enable management of the college concerned to come to certain decisions. This involves improvisation of its performance criteria as well as the related scope and making amendments in fee or course structure as per necessity.

The three major models that have been considered in order to determine the best possible solution and the Torrens University to obtain its desired outcome are as follows:

Market examination Model

This particular model plays a vital role with regard to conducting a wide range of market research prior to actual application of e-marketing measures (Sharma et al. 2019). In this regard, universities are observed to utilise various e-marketing techniques guided by the sole motive of promoting their business operations through providing awareness of the services offered on its end all around the globe. Such detailed research work is largely a proactive means helpful in undertaking expected decisions such as the kind of students who would be joining the specific universities. In the current context, the adopted market research within Australia has been based upon 12 universities who have initiated research on various students and gathered sufficient data in order to arrive at finalised decisions. Adherence to such analytical measures automatically contributes to optimal management of time, upgradation of branding of the university thus streamlining the entire procedure from beforehand (Marchau et al. 2019).

Such an initiation of market examination strategy on part of the universities to understand needs of the students involved on one hand and students determining the best possible universities for them on the other initiates determination of the best one irrespective of the fact that this is associated with a number of geographical challenges and is time consuming by nature. Thus, such an in-depth analysis of the market has enabled me to come up with the solution that Torrens University is the best choice for me.

Rational decision-making Model

This particular model as portrayed in Appendix 1 often takes into regard a number of associated limitations and objectives. This holds applicable at times when some employee accepts a new job offer in a different country (Amani & Kim, 2018). The prime issue on this note might involve the problem of commuting to office thus creating a need to avail public transport options or purchase a new car. This might also involve consideration of some other factors such as understanding the budget available, identification of preferred model or brand. Consideration of some other alternative options such as public transport or car sharing backed by implementation of statistical measures might lead to undertaking rational decisions.

The rational decision-making model for this particular case of selection of university is discussed as follows:
Identification of existing problem: Out of all the universities operating in Australia, identify the university best applicable for further studies and place judgement whether Torrens University is a suitable one or not.
Establishment of decision criteria: Taking universities that provide adequate exposure to students and possess sufficient facilities into consideration.

Weighing of decision criteria: Understand whether the students considered are likely to avail suitable teaching options as well as exposure to proper managerial faculty.

Finding out alternatives: A detailed analysis of all major alternatives available in hand such as scope of placement, kind of course or faculty offered and course fee structure.

Evaluation of available alternatives: Following in-depth consideration of all alternate options available, formulation of personalised mean score of all available universities on basis of selected criteria.
Selection of the best one: Finally, announcing the university that fulfilled all the focused criteria as the best one.

Intuitive decision-making Model

The intuitive decision-making model involves adoption of really quick actions based on available correct information (Abubakar et al. 2019). Such a model is more or less structured by nature and largely chooses a further subjective viewpoint. This involves consideration of the very pattern backed by salience and recognition.

Themes taken into consideration in decision-making procedure

Counselling of international students is largely regarded as a complex one as it includes individuals belonging to varied mind-set, emotions and background (Aminudin et al. 2018). As per demonstration in Appendix 2, the model in this particular case mainly initiated decisions as well as ethics mainly based upon decisions. The solution that successfully fits all major criteria of the students as mentioned within the data analysis part has duly been considered underpinning the blind spots and biasness. This, in turn, enabled me to decide upon the ideal action course and discover the best possible one by adequately following the required steps.

Module 1

This particular module has been a helpful one since it included application of a number of models related to decision-making used within the research work at large.

Module 2

The module helped develop a better understanding of the challenges identified within the study and develop the rational model in turn.

Module 3

This module, in particular, has enabled convey knowledge regarding the need for diversity and challenges associated therewith thus paving the way towards undertaking the right decision at the right time thus fulfilling the motive of selecting the right desired career.

Module 5 and Module 6

Both these modules have contributed to better adoption of data analysis procedures as well as enabling the researcher concerned to maintain adherence with the concept of Auto Intelligence. All these thereby helped formulate the critical path to undertaking a decision about the university to be selected for further study.

Conclusion

From the overall discussion, it can be concluded selecting the university out of the many available in Australia seemed to be a crucial challenge on part of the students. It is the development of the score matrix and adherence to an intuitive decision-making approach that play a crucial role in this regard and identify the best possible one. This, backed by adoption of decision-making models, helped better examine the market and arrive at concrete decisions in turn.
 

Reference List

Abubakar, A. M., Elrehail, H., Alatailat, M. A., & Elçi, A. (2019). Knowledge management, decision-making style and organizational performance. Journal of Innovation & Knowledge, 4(2), 104-114. Retrieved from: https://sci-hub.se/https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2444569X17300562

Amani, M., & Kim, M. M. (2018). Study abroad participation at community colleges: Students’ decision and influential factors. Community College Journal of Research and Practice, 42(10), 678-692. Retrieved from: https://sci-hub.se/https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/10668926.2017.1352544

Aminudin, N., Huda, M., Kilani, A., Embong, W. H. W., Mohamed, A. M., Basiron, B., ... & Triono, A. (2018). Higher education selection using simple additive weighting. International Journal of Engineering and Technology (UAE), 7(2.27), 211-217. Retrieved from: https://eprints.utm.my/id/eprint/84795/1/MiftachulHuda2018_HigherEducationSelectionUsingSimple.pdf

Azizan, F. L., Ahmad, N. A., Rahim, N. F., Daud, R., Samani, M. C., Zailani, M. A., ... & Kamal, A. A. (2017). Factors that Influence Program Selection and Its Relationship with Students’ Achievement in Pre-University Study. Asian Social Science, 13(9). Retrieved from: https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Mohamad-Fhaizal-Mohamad-Bukhori-2/publication/319527678_Factors_that_Influence_Program_Selection_and_Its_Relationship_with_Students%27_Achievement_in_Pre-University_Study/links/59b11573a6fdcc3f888dcedc/Factors-that-Influence-Program-Selection-and-Its-Relationship-with-Students-Achievement-in-Pre-University-Study.pdf

Marchau, V. A., Walker, W. E., Bloemen, P. J., & Popper, S. W. (2019). Decision making under deep uncertainty: from theory to practice (p. 405). Springer Nature. Retrieved from: https://library.oapen.org/bitstream/handle/20.500.12657/22900/1007261.pdf?sequence=1

Sharma, P. N., Shmueli, G., Sarstedt, M., Danks, N., & Ray, S. (2019). Prediction?oriented model selection in partial least squares path modeling. Decision Sciences. Retrieved from: https://sci-hub.se/https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1111/deci.12329

Su, J., & Chang, A. (2018). Factors affecting college students’ brand loyalty toward fast fashion. International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management. Retrieved from: https://sci-hub.se/https://www.emerald.com/insight/content/doi/10.1108/IJRDM-01-2016-0015/full/html

Zhang, P., Liu, G., & Gao, W. (2019). Distinguishing two types of labels for multi-label feature selection. Pattern Recognition, 95, 72-82. Retrieved from: https://sci-hub.se/https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0031320319302353

MGT613 Leadership for Sustainable Futures Assignment Sample

 Assignment Brief

Length 1,500 words

Learning Outcomes

1. Define and explain the principles of sustainability in a global business environment
2. Analyze and compare how a range of organizational entities articulate values for sustainability in their vision-mission statements and implement strategy for sustainability
Submission Assessment 1: End of module 2.2, week 4
Weighting Assessment 1: 25%
Total Marks 25 marks

Context:

BCorporations and benefit organizations, or ‘for-purpose’ organizations may be for profit, and not-for-profit. There is a growing number of these organization types, including Laureate International, (Torrens University) in a range of industry sectors. BLab is the organisation involved in accrediting organisations as BCorps. BLAB is an ENABLER for organisations to focus on balancing Profit AND Purpose You can find a list of BCORPS athttps://bcorporation.net/.

BCorps are often focused on one or more specific sustainable development challenges. For assignment help Review the list of 17 SDGS (Sustainable Development Goals) at UNDP (United Nations Development Program)- see overview plus poster image.

Your task is to select ONE (1) SDG and ONE (1) BCorp focused on your selected SDG. You then should proceed to investigate – complete some background reading on the SDG and the BCorp, including a range of academic articles from within the Laureate Library. Access via https://library.torrens.edu.au/home

Your research report should include:

1. Introduction – why you chose this SDG for your focus (personal experience; observations, reflection) and the BCORP selection.

2. Literature review that highlights the specific challenges for this SDG within the framework of sustainable development

3. Discussion: explain what, why and how the selected BCORP is working on this SDG (and others). Benchmark (compare) the activity of this BCORP with competitors in the same industry sector.

4. Summary of your key points, and

5. Recommendations for further action in relation to the SDG challenge (based on sections 1-4)

6. List of references (APA 6th ed. style. See the Academic Writing Guide; access via Student Hub https://library.torrens.edu.au/apa)

Solution

 Introduction

This paper focuses on the tenth SDG, which is reducing inequalities. This goal aims at minimizing the gap or inequality across and within the nations. According to Diaz?Sarachaga, Jato?Espino & Castro?Fresno (2018), the inequality which is to be reduced by this SDG is in terms of income along with other aspects of differentiation like ethnicity, race, age, disability, sex, economic or social status, origin and religion within a nation. Animikii Indigenous Technology is a Certified B Corporation chosen in this study, which is working towards establishing a balance between profit and purpose (Animikii, 2020). Their purpose is to reduce the inequality among the indigenous and non- indigenous people of Canada. This Certified B Corp requires considering the effect of the organization’s decision on the customers, workers, suppliers, environment and community. This web service based indigenously owned company is working with many organisations for creating better economic and social outcomes for the Indigenous population.

Literature Review

According to Sinha, Sengupta & Alvarado (2020), there are a total of seventeen interrelated international goals which have been designed for the purpose of achieving a sustainable and better future. These goals are known as the Sustainable Development Goals (SDG). The United Nations General Assembly had set up the SDGs in the year 2015. These Global Goals are intended to be achieved by the year 2030. The sustainable development goal 10 focuses on reducing inequalities within and among countries. Inequality has remained a persistent cause of concern for various countries across the world (United Nations, 2021). It still persists despite certain measures undertaken such as decreasing relative income inequality and other preferential trade status that has benefitted some lower-income countries.

The outbreak of the COVID-19 pandemic in 2020 has further deepened this inequality by striking the most vulnerable and poorest sections of the society (United Nations, 2021). Simultaneously, various social, economic and political inequalities have become more evident during this pandemic. These inequalities are further increasing amongst vulnerable populations in countries possessing inefficient health systems and facing humanitarian crises (United Nations, 2021). Thus, it has left various people including refugees and migrants, older persons, persons with disabilities, indigenous people and children at disadvantages. There has been three dimensions of social, economic and ecological for understanding inequality (Savitz & Weber, 2006). Social dimension provides that inequal levels of income and revenue are indicators of persisting problems within societies (Kuhn, 2020). The economists believe that inequality in inevitable and desirable in nations for encouraging entrepreneurs in getting incentives so that they invest capital and technical know-how in businesses (Reinhardt, 2000). This further helps in creating jobs and wealth for other members in the society. Lastly, ecological inequality is also faced by major populations consisting of poor people and individuals living in rural areas (Kuhn, 2020). Thus, it is essential to address the problem of inequality through all these dimensions.

Inequality has always been a serious threat to both social and political stability of a country. It has also been observed that such inequality hampers sustained growth of a nation (Anderson, 2016). There has been various literature studying about the association between growing inequality and economic shocks or crises. Furthermore, greater equality of income is expected to enhance the duration of economic growth and sustainability in a country, which further leads to low government corruption, low foreign debt, free trade and foreign investment (Anderson, 2016). This helps in contributing towards the nation’s sustainable development. Businesses mainly focus mainly on addressing the environmental concerns rather than social issues (Reinhardt, 1999). It has become essential for them to address this issue of inequality for surviving in the competitive world. Inequality has also been viewed as moral and economic issues that need to be reduced under the sustainable development goal (Oestreich, 2018). The tenth goal focuses on progressive and sustained decrease in economic inequality amongst and within countries instead of elimination of the same. This indicates that while some inequality in the society is inevitable, it still needs to be addressed under the economic theory. It has been further pointed out that equity can be implied through redistribution of wealth amongst the poor through different mechanisms (Oestreich, 2018). These include progressive taxation, social services, cash transfers and programs for economic opportunity. It is also essential to address the short-term unfairness and injustice in this regard through equity-creating policies for reducing inequality (Pandey, Kumar, Ayanore & Shalaby, 2020). In addition, the goal also focuses on addressing discrimination against various minority groups like indigenous populations, disabled persons, minority groups, women and others.

Discussion

Massive number of individuals have started working remotely on an overnight basis. At Animikki, the work is always carried out in a remote-friendly basis that provides the privilege to work both as an organization as well as an individual. The selected BCORP, Animikki has been working on SDG 10, reducing inequalities through digital divide. In other words, through internet connectivity equitable outcomes are generated for Indigenous individuals. The company aims at accomplishing this impact on a daily basis through their work in providing support to the indigenous innovation (Animikki, 2020). Animikki reflects on the fact that although watching HD video on poor internet connectivity is possible but the probability to enjoy it reduces. This might a minor issue for privileged individuals but for minorities this acts as a structural inequality. They try to avoid structural inequality among Indigenous individuals by figuring out unreliable internet connectivity as well as slow speeds. The team members in the BCORP does not take internet connection for granted. In other words, although they have the connectivity to carry out their work remotely but due to bandwidth limitations internet connection gets hampered if any mishap takes place in one of the scarce fibre optic lines that are connecting the North. The initiative towards working from home as well as supportive online education has just exaggerated the digital divide (Savitz & Weber, 2006). They believe in the fact that investment in technology acts as a path that leads to economic justice, equitable results as well as self-sufficiency among indigenous individuals.

In Canada, there is hardly any market competition for internet connectivity. In other words, there are only five telecommunication companies that includes Telus, Bell, Shaw, Quebecor and Rogers. These companies own an enormous majority of internet infrastructure in the country. Canada appears to possess a digital reliance on corporate interests. This increases broader data sovereignty questions. The competitors such as Nirvana Canada, n49 are hardly as popular as Animikki. The benchmarking has been provided of Animikki in comparison to Starlink by SpaceX that has been regarded as the major competitor for Animikki. It has launched almost 422 satellites in the year 2020 that make sure to provide coverage to the entire world (Animikki, 2020). Starlink also has the probability to link remote indigenous individuals without investing a lot of time in creating complicated infrastructure. In comparison to that the activities by Animikki undertakes action that provides support to Indigenous individuals as well as communities in Canada. Starlink could deliver internet access to groups where there was hardly any probability before. It also has the potential to open new opportunities for economic development through internet-based technologies.

Summary

Animikii Indigenous Technology is already working towards reducing the inequalities across the indigenous and non- indigenous people in Canada. The Certified B Corp is using technology for economic liberation and enhancing the self-sufficiency of the indigenous people. The team of innovators at Animikii Indigenous Technology comprises indigenous as well as non- indigenous people. They work together, using business as a driving force for social good. The organisation has been working effectively to generate equitable outcomes for the indigenous community. Animikii Indigenous Technology wants to emerge as a leading example of an indigenous tech company, which would be motivating the indigenous youth and the future generations to take up entrepreneurship and technology as a career. The organisation through the donations, programs and social initiatives is trying to establish economic justice for the indigenous community.

Recommendations and Conclusion

It can be concluded that the choice of tool of the Certified B Corp is technology, which they are using to yield equitable outcomes for the indigenous community. Animikii Indigenous Technology as the study suggests has been successful to a great extent in realising their SDG. They have been significantly contributing and reducing the inequality across Canada’s indigenous population. At Animikii, the leaders also belong to the indigenous as well as non- indigenous communities. Thus, the management reflects inclusion and reduction of inequality. They also believe that the investments made in technology facilitate enhancement of self-sufficiency of the deprived communities, which would further ensure economic justice and equity. The initiatives for economic development of the indigenous community as believed by Animikii Indigenous Technology paves the way for transformation from resource extraction into a knowledge-based economy.

However, certain recommendations can help the company to enhance their social impact.

• They can reduce the inequality between the indigenous and non- indigenous population by supporting and encouraging innovations by indigenous people every day through their works.

• They should allocate more resources for technological innovations by indigenous people.
• The organisational culture should incorporate the indigenous people and their cultures.
• Animikii Indigenous Technology should enhance the economic inclusion
• The indigenous workers should be ensured social protection at work

References

Anderson, E. (2016). Equality as a global goal. Ethics & International Affairs, 30(2), 189-200.
Animikki. (2020). Social innovation through Indigenous technology. Retrieved from: https://animikii.com/home. [Available on 25 November 2021].

Diaz?Sarachaga, J. M., Jato?Espino, D., & Castro?Fresno, D. (2018). Is the Sustainable Development Goals (SDG) index an adequate framework to measure the progress of the 2030 Agenda? Sustainable Development, 26(6), 663-671.

Kuhn, H. (2020). Reducing inequality within and among countries: realizing SDG 10—a developmental perspective. Sustainable Development Goals and Human Rights, 5, 137-153.

Oestreich, J. E. (2018). SDG 10: Reduce inequality in and among countries. Social Alternatives, 37(1), 34-41.
Pandey, U. C., Kumar, C., Ayanore, M., & Shalaby, H. R. (2020). SDG10–Reduce Inequality Within and Among Countries. Emerald Group Publishing.

Reinhardt, F. (2000). Down to earth: Applying business principles to environmental management. Harvard Business School Press, Boston, Massachusetts.

Reinhardt, F. L. (1999). Bringing the environment down to earth. Harvard business review, 77(4), 149-149.
Savitz, A.W. & Weber, K. (2006). The triple bottom line: how today's best-run companies are achieving economic, social, and environmental success—and how you can too. Weber, K, Jossey-Bass, San Francisco.

Sinha, A., Sengupta, T., & Alvarado, R. (2020). Interplay between technological innovation and environmental quality: formulating the SDG policies for next 11 economies. Journal of Cleaner Production, 242, 118549.
United Nations. (2021). Goal 10: Reduce inequality within and among countries. Retrieved from https://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/inequality/.

PROJ6000 Principles of Project Management Assessment 3 Sample

Assignment Brief

Individual/Group - Project Charter development
Length - 2,000 words

Learning Outcomes:

Successful completion of this assignment will result in achievement of the following subject learning outcomes:

1. Understand PMBOK knowledge areas and process groups and their role, relevance and impact on project management best practice and PMI's Code of Ethics.

2. Critically compare and contrast project management approaches and their appropriateness for managing a variety of project types, including IT projects.

3. Apply appropriate project management (including IT project management) tools and techniques, paying particular attention to risk management.

Submission - By 11:55pm AEST/AEDT Sunday in the first week of Module 6 (week 11)
Weighting - 40%
Total Marks - 40 Marks

Context:

Project leadership is about inspiring the project team to do their best from the outset. This requires a combination of verbal and written communications and a range of applied leadership skills. One of the foundational documents that helps “kick-off” the project is the Project Charter. This is a document that describes the entire project in a short, succinct and presentable document that can be shared with project staff or other stakeholders to commence the project in earnest. It also helps clarify the project context, the project team roles and the goals of the project.

In this assessment for assignment help you will be given a project case study to use in order to develop a Project Charter. Though all students will receive the same case study, it is expected that each student will think about the project from their own perspective as an up-and-coming project manager. Use your own style based on your critical thinking of what it means for you to lead a project. That will help you formulate your unique Project Charter.
Instructions:

1. Read the case study provided by your lecturer. This will form the basis for your Project charter, because you will assume that you are the project manager for this project.

2. After reading the case study start developing your project charter. This needs to be a 2000-word report (+/- 10%) and must use a minimum of 6 references (academic literature and industry publications. The case study is a 7th reference).

3. The Project Charter must include the following headings and be written as if you were presenting it to the project team that will build this project. You are the project manager. The contents of the Charter are:

a. Background to the project
b. Reasons for the project
c. Project objectives
d. Constraints, limitations and risks
e. Leadership structure (project manager and his or her senior aides: list the roles and explain what each does in the project. You need to cite 4 roles)
f. Project risks and their mitigation
g. Project stakeholders and how to interact with them
h. The vision of the project and the type of project team culture you wish to promote in your team

Output and Submission:

Submit your completed assessment by the end of the first week of Module 6 (Week 11) on
Blackboard.

Learning Resources:

Elias, A. A. (2016). Stakeholder analysis for Lean Six Sigma project management.
International Journal of Lean Six Sigma. https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/oclc/6862439489
Patanakul, P., Iewwongcharoen, B., & Milosevic, D. (2010). An empirical study on the use of project management tools and techniques across project life-cycle and their impact on project
success. Journal of General management, 35(3), 41-66.

Solution

Introduction

Project charter is a formal document that describes and plans various stages and budget of a project and identifies the stakeholders throughout the project lifecycle. Application of various processes, methods, knowledge and skills for achievement of certain specified goals and objectives within limited time and budget is regarded as project management (Demirkesen & Ozorhon, 2017). A charter in project management defines preliminary roles and responsibilities and provides shared understanding. In this study, such a project charter of an innovation and construction project based on Merck KGaA case study will be developed along with associated risks and their mitigation strategies.

Background of project

Merck KGaA is a global innovation and technology support company that has been operating in business market for approximately 350 years. After going through a rebranding, various operations such as pharmaceutical, life science and chemicals groups were brought under a single group of operation. Furthermore, due to high growth of operations, that company also undertook several large construction projects and invested $565 million for these projects (Pmi.org, 2021). The project was to meet the architecture needs and to promote transformational change. One global headquarters construction project was taken into action and the program consisted of approximately 90 interdependent construction projects. The core projects of the program included development of employee restaurant and innovation centers. Other than that, the construction project also included linking of public squares orientated in different cities of the world. Prompt engagement of decentralized and communication setup within internal area through architectural designs were also included in the project (Pmi.org, 2021). Navigation of fragmented construction projects and contractor management for investment in design processes and in research and development programs were also include in the project.

Reason of Project

The project was undertaken for various reasons. Some of those are described below.

Integration and distribution of work: Due to highly fragmented centers of Merck group and versatile functional areas of work all across the world, single management and communication line set-up was becoming problematic. Thus, by developing one global headquarter, the company intended to manage most of the corporate activities of projects and their distribution in a fair manner. Furthermore, management of numerous fragmented construction projects was also a reason for this project (Pmi.org, 2021).

Management of insufficiency: Due to highly fragmented operational areas, navigation of contractors and marketplace was becoming complex. This was causing poor management of undertaken projects as well as execution due to insufficiency of skills among leadership personnel. Market failure and compromisation of external factors were becoming hindrance. In order to manage these insufficiencies, this project was undertaken.

Development of innovation center: Inadequate design process of workplace can cause delay and hindrance in creative projects. This can also create challenges in communication between teams as frequent meetings cannot be organized (Patanakul, Iewwongcharoen & Milosevic, 2010). Thus, cooperation and concentration management became priority reasons behind undertaking one global headquarter construction project.

Another reason for this construction project was to strengthen brand image in highly competitive European construction market as the company underwent rebranding into a single brand name.

Project objectives

The project of construction and development of one global headquarter had two core projects namely establishment of innovation center and employee restaurant for various reasons. The objectives of the project are listed below.

• To construct innovation center for cooperation of interdisciplinary teams.
• To setup better means of communication between internal and external levels.
• To improve concentration and cooperation of essential activities.
• To establish employee restaurant to manage decentralized staff canteen for a better meeting place (Pmi.org, 2021).
• To improve skill level and management quality of contractors for sustainable market operations.
• To avail adequate design process for skill development and productivity increment with uniform distribution.

Constraints, limitations and risks

In a construction project, there are various constraints that limit the success rate of the projects and create challenges in the planning and execution of the project. Availability of technical support and technology in a business market as well as technological infrastructure influences the success rate and pace of a project completion. The constraints are primarily associated with economy, technology and management (Muriana & Vizzini, 2017). As a result, these technological constraints reduce construction tolerance and needs of architectural aspects. Furthermore, project resources can cause economic constraints that severely influence quality and performance of project deliverables. Due to combination of technological and economic constraints, the balance of time and cost of the project completion can occur.

In addition to these constraints, the limitation of management can produce several risks as well. For example, poor communication between interdisciplinary teams of the construction project can reduce cooperation and accuracy of planning (Demirkesen & Ozorhon, 2017). Engineering designs can thus get faulty which can put entire infrastructure in high safety risk. Improper allocation of resources can exceed budget of the project which can cause financial risk. Moreover, due to inefficiency of management and leadership skills, both time and cost management of the project can fail which, in turn, can generate governance risk for the project as well.

Leadership Structure

In order to manage the information system and other essential operations of a project suitably to lead a project towards its success, a proper leader ship structure is essential. This construction project also included several key leadership positions.

Project manager: The primary function of project managers is to contribute in fostering good relationship between interdisciplinary teams (Menu & Boyd, 2017). Providing direction to different teams and monitoring life cycle of a project while ensuring scope and budget compliance are the primary roles of project managers. In this project, the responsibilities of project managers included communication and collaboration between interdisciplinary teams as well as management of contractors and suppliers.

Contractors or operation managers: The role of contractors is hire labors and subcontractors and to foster cooperation between multiple subcontractors to manage the need of materials and equipment. Other roles of the contractors include suggestion of building designs and providing cost estimation for materials as well as for whole of the project (Sanchez & Terlizzi, 2017). In this project, the roles of contractors are to manage diversified and fragmented teams and provide as well as review cost compliance for the construction project.
Architect

Merck KGaA needs an architect for the transformative change: The architects will work under the contractors and their role would be to make the implementation of the innovations as per the requirements. According to Demirkesen & Ozorhon (2017), the main responsibilities of an architect are to design the new buildings, develop new ways to use the existing buildings, restore, and innovate and many more. As this construction requires connections like bridges joining the individual level segments, proper meeting places for information exchange and many more, innovative designs would be required from the architect. Thus, it can be ensured that the specialist construction knowledge as well as new designs is functionally good, safe and aesthetically pleasing. The architect will involve the designers and civil engineers who will consider different demands of the workplace or the new construction like communication, concentration and cooperation. Thus, a spatial expression would be found with the flowing transition. The new design would be prepared by the architect and the high level drawing would ensure a spacious internal area in each floor.

The contractor would be fully involved in participating in the evaluation of the final design with the architect. Moreover, the new design would be verified with the integrated network planner, civil engineers and designers contributing the expertise knowledge. The architect would also be responsible for applying innovative methods while constructing the new building as per the requirement. Moreover, it is also important for the architect to investigate the construction quality and especially within the estimated budget and schedule.

Account manager

In construction projects, the account manager is responsible for overseeing the budget and project progress within the budget and schedule. Thus the project manager estimates the amount in which the whole project needs to be finished. As stated by Erdogan, Šaparauskas & Turskis (2017), the account manager is responsible for the cash flows for a project and estimating the budget for which the project needs to be finished. For this construction project also, the account manager needs to record all the expenses and wages of the builders, designers, contractors, engineers and thereby estimating the overall project cost.

Project risks and mitigation

Table 1: Project risks and mitigation plan
(Source: Created by author)

Stakeholder engagement

The stakeholders for the projects can be categorized in the following.

Project owners

The contractor is the main project owner to which Merck KGaA will deliver the construction project. Thus, the contractor would be liable for completing the project within the time and sending a time to time progress report to the Merck KGaA Company. Face-to-face meeting or virtual communication is important for this case.

Project management teams

This team involves the contractor, project manager, designers, engineers, account manager and other subcontractors. Virtual communication and weekly meetings need to be held with them in order to circulate the information and apply any kind of changes (Oppong, Chan, & Dansoh, 2017).

Service Suppliers

The logistics, material suppliers need to be notified for the building materials at the proper time. This also includes financial support like bank insurance companies, shareholders and others. All of them should be notified as per the project progress and information should be shared according to stock.

Vision and culture

The main vision of this construction project is to restructure the interiors design so that the three levels of the innovation center are to a large extent visually linked using arched ramps. Moreover, three demands are to be fulfilled like communication, cooperation and concentration by following spatial expression in the transition.
The project team culture is thus to be set as per the requirement where the information exchange would occur time-to-time. Experts are to be assigned and their concerns are to be taken for the design and implementation plan for the project. Thus, a huge collaborative chain culture is to be followed in this project so that no such gap can be found.

Conclusion

It can be concluded that this study is about developing the project charter for the innovative construction project of Merck KGaA. The reason for the project, its objective, constraints, leadership roles, stakeholder engagement, risks and mitigation plan is described in this study. Moreover, the focus has been given for which the project can be done within the proper time and specialized teams with a proper interaction between them. 

References

Demirkesen, S., & Ozorhon, B. (2017). Impact of integration management on construction project management performance. International Journal of Project Management, 35(8), 1639-1654. Retrieved from: http://www.projcp.com/Readings/180329%20Integration%20management.pdf [Retrieved on 20th February, 2021]

Erdogan, S. A., Šaparauskas, J., & Turskis, Z. (2017). Decision making in construction management: AHP and expert choice approach. Procedia engineering, 172, 270-276. Retrieved from: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1877705817306173/pdf?md5=316b61f50bc340c13e68161ff03487df&pid=1-s2.0-S1877705817306173-main.pdf&_valck=1

Luo, L., He, Q., Jaselskis, E. J., & Xie, J. (2017). Construction project complexity: research trends and implications. Journal of Construction Engineering and Management, 143(7), 04017019. Retrieved from: https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Lan_Luo10/publication/314017360_Construction_Project_Complexity_Research_Trends_and_Implications/links/5badd64792851ca9ed2b94bd/Construction-Project-Complexity-Research-Trends-and-Implications.pdf

Meng, X., & Boyd, P. (2017). The role of the project manager in relationship management. International Journal of Project Management, 35(5), 717-728. Retrieved from: https://farapaper.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/The-role-of-the-project-manager-in-relationship-management.pdf [Retrieved on 20th February, 2021]

Muriana, C., & Vizzini, G. (2017). Project risk management: A deterministic quantitative technique for assessment and mitigation. International Journal of Project Management, 35(3), 320-340. Retrieved from: https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Cinzia_Muriana/publication/312875787_Project_risk_management_A_deterministic_quantitative_technique_for_assessment_and_mitigation/links/59d0a45a0f7e9b4fd7f9faf1/Project-risk-management-A-deterministic-quantitative-technique-for-assessment-and-mitigation.pdf [Retrieved on 20th February, 2021]

Oppong, G. D., Chan, A. P., & Dansoh, A. (2017). A review of stakeholder management performance attributes in construction projects. International journal of project management, 35(6), 1037-1051. Retrieved from: http://www.projcp.com/Readings/180329%20Stakeholders%202.pdf

Patanakul, P., Iewwongcharoen, B., & Milosevic, D. (2010). An empirical study on the use of project management tools and techniques across project life-cycle and their impact on project success. Journal of General management, 35(3), 41-66. Retrieved from: https://web.stevens.edu/ses/documents/fileadmin/documents/pdf/PeerasitPMtoolsandsuccessPublished.pdf [Retrieved on 20th February, 2021]

Pmi.org (2021). Resolving agency issues in client-contractor relationships: The Merck Innovation Center. Retrieved from: https://www.pmi.org/-/media/pmi/documents/public/pdf/academics/call-for-proposal/merck-agency-theory-instructional-case.pdf?v=88ca6b10-9d26-4907-9cd9-ed37bc01d330 [Retrieved on 20th February, 2021]

Sanchez, O. P., & Terlizzi, M. A. (2017). Cost and time project management success factors for information systems development projects. International Journal of Project Management, 35(8), 1608-1626. Retrieved from: https://fardapaper.ir/mohavaha/uploads/2020/09/Fardapaper-Cost-and-time-project-management-success-factors-for-information-systems-development-projects.pdf [Retrieved on 20th February, 2021]

Szyma?ski, P. (2017). Risk management in construction projects. Procedia Engineering, 208, 174-182. Retrieved from: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1877705817360290/pdf?md5=fbc0c95022edc83c57f81249ceb88504&pid=1-s2.0-S1877705817360290-main.pdf&_valck=1
 

CGRM4000 Corporate Governance, Sustainability and Ethics Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Length - 2000 Words (+/-10%)
Weighting: 30 %
Total Marks: 30
Submission: Individual Report (Submitted via Turnitin)
Due Date: Week 8 (Monday at 11.55 pm)

Your Task

Review a specified listed company and evaluate them considering the content covered in this subject.

Assessment Description

You are required to review and research annual and sustainability reports, recent news articles and any other relevant information relating to any one of the following 8 companies:

• Rio Tinto
• AGL
• CSL
• Domino’s
• Macquarie Banking Group
• AMP
• Telstra Corporation
• QBE Insurance Group

Through this, you will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the concepts covered in the subject and the ability to apply them to a publicly listed company.

Assessment Instructions for assignment help

Write a report of 2000 words (+/– 10%) incorporating the concepts covered in this subject and addressing the following questions:

1. What is this company’s governance structure? How does this structure function to allow the company to operate successfully and responsibly?

2. What processes and policies does this company have in place to address the following areas:

• Discrimination
• Exploitation
• Corruption
• Dishonest and Fraudulent Behaviour
• Protection for Whistleblowers

In your judgement, how adequate are these policies and to what extent are these areas audited and enforced?

3. What are the values of this company according to their website or reports? In your opinion, are these values reflected in the approach taken in the areas discussed above?

You are required to include a minimum of 6 references from a range of sources, such as company sources (websites, annual and other reports), academic journals, textbooks and information in the media (online news or video). 

Important Study Information

This should be prepared as a report, addressing each of the questions listed above.
Harvard referencing protocol should be used.
Work should be submitted via Turnitin
Please refer to the assessment marking guide to assist you in completing all the assessment criteria

Academic Integrity Policy

KBS values academic integrity. All students must understand the meaning and consequences of
cheating, plagiarism and other academic offences under the Academic Integrity and Conduct Policy.

What is academic integrity and misconduct?

What are the penalties for academic misconduct?

What are the late penalties?

How can I appeal my grade?

Click here for answers to these questions:
http://www.kbs.edu.au/current-students/student-policies/.
Word Limits for Written Assessments

Submissions that exceed the word limit by more than 10% will cease to be marked from the point at which that limit is exceeded.
Study Assistance
Students may seek study assistance from their local Academic Learning Advisor or refer to the
resources on the MyKBS Academic Success Centre page. Click here for this information.

Solution

Introduction

In this report, there is an assessment and examination of Company’s corporate governance structure and how adequate corporate governance assist company in operating successfully and responsibly. To evaluate the structure, Domino’s Pizza is taken into consideration and company’s process and policies in respect to discrimination, exploitation, corruption, dishonest and fraudulent behavior and protection for whistleblowers is also considered. Further, there is an analysis of the values of the company and the reflection of values in various areas of the business environment. Therefore, this report demonstrates the understanding of the concept ‘corporate governance’ and Domino’s ability to apply those in their normal course of business functions.

About Company

Domino’s is an American multinational company which is also one of the world’s biggest pizza restaurant chain. Domino’s is a public company established in 1961 and headquarter is in Michigan, US. The company has its restaurant at 17000 locations worldwide (LinkedIn, 2020). One of the reasons that the company has got huge market share is due to the fastest delivery services. The company’s mission is to be the top or best Pizza delivery company in the world. And the company with the stint of 59 years has achieved the position of being a worldwide leader in Pizza delivery. The company is expanding its business through company owned stores and franchisee that involves fun and innovative franchise and corporate team members in US and other international market. In United States itself, there are more than 94 percent of the stores are franchise- owned. Moreover, there are about more than 34 million ways Domino’s is using while preparing Pizza and the company sells around 3 million Pizzas a day globally (Domino’s, 2020).

Domino’s Governance Structure

Corporate Governance is the set of rules and principles that company incorporates in the business organization to operate its functions effectively and efficiently. It further includes the laws and regulations that assists company to perform in a regulated and controlled way.

In other words, it can be said that Corporate Governance is the combination of following elements, which generally includes- Board and committee, Legal and regulatory systems, Policies, framework and transparency and effective internal control system.

Figure: Corporate Governance

Corporate Governance of Domino’s Pizza can be examined as: -

• Board and Committee- The business functions and operations are being carried out by the team members, managers and officers. The CEO and the board of directors of the company ensures that the policies, strategies and the decision’s taken by the management are in the best interest of the company. The directors in the company possess good qualification and experience that incorporates highest level of ethics, integrity and values. And the corporate governance committee ensures the performance of the directors as well as the company.

• Legal framework and other regulatory systems- Dominos have mostly franchise- owned and personal owned stores all over the world. In US there are more than 90 percent of the stores are franchise owned. Factors incorporates legal framework includes- patents, copyright, employment laws, health and safety laws, discrimination las, data protection law and consumer protection rules and laws. The company is following all the rules and regulations and the provisions of the law.

• Internal control System-Internal control plays a significant role in the efficiency of the performance of the company. The company to maintain highest level of integrity and for internal control management have incorporated technological developments. It resulted in maintaining cost structure and value chain structure within the organization.

• Policies and procedures- The company has developed various plans and policies to sustain in the competitive environment and incorporate various strategies in order to grow and develop. One such policy is initiating the circular economy. The company aims to reduce the carbon footprints, pollution prevention, water conservation, consumers and workforce health and wellness, employee satisfaction, integrity of corporate governance and various others.

Therefore, it can be said that Domino’s has developed effective and efficient corporate governance. One of the principles of Domino’s is ‘We demand integrity’, which means the company has taken many initiatives towards personal and professional integrity.

Benefits to Company to Operate Successfully and Responsibly

Domino’s growth and development can be seen from the results of revenues. Domino’s international have experienced same stores sales growth for 107 consecutive quarters. Further, there are positive results obtained from several plans and policies of the company. As, Domino’s is a top performer among its competitors for it carbon footprints. The company’s initiative towards implementation of energy efficiency measures by introducing technology for the same, green building, and all the efforts towards sourcing renewable energy has successfully contributed towards climate change (Censible, 2020).

Further, the company has introduced various policies and plans to maintain consumer as well as employees and team members health and safety. The company has developed The Partner’s Foundation for maintaining the health and wellness of their employees and further assist them financially in the time of need. As a result, Domino’s is successfully implemented the plans for employee satisfaction. Further, the company is a top performer among its competitors on corporate governance on the basis of accounting practices, executive pay, board organization and ownership structure.

Company is however is successful in following rules and regulations and maintaining legal frameworks. Instead Dominos have sometimes faced penalties and warnings from legal authorities. Such as in 2018, Domino’s India received an order from the authority of the government- National Anti- Profiteering Authority for not passing GST on the invoices (The Economic Times, 2018).

Process and Policies of the Company

The companies have developed various policies and processes to address various areas such as discrimination, exploitation, corruption, dishonest and fraudulent behavior and protection for whistle blowers. The purpose of the company is to mitigate all these issues and lead a sustainable and healthy work environment. Various measures taken by Domino’s in respect to the following issues are-

Discrimination – The company has adopted measures to eliminate discrimination and tried to incorporate diversity within the organization. However, in diversity and diversification the company has not taken any such productive strategies, or it can be said that the measures were not that effective to mitigate the discrimination and incorporate the diversity. Moreover, the company has developed various plans and policies towards the health and wellness of employee without any discrimination which provides several financial aids to their employees irrespective of their gender, sex, caste and creed.

Exploitation- The company’s mission is to perform together and has a tag line- ‘We are made better together’. The company aims to treat each and every employee of the organization fairly. It has been examined that the company is facing huge rise in the cost of the ingredients from past many years and the cost of the Pizza is dropping frequently. As a result, the company is managing the cost for the wages or the salaries of the employees. And it resulted in the dissatisfaction among the employees of Domino’s.

Corruption- Dominos have developed ethics and anti- bribery policy. This policy includes laws relating to act fairly with customers, employees, suppliers and business partners. Harsh regulations have been framed regarding accepting gifts, hospitality and financial incentives. It means no employees or the company itself will receive gifts or money or any other benefits from the suppliers, customers or even competitors. There are trade barriers the company is facing in the host countries. As various price regulations and laws can harm the company’s profitability. Still the company has developed proper rules and regulations that are being followed in every country where the company has its existence.

Dishonest and Fraudulent Behavior- Domino’s does not tolerate any kind of illegal practice which includes hiring or recruiting any person who is not eligible for employment or not achieved an age of 16 years. Further, the company is committed towards human rights as a result the company ensures that there will be adequate working conditions. And most importantly, the company has initiated digital transformation which helps to trace the transactions, orders and track all the activity in any of the store of Domino’s.

Protection for Whistleblowers- The company has recently developed a policy named- ‘Whistleblower Policy’ version 3.0 on 14th July 2020. The policy aims to encourage an appropriate disclosure of the reportable conduct without any fear. It helps people associated with company an adequate platform to raise an issue which can be illegal, improper, fraud, harassment, or any other danger to any person (Policy, 2020).

Actions company take in these respective areas- The company believes in the power of people within the organization as well as in the society. That is the reason Domino’s foster diversity within the organization. And to achieve diversity, the company encourages the sense of belonging for each and every human resource in the organization and promotes culture of innovation and build an environment that values everyone’s whole self. The company tag line for incorporating diversity within the organization is ‘We are made better together’. One of the examples is during the pandemic Covid-19, the company has introduced more than $9.6 million bonus for frontline workers. And there are other policies as well which are incorporated by Domino’s in order to mitigate all these factors and to gain market share (Mittal, 2018).

Values of the Company

The company has contributed to the community in several ways. One of which is The Partner’s Foundation which is a non- profit organization. The purpose of the foundation is to assist their team members in their time of need like- tragedy occurs due to natural disaster, unexpected affliction, accidents, or nay kind of an emergency (Censible, 2020). With the help of these foundation Dominos have helped team members and their family members with various financial, emotional, intermediary and advisory services. Apart from this, the company offers various charitable events, donations and programs with schools, hospitals and other NGO’s in order to provide financial aid. The concept of the Partners Foundations is basically team members helping team members, as primary funding comes from company’s payroll deduction program. Moreover, the company in need has received more than $21 million of financial assistance through various sources (Allison, 2018).

Further, the company’s contribution to make the world a better place is highly progressive; it can be seen from their efforts towards maintain environment and promote ecological balance. The company has introduced recycling of pizza boxes through a partnership with The Recycling Partnership which is a non- profit organization and provides full recycling supply chain. Further, Westrock partners help company in providing differentiated paper and packaging solutions to maintain the market share and build better environment (Prnewswire, 2020).

Therefore, it can be said that Domino’s aim is to gain market share but with the growth and development of the people associated with the company, environment and the community in which the company works.

Reflection of the Values in various areas of business-

Company’s initiatives towards various rules, policies and frameworks has taken a good shape, which can be seen from the consecutive growth and increase in the sales revenue. The company is managing more than 300000 employees all over the world. The retention and the growth in the number of employees is a clear indication of the successfulness of the policies developed by the organization. Further, the company is top among its competitors in various aspects. Increase in market share and performance in various segments establishes that Domino’s strategies are effective and efficient.

Conclusion

It can be concluded that corporate governance plays a significant role in any business organization. Corporate Governance ensure that the company is functioning appropriately, and all the operations are adequate and effective. It includes- Board and committee, Legal and regulatory systems, Policies, framework and transparency and effective internal control system. Without which no company can perform well in the competitive environment. In this report, there is an examination of Domino’s Pizza chain and the company’s policies and process towards various factors like discrimination, exploitation and corruption. And it has been identified that Domino’s has incorporated Various effective strategies to lead the market as a result has gained a huge market share.

References

Allison.R.2018. Domino’s 2018 Charitable Giving. [Online]. Assessed from. https://biz.dominos.com/assets/images/2018_dominos_charitable-giving-report.pdf

Censible.2020. Domino’s Pizza: Corporate Values. [Online]. Assessed from. https://esg.censible.co/companies/Domino_s-Pizza

Domino’s.2020. Company profile. [Online]. Assessed from. https://biz.dominos.com/about/

LinkedIn.2020. Domino’s. [Online]. Assessed from. https://www.linkedin.com/company/domino%27s-pizza/

Mittal.R.2018. Domino’s Pizza Inc. strategies. [Online]. Assessed from. https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Rishoo_Mittal/publication/333396105_Domino's_Pizza_Inc_Strategies/links/5d1a653692851cf4405c8847/Dominos-Pizza-Inc-Strategies.pdf

Policy.2020. Policy- Whistleblower Policy. [Online]. Assessed from. https://static1.squarespace.com/static/5bd052c7c46f6d0e23b11afb/t/5f17724fa210db6424baddf6/1595372114321/DMP+-+Whistleblower+Policy+14.7.20.pdf

Prnewswire.2020. Domino’s delivering neighborhood recycling information to customers. [Online]. Assessed from. https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/dominos-delivering-neighborhood-recycling-information-to-customers-301138319.html

The Economic Times.2018. Domino’s lands in trouble for not passing on GST cuts. [Online]. Assessed from. https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/industry/services/hotels-/-restaurants/dominos-in-trouble-for-not-passing-on-gst-cuts/articleshow/65154911.cms?from=mdr

MBA652: Strategy and Leadership in Tourism and Hospitality Assignment 3 Sample

Assignment Brief

Length:1500 words (+/- 10% allowable range)
Weighting: 40%
Total Marks: 100
Submission: Online
Due Date: Week 13

Your task

Individually, you are required to prepare a 1500 word Australia’s Tourism 2030 Strategy proposal by critically reflecting on the three pre-recorded interviews from the industry leaders in the tourism and hospitality industry.
Assessment Description.

The purpose of this individual assessment is to give students an opportunity to in part demonstrate their skills in critical leadership, problem-solving and reflective learning relating to the tourism and hospitality industry by analyzing and selecting the most appropriate contemporary leadership practices for the tourism and hospitality industries.

Assessment Instructions for assignment help

Presume that you have been recently tasked to develop Australia’s next national long-term tourism strategy - Tourism 2030, with a focus on the issue of industry resilience.

As part of your preparation for this task, you are required to watch the three pre-recorded interviews from the current industry leaders who provided their insights into underpinning challenges of managing and leading tourism and hospitality workforce in the times of adversity and crisis. The information presented in these interviews will serve as the starting point for developing Australia’s next national long-term tourism strategy.

1. Interview with Stuart Riddell
2. Interview with Ralf Brueger
3. Interview with Alessandra Damant

Based on the key takeaways from these interviews, you are then required to prepare a proposal of the Tourism 2030 strategy. More specifically, your proposal must include the following sections:

• A 1-page long executive summary that comprehensively covers all of the significant report findings (not included in the word limit).

• Critical analysis of the current strategic and leadership risks that the Australian tourism and hospitality industry is facing as the result of the recent bushfires and COVID-19 pandemic.

• Critical evaluation of innovative business strategies that tourism and hospitality providers across the globe are currently deploying in an attempt to restart the tourism and hospitality industry.

In preparing this proposal, you will need to utilize relevant theories and concepts covered in weeks 8 to 12 and use at least 12 sources of information and reference these in accordance with the Kaplan Harvard Referencing Style. These may include websites, government publications, industry reports, census data, journal articles, and newspaper articles. These references should be presented as in-text citations and a reference list at the end of your proposal. Wikipedia and other ‘popular’ sites are not to be used.

Assessment Submission

This file must be submitted as a ‘Word’ document to avoid any technical issues that may occur from incorrect file format upload. Uploaded files with a virus will not be considered as a legitimate submission. Turnitin will notify you if there is an issue with the submitted file. In this case, you must contact your workshop facilitator via email and provide a brief description of the problem and a screenshot of the Turnitin error message. You are also encouraged to submit your work well in advance of the deadline to avoid any possible delay with the Turnitin similarity report or any other technical difficulties.

Late assignment submission penalties

Penalties will be imposed on late assignment submissions in accordance with Kaplan Business School “late assignment submission penalties” Policy.

Solution

Introduction

The coronavirus pandemic (COVID-19) is a humanitarian crisis that is deeply influencing individuals' lives and causing financial crises around the world. This has a significant impact on the travel industry sector, which is essential for some, individuals, places and organizations, especially in countries, urban areas and areas where the travel industry is an important part of the economy of the sector.

The Coronavirus crisis has badly impacted travel industry during 2020, with uncommon impacts on employment and organizations. The travel industry has been one of the main areas affected by the virus, as measures to control the outbreak have ended around the world in the travel industry. There is also the risk that the local area will be among the region to pull through from continuing to move and decline globally (Fayos-Solà and Cooper, 2019). This affects the economy of the travel industry and a number of different areas that help and support the travel industry. 

Analysis

Bushfires

Effective leadership for sustainability depends on ex post reflection and the ability to promote collaboration between different stakeholder groups. To achieve this goal for fires, we need to go beyond the narrow view where fires are only considered "catastrophes". "Disaster" A study focused on providing industry best practices to ensure messages are received and delivered to attract future tourists out of the country's or industry's control (Walters and Mair, 2012) in the coming months and years. Over the years, fires have impacted tourism industry like Airlift and many other crucial regions in Australia and are likely to be developed as a part of the programme (Walters and Mair, 2012).

The strategic risks associated with Bushfires includes economic loss to the nation, property loss, liability risk to the Australian government, loss of major resources from the forest, reflection of mismanagement due to unable to control such situation by government on time, and loss of major tourism revenue due to fallen in the visitors from other countries.

Leadership risks includes possibility of physical harms to forest staff and other people living attached with forest; financial harm; loss of reputation of government as it shown incapability of controlling this mass disaster; and failure and loss of accountability.

Coronavirus

Australia is a free democracy in Westminster with a legislative structure. Now, it holds the position of top 10 successful developed countries across the world for minimizing and controlling the impact of deadly virus on overall economy (COVID-19) in 2019 (Ritchie and Roser, 2020). Approximately 16% of the Australian population is 65 or older, with the highest epidemiological risk, and 18.7% in the 0-15-year-old group with the lowest risk. 30.30% of the country's disease rates occurred in the 1960s. At the time of writing, 90 of the 93 people who died in Australia on 27 May 2020 were over 40 years of age (Australian Government, 2020). While out of total population, 18.7% belongs to the age group between 0 to 15 years, there are no victims in this group (Australian Government, 2020).

Pandemic coronavirus (COVID-19) infection is an unprecedented crisis in the tourism economy, with a major immediate impact on the region. The OECD estimate of the impact of pandemic shows a 60% decline in international travel industry by 2020. If delayed back to December, the percentage could rise to 80%. International tourism should develop significantly in some regions (eg. the European Union).

Evaluation

Here are the strategies used by travel and hotel providers around the world.

1. Action

The main focus of Covid-19 has been on health and safety issues of hygiene and cleanliness in hotels. The key is to provide physical evidence of the hotel's health and safety concerns. This time the hotel industry will be scrutinized and verified for medical reasons. The security guard checks the temperature with a portable thermometer sprays a disinfectant smoke and leaves a hand sanitizer in receptions, elevator halls and rooms.
To recover from bushfire, large area could be seized for entering by visitors and local people, and left aside to recover it through rainfall in natural way (Amelung and Nicholls, 2014). Additional to this, Government requires taking measures to deal with such a situation if it happens in future.

2. Finance

The second important consideration is the liquidity of working capital. Travel and hotel providers have a 12-month grace period for EMI, Loans, PF, ESIC, GST, Customs, Government Tax, Bank Guarantees, Customs Investments and Security. It can be said that the government has already introduced a three-month grace on interest rates and major bank payments.

Government will invest major fund on restoring the forest by hiring workforce to remove damaged fences and trunks by cleaning at initial stage and put some new fences around as a replacement.

3. Technology

The third consideration moves further into AI and other technologies. Covid-19 has accelerated the need for technology to reduce human communication. The mobile guest app can connect to any button and switch in the room, so your finger doesn't reach you. It included climate control, lighting, shower temperature control, remote control TV, and more (BILSLAND, Nagy and Smith, 2020).

Government would place tracking devices and drones to check if there’s any fire or disturbance in the forest. Additional to this sensor device attached to trees will also play a major role in identifying any hazard before it converts into major disaster.

Appraisal

Consequently, all goals, KPIs, measures and objectives must be defined, linked to long-term success and measured economically. In this context, the strategic importance of the issues under consideration needs to be clarified and explained. Therefore, at this stage, it is necessary to consider all aspects that affect the business unit and are of strategic importance. The final step is to reach a sustainability vision to integrate the approach into a traditional economic approach to create sustainable value (Nesticò and Maselli, 2020). Finally, it is important to remember that the proposed approach has evolved from other traditional ideas, including the critical one. For example, it cannot be denied that cost savings resulting from sanctions can have a positive impact on the outlook for the economy, as well as improving consumer satisfaction. This will no doubt have a positive impact from the customer's point of view by increasing the number of employees. It has a positive impact on internal processes, product quality and customer satisfaction and financial forecasts (Pechlaner, Innerhofer and Erschbamer, 2019).

Strategy Plan

Vision

• Enhancing the Australian private sector to create a compatible environment within economy and bring diversification into the economy through investing in global trade and competition.

Mission

• To advance sustainability in the travel industry that makes occupations and spotlights on advancement of nearby culture and items assets, including economical administration of visit and travel by 2030 (Guo, 2018).

Long term objectives

• Reduce domestic poverty by increasing employment opportunities in the tourism sector.
• Achieving the fundamental goals of sustainable development in the environment (Karji et al., 2019)
• Create community awareness, understanding, and support for tourism development. It encourages close co-operation between the government and the private sector (Whitehead, 2017).

Corporate governance

Corporate governance is the structure that characterizes the connection between investors, management, managers and various partners, to help influence the activity of an organization. It aims to protect investment benefits, strengthen disclosure and openness, promote the board's powerful business, and provide a viable legal and administrative structure. Good corporate governance should enable investor support and provide the appropriate motivational forces to the board of directors and officers to pursue goals that are beneficial to the organization and investors.

The corporate governance structures and business management practices of an organization usually address key points of threats, for example,

• Is the organization run to help investors?
• Are choices made on a moral and careful basis?
• Are the various risks to the organization identified and controlled?
• Should the management and board be accountable to investors for their assets?

Several criteria are used to evaluate and measure a company's corporate governance frameworks. Some factors generally taken into account in assessing corporate governance standards include:

• Responsibility of the board of directors
• Financial reporting and internal controls
• Rights of shareholders
• Compensation of the share
• Equity structure and related parties
• Social and environmental impact.

Destination management bodies

Today, executives' strategies can be summarized in three ways: reduce waste / misfortune, maintain item quality / management, and accelerate creation. Lean is an arrangement of administration, reasoning or a handful of tools, approach and development stage of the company and the lifestyle where it operates. This idea has been implemented and holds equal importance to the competent for process of the firm and businesses in the field of the travel industry. A change in follow-up approach must consider the unique characteristics of each office. For instance, it makes sure about, if there are any losses which are caused throughout the travel industry, with a negative impact towards courier management. Like these lines, the association should find a way to reduce these risks and thereby give the client some advantage, in order to provide better and riskier administrations. Differentiating responses to a real concern is a major concern for organizations and companies around the world, and suddenly for Destination Management Group (Pechlaner, Innerhofer, and Erschbamer, 2019).
 

Conclusion

The coronavirus pandemic (COVID-19) and busfires have emerged as a great loss to the Australian society, the impact doubles when it directly impacts tourism population which holds major proportion of Australian GDP. Appropriate measures could help the nation in recovering quickly from these risks and improve its GDP.  

References

Amelung, B. and Nicholls, S., 2014. Implications of climate change for tourism in Australia. Tourism Management, 41, pp.228-244.

Australian Government, 2020. Coronavirus (COVID-19) current situation and case numbers. Available at: https://www.health.gov.au/news/health-alerts/novel-coronavirus-2019-ncov-health-alert/coronavirus-covid-19-current-situation-and-case-numbers [Accessed on 8th February 2021]

BILSLAND, C., Nagy, H. and Smith, P., 2020. Virtual internships and work-integrated learning in hospitality and tourism in a post-COVID-19 world. International Journal of Work-Integrated Learning, 21(4), pp.425-437.
Fayos-Solà, E. and Cooper, C., 2019.The future of Tourism. Cham: Springer.

Guo, Y. ed., 2018. 2030 Vision for ASEAN-China Strategic Partnership: Perspectives from Think-Tanks. World Scientific.

Karji, A., Woldesenbet, A., Khanzadi, M. and Tafazzoli, M., 2019. Assessment of social sustainability indicators in mass housing construction: a case study of Mehr housing project. Sustainable Cities and Society, 50, p.101697.

Nesticò, A. and Maselli, G., 2020. Sustainability indicators for the economic evaluation of tourism investments on islands. Journal of Cleaner Production, 248, p.119217.

Pechlaner, H., Innerhofer, E. and Erschbamer, G. eds., 2019. Overtourism: Tourism management and solutions. Routledge.

Ritchie, M., and Roser, H. 2020. Our world in data. Oxford Martin School, University of Oxford; Available at: https://ourworldindata.org/coronavirus-data [Accessed on 8th February 2021]

Statistics, A.B.O., 2012.Australian Demographic Statistics. AUSTRALIAN INSTITUTE OF HEALTH AND WELFARE.

Walters, G. and Mair, J., 2012. The Effectiveness of Post-Disaster Recovery Marketing Messages—the Case of the 2009 Australian Bushfires, Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, 29:1, 87-103.

Whitehead, J., 2017. Prioritizing sustainability indicators: Using materiality analysis to guide sustainability assessment and strategy. Business Strategy and the Environment, 26(3), pp.399-412.

MBA613 Organizational Change and Innovation Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Word Count: 1500 Words (+/-10%)
Weighting: 30 %
Total Marks: 30
Submission: Via Turnitin
Due Date: Week 6, Tuesday at 11.55pm

Your Task

During this subject so far, you have been exposed to various theories about innovation and creativity. Being able to apply these concepts in a practical manner is a key outcome of this subject. As part of a Group, you will work in-class to explore new solutions to a contemporary workplace problem, using techniques, concepts and theories discussed during the class and share ideas and information. You will be given time in class (Week 3-5) to work on your “creative” journey, share reflections with your group, conduct group-based activities and explore the use of a variety of tools. Based on your in-class participation, you will then write and submit an individual report.

Assessment Description

Your task as a group is to identify a work-related problem you are currently experiencing at work or choose one below. You will need to develop new solutions by using techniques, concepts and theories discussed during your classes. You should research further to identify tools that will be most suitable for you. Some suggestions include: Fishbone diagrams, how to statements or levels of abstraction

The only problem is you are very limited with resources you can use. You have many paper clips, some paper (different sizes), and coloured pens and a coat hanger.

Some possible work problems:

1. How do you communicate effectively while maintaining social distance?
2. How to encourage people to recycle in their office?
3. How to improve overall workplace participation?
4. How to maintain workplace morale while “working from home”?

Assessment Instructions for assignment help

1. Form small groups/teams. There are a wide variety of creativity quizzes and tests online, have a look and see what you can find. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

a. Free online creativity test - TestMyCreativity (Week 1)
b. Test: What's your creative style? | Psychologies (Week 1)

2. Organize a “Genius Hour” with your team and discuss what will you do for this project? What will be your approach? Your creativity test results, your fears, passions, ideas etc. Some tools you can use include (but not limited to) Brainstorming, Mind mapping, Storyboarding, Visualization (Week 2/3)

3. Every week try to create and add to your team’s “creativity pool” (Week 1 to 4) During the lectures you were given some tools to force you for creative thinking. You may also want to do some further research and use any tool you like such as Synectic Pinball Machine, Six Thinking Hats or Checklists. Choose the best idea but do not waste the rest of the ideas – can these ideas be recycled somewhere?

4. Write an individual report about your creative journey. Make sure you include all the theory, concepts, tools that you have used. This is a reflective essay which requires you to reflect on your creative journey. Do not forget to integrate theoretical concepts and refer to at least 4 academic references to support your ideas.
Please refer to the assessment marking guide to assist you in completing all the assessment criteria.

Solution

Introduction

The workplace challenges increased during the Covid-19 situation and this affected the work culture and entire work environment of the society. I examined the situation in the IT sector environment with my team members to understand the problem that they faced during Covid-19 to maintain social distancing and how this affected the employee and the organizations (Lewnard and Lo 2020, pp. 631-633). This study focusing on the challenges identified through using some theories and techniques. The tools also used in this segment for delivering a reliable and innovative solution for the IT sector and these tools help to prepare the recommendation that will help the companies to develop the workplaces environment and situation that also improved the productivity of the workplace.

Reflective Problem Statement

The Covid-19 impacted the whole world through its negative impact on society. This situation was crucial that every organization faced when this pandemic took place within the world. Some of the organization need to stop their working to maintain the safety of their employee or for their business type. Many of the organization focusing on maintaining the social distancing within the organization. In the entire lockdown situation, many organizations need to provide the work from a home facility that required for maintaining that situation. Work from home also develops a problem as every employee did not have the system for delivering the work and for this reason, many IT organizations required to allow an employee in the workplace. This increased the risk for spreading Covid-19 into the workplace as maximum employee wanted to come to the office for delivering the work quantity and this was helping to run the work process within the organizations.

Challenges of Identified Situation

The challenges identified by examining the situation are,

• The organisations required to maintain social distance within the workplace and this was difficult while the employee working in the same environment and communicating with each other for work purpose. This was natural for human that they usually communicated for developing the operation with help of the other employees. This social distancing was difficult at the time of executing the business operation and this aspect also difficult for the organisation to maintain the safety of the employee.

• The HR team of the organisations were not able to handle the employees to maintain social distancing and for this reason, they allowed them to perform the business operation from their home (Crowley and Doran 2020, pp.1211-1234). Many of the employees not having the system in their home and this affected the organisation production. The HR also not able to manage the work from the situation as this also increased the understanding issues for disruption in communication faced by the employees and the management.

• This situation also affected the employee’s mental health and also they suffered from the threat for lost their jobs in this pandemic situation. This increased the mental stress of the employee and leads them to unable to work properly. Several organisations cut the payment of the employees as the organisations not deliver a huge amount of work to their client and they made a loss in their sectors. This also demotivated the employees and increased workplace conflict.

These challenges identified by examining the workplace as me and my team evaluated the workplace environment for better understanding the situation and problem of social distancing.

Tool and Techniques to Solve the Challenges

We use the Fish-Bone diagram to identify the challenges and also through this diagram we better understand the problem that appeared in the workplace during Covid-19 (Shinde, Ahirrao and Prasad 2018, pp.653-664).

The Fish-Bone Diagram Represents the Challenges below,

Workplace Information Findings

It is estimated that a total of 121 members of the organisation is still active today in the production process. To resolve the social distancing issues which arise due to the spread of the Covid-19 virus in the country employees related data is generated from the register of the organisation (Koren and Pet? 2020, p.e0239113). The separation of the individual is discussing below.

Table 1: Number of members in the workplace in alphabetic order

Chart 1: Number of members in the workplace in alphabetic order
(Source: Author)

It is difficult to separate a huge number of member to keep social distancing in the workplace. Hence, the separation is created based on the two-fold classification. The two-fold classification of the members is tabulated below.

Table 2: Separation of all members

Chart 2: Separation of all members
(Source: Author)

The above diagram is representing that, there has more or less equal representation is present between the members of the organisation. The total members whose names stated with vowels are almost 47% on the other hand the members whose name is started with the consonants are represented 53%.

Theory of Creativity and Innovation

The innovation and creativity come together and to mitigate the challenges in the work required to develop through using the Walls Creativity Model. This model has five stages for developing the idea and the concept which is my team and I used for preparing the solution for maintaining the social distance within the workplace and this also help to mitigate the other challenges.

This stage focusing on the problem that we identified through our study as these problems arise at the time of Covid-19 in the organizations. The problem identification is considered as the first stage of this model and this also helps to develop the creative idea for solving this problem.

Stage 2: Incubation

In this stage, the identified problem is evaluated for developing the proper concept of the social distance aspect within the organisation and this also required for developing the various aspect within the workplace. This stage also helps to evaluate the employee’s problem and also understand the employee perspective.

Stage 3: Intimation

After evaluating the facts, my team and discussed the possible recommendation for this situation that arise in the workplace and this recommendation will help the organisation mitigate the problems. This recommendation also enhances the process for developing several aspects within the organisation.

Stage 4: Illuminating

After proposing several recommendations, we chose the one that fit for maintaining social distance and also this effective for increasing the productivity of the organisation. This recommendation is stating that the division of the employees as per their names which start with the vowel or consonant and the suitable date is prepared for enhancing the productivity of the organisation.

Stage 5: Verification

This recommendation is identified through developing the organisation process evaluated by our team for understanding the importance and effectiveness within the organisation.

Recommendation

The entire study reflects that there has a huge representation of employees within the IT firm. That makes a serious problem to maintain social distancing within the workplace. To resolve those problem concerned authority need to take some serious decisions. The creative and innovative suggestions are given below to resolve the social distancing related challenge of the IT firm.

The selected firm can make a work portfolio for its employees. Hence, to minimize the number of employees within the workplace the below table is formulated for changing the workplace culture.
 

Table 3: Recommended work structure table of the business operation

The above-presented table is prepared to minimize the number of employees within the workplace. By using the recommended work chart, the firm can maintain social distancing without hampering its present business operation.

Conclusion

As a part of a group, we learn various techniques to explore a creative solution to resolve contemporary challenges in a workplace. Hence, the entire study is focused on the social distance-related challenges that are facing by an IT business firm during the Covid-19 situation. A fishbone diagram is created to identify the cause and effect of arising problem in the IT firm. Wall’s theory is also presented to generate a creative idea to resolve the problem of the selected workplace. To build a suggestion we extract member-related data from the register of the IT firm. Based on the gathered information the recommendation is created that can minimize the risk effect within the organisation.

Reference List

Crowley, F., & Doran, J 2020, COVID?19, occupational social distancing and remote working potential: An occupation, sector and regional perspective. Regional Science Policy & Practice, Vol. 12 no. 6, pp.1211-1234, retrieved 26 April 2021, <https://rsaiconnect.onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1111/rsp3.12347>

Koren, M., & Pet?, R 2020, Business disruptions from social distancing, PloS one, Vol. 15 no. 9, p.e0239113, retrieved 26 April 2021, < https://journals.plos.org/plosone/article?id=10.1371/journal.pone.0239113>

Lewnard, J.A. & Lo, N.C 2020, Scientific and ethical basis for social-distancing interventions against COVID-19, The Lancet Infectious Diseases, Vol. 20 no. 6, pp.631-633, retrieved 26 April 2021, <https://www.thelancet.com/journals/laninf/article/PIIS1473-3099%2820%2930190-0/fulltext>

Shinde, D. D., Ahirrao, S., & Prasad, R 2018, Fishbone diagram: Application to identify the root causes of student–staff problems in technical education. Wireless personal communications, Vol. 100 no. 2, pp.653-664, retrieved 26 April 2021, <https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s11277-018-5344-y>
 

MGT603 Systems Thinking Assessment 3 Sample

Assignment Brief

 Individual/Group - Individual
Length - Up to 2000 words
Learning Outcomes

a) Analyze, select and apply systems modelling tools in integrating, optimizing and enhancing business processes within contemporary organizations.

b) Synthesize technological and non-technological solutions to business problems that promote integration and that optimize whole-of-enterprise operations

Submission - By 11:55pm AEST/AEDT Friday of Module 6.2 (week 12)

For intensive class:

By 11:55pm AEST/AEDT Friday of Module 6.2 (week 6)
Weighting - 40%
Total Marks - 40 marks

Context:

There are two approaches towards improving systems, short-term approaches that normally addresses the symptoms and rarely help understand and address the cause of the problem, and long-term approaches, which allow managers to address the real cause(s) of the problem. In this assessment, students will try to solve a practical problem by using Systems Thinking tools called System Archetypes combined with value stream mapping.

Instructions for assignment help:

Assessment 3 is about uncovering the complexities in operations management generally, identifying key themes, intended and unintended consequences and proposing a holistic solution to the problem using a Systems Thinking lens.

The following scenario study provides you with a brief overview of a hypothetical problem. Be aware that the scenario provided may not cover every detail that you will need to address in the Written Report, in which case, you will need to conduct additional research, including further research on how emergency departments function in any hospital.

Scenario

Overview:

Consider yourself as part of a team responsible for managing the operations of an emergency department of a public hospital. The emergency department has received feedback from patients suggesting that the patient wait times need to be improved. The value stream map of the current operations is shown in the attached diagram.

The Value Stream Map is can be Found via the Assessment Link.

It is recommended that you identify and critically analyses intended and unintended consequences, recommending holistic solutions that will optimize the operations of the emergency department without compromising the performance of other functions of the hospital.

Suggested format: Your Written Report should include the following sections and sub-sections.
Cover Page (Subject Name & Code, Assessment No., Student Name and Surname, Student Number, Lecturer, Year and Trimester)

Executive Summary

Table of Contents

1. Introduction/Background

2. Main Discussion

2.1. Identification and analysis of the System Archetypes that may impede performance

2.2. Analysis of the current State Value Stream Map of the emergency department based on SystemArchetypes

2.3. Recommended new State Value Stream Map with desired reduction in patient turnaround time

2.4. Discussion on Intended and unintended consequences of the modified system

3. Conclusion

4. Recommendations

5. References

6. Appendices (Appendix A, Appendix B, ...)

Submission Instructions:

This Written Report is to be written according to academic writing guidelines and must be submitted in compliance with the following;

1. You should make significant references to the subject material and substantial wider reading. A minimum five (5) academic (books & peer-reviewed journal articles) & two (2) other sources (newspaper article, trade publications, websites, etc.) must be used. These should be referenced in the APA style, both in-text and in a reference list. References to ‘Wikipedia’ or similar unsubstantiated sources will not be accepted.

2. The assignment is to include in-text citations and a reference list following the latest APA referencing style. The APA referencing guide can be located in the Academic Writing Guide at http://library.think.edu.au/ld.php?content_id=1882254

3. Submit Written Report (with references) via the Assessment link in the main navigation menu in MGT603 Systems thinking on the Student Portal. The Learning Facilitator will provide feedback via Grade Centre in the Student Portal. Feedback can be viewed in My Grades.

Students should use the brief to guide what to include in the assessment and the following rubric to inform the standard required.

Solution

Introduction/Background

Time access to emergent patient care is a significant matter that concern emergency division across the Australia and in overall world. Emergency divisions of the hospitals have responsibility in providing fast services delivery with respect to primary care. Since, any emergency divisions are running 24 hours in a day that assists towards exhaustion of the restricted supply of resources and dealing of a several conditions with severe significance. Patient turnaround is one of the most common issues in the public sector hospital, and this study is mainly concentrated on such issue. System thinking with the timely mechanism is one of the most major operational requirements in the healthcare services. In the given case scenario, public hospital of Australia is witnessing an issue with respect to significant patient turnaround time. There is a stark increment in the number of complaints of long waiting time by patients who acquire services in emergency division. Goal of the prevailing study is to reduction in such waiting time by 50%. The aim consists of evaluation present value stream map with the help of system archetype and recommends suitable modification.

Main discussion

Evaluation of system archetype by which performance impede

System archetypes means recurring trend of behavior that provide understanding into the structure by which system is run. There are several system archetypes used in the health care by which for analyzing an organization (Ahmad, et al. 2017). It can be said that, by this an individual could observe recurring behaviours and connected them to the fundamental arrangement of the business, which is reflected in appendix 1. In the given case scenario, following are the system archetypes by which performance impede –
Shifting of burden: By considering the case scenario, it has been observed that process of the organization for treatment of emergency patient is quite comprehensive. It could be evidenced from the fact that, they are required to complete a series of formalities prior to obtaining service delivery from the emergency division. Such behavior reflects about shifting of burden, in which one division transfer their burden on another.

Figure 1 Shifting the burden
(Source: System Archetypes 2018).

Success to be successful: In this aspect, it can be said that, resources has not been applied by the organization in effective manner, by which patient have to wait significant amount of time for getting treatment from the emergency department. Success to be successful archetype shows that performance of the organization is required to be developed through reward or recognition element, which is missing in the public sector hospitals (Currie, Spyridonidis, & Oborn, 2020).

Figure 2 Success to be successful
(Source: System Archetypes 2018).

Based on system archetypes analysis of current value stream map of the emergency division

Value stream map is applied for gaining in-depth insight of bilateral involvement of material and information flow. The procedure in which value stream map is created is shown in appendix 2.

Figure 3 Current value stream map of emergency department

The above value stream map reflects the comprehensive mechanism of the services provided by emergency room with the involvement of various factors and requirement of documentation for obtaining services from cited department. Emergency patient are required to go through from the comprehensive procedure before getting services. A detailed analysis of parties requires time as well as coordination with some other department as well like laboratory testing. Public sector hospital remains emphasized on providing well-documented service and insurance provision. Complying with the procedure of insurance could assists towards delay in availability of treatment therefore; it could not be neglected for financial constraint and hospital registration. It can be said that, insurance services could be regarded as impedance for the emergency services of the healthcare.

Further, public sector hospitals run activities with the analysis of past medical history of patient and acknowledging of in-depth treatment mechanism flow as per the depicted value stream map and address with information and material flow in simultaneous manner. Flow of information handles the maintenance of earlier case history and registration procedure of the patient as per medical requirement. Notably, information flow starts when patient get registered in the hospital and delayed activities status assists towards overall delay in the information streaming. Such delay takes place for the longer level of information route and finally reaching at place for treatment availability. The value stream map reflects about centralized system for nursing services for the usual element of outlined information and system flow (Frank, Shaked, & Koral-Kordova, 2016). Enhanced number of patient requires adequate nurse employees by which delivery of information could be provided in timely manner, which is decreased for several cases dealing by only one nurse. Healthcare professional diagnose patient thoroughly repetitively that handles with a delay of whole treatment module.

Overall, it can be stated that by going through the current value stream map that every element consisted in the material flow with a delay in services obtaining and that could assist towards significant delay in the overall procedure. Information dealing and process is more complex because of the interconnected paces as well as participation by the external entities. Block reflected in the above current value stream map are reflect various array of flow of information and collection of information and recording of such requires time and reversely directed indication could enhance delay in providing services to the patient of emergency ward.

Recommendation about new value stream map with required dropping in patient turnover time

The above analysis reflect that major issue of the public hospital is related to the significant patient waiting time, and therefore new value stream map should be created in a manner that provide effective services in timely manner as well as keeping good quality of services (Knoll, Reinhart, & Pru?glmeier Marco 2019).
In the new value stream map, it is required that time required in the information flow should be less than in the present system, and in case of larger volume of patient, appointment from doctors directly would be possible by which efficiency in the time management could be obtained. In the context of minimization of time, process patient required to comply with treatment procedure and on the basis of treatment process and expenses, report of insurance should be created. In the new value stream map, there would be not any requirement of testing for insurance gain. It leads towards saving in time as well as improvement in efficiency level as insurance checking could assists in the acceleration of deadly health matters (Oberhausen, & Plapper, 2017).
Delay in the treatment because of the insurance testing is not restricted to delay in particular patient service, but it could assist into advancement of a chain reaction for treatment consequently in major delay. The new value stream map includes of an information flow system with a latest mechanism of sharing of data overall. Sharing of information in the unified system could provide support to the healthcare experts as well as care provider to ascertain condition of the patient and decrease the time required in data flow. Therefore, it is recommended that, data related to patient history and diagnostic information should be shared into the unified system, in order to understand the medical background (Toivonen, & Siitonen, 2016). Overall, it can be suggested that, new value stream map should be equipped with effectiveness of data-driven network for the overall improvement in the public sector hospital. There is requirement of robust information technology system for the entire transformation and implementation of the servers (mainframe) by which communication process could be improvised.

Analysis of intended and unintended results of the modified system

Intended outcomes

In this aspect, it can be asserted that, implementation of the new infrastructure and new system could assist towards improvement in the time efficiency of the public hospitals. All interconnected activities would be take place in systematically, for example, due to unified system for data sharing, information about patient could be obtained by nurse as well as professional health experts in effective manner (Abouelmehdi, Beni-Hessane, & Khaloufi, 2018). However, this system may result in some drawbacks consisting of sorting of patient on priority basis, which can result in negative performance. However, it can be said that, the new value stream map would reduce the current issues faced by public sector of hospital such as significant patient turnaround time.

Unintended outcomes

It can be said that, new value stream map primarily creates for improvement in the waiting time of patient, but it would definitely assist towards some unintended outcomes as well. Since, it has been suggested that, patient could also obtain direct reference from healthcare professionals. However, it would avoid the primary assistance of nurse and directly obtaining treatment from doctors could assists towards significant pressure as well as burden on professionals and this could also influence other factors of the hospital and continuous workflow. Further, new value stream map requires installation of robust information technology system, in which the requirement of recruitment of new employees may arise (Meghan, Rune, Alain, Paolo, & Eirik A?rsand. 2016). It is because of the fact that present employees of the hospital may not possess adequate knowledge and skills regarding dealing with IT software. Moreover, the primary objective of the proposed value stream map is mainly connected with the reduction in waiting time of patient. However, it would also lead towards improvement and growth of the public sector hospitals. The reason behind the same is that, by this reduction in time, hospital could provide services to the enhanced number of patient, which directly influences the performance of the organization.

Conclusion

The above-mentioned analysis reflects that, it is required by public sector hospitals to improve time management along with effective management of resources and installation of information technology software. In the healthcare sector, the role of emergency division is vital for life-saving objective and mitigation of risk because of sudden health breakdown (Narke, & Jayadeva, 2020). It has been observed that, present system of emergency division comprises with significant comprehensive procedures, which affects time management of service delivery. In this aspect, it is essential that, current system should be modified and new system should be comprised with simple and easy procedure by which patient can avail timely services as well as quality of services should not be comprised. All the aspects of new system have been reflected in the proposed value stream map. Further, such proposed value stream can result in some intended as well as intended outcomes such as reduction in the turnaround time of patient but at the same time there would be requirement of recruitment of new employees. Despite of this, by the new value stream map, public sector hospital could achieve their purpose and generate services in more effective manner.

Recommendations

It can be said that, proposed value stream map assists towards generation of the new system with the probability of error and incomplete process as compared to the earlier system. In order to obtain effective benefits of the new system, it is recommended that, hospital should provide training and development courses to the existing employees as well as recruit some new skilled person, so that advantages of the new IT system could be availed fully. Further, it is recommended that, in the unified system of data sharing, there should be adequate control, so that confidentiality of information could be maintained (Oberhausen, & Plapper, 2017).

References

Abouelmehdi, K., Beni-Hessane, A., & Khaloufi, H. (2018). Big healthcare data: preserving security and privacy. Journal of Big Data, 5(1), 1–18. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40537-017-0110-7

Ahmad, N. A. A., Te, C. L., Rohaizan, R., Md, F. A., Norafifah, H., & Mustaqqim, A. R. (2017). Value stream mapping to improve workplace to support lean environment. Matec Web of Conferences, 135. https://doi.org/10.1051/matecconf/201713500032

Currie, G., Spyridonidis, D., & Oborn, E. (2020). The influence of hr practices upon knowledge brokering in professional organizations for service improvement: addressing professional legitimacy and identity in health care. Human Resource Management, 59(4), 379–395. https://doi.org/10.1002/hrm.22001

Frank, M., Shaked, H., & Koral-Kordova, S. (Eds.). (2016). Systems thinking: foundation, uses and challenges (Ser. Management science: theory and applications). Nova Science Publishers.

Knoll, D., Reinhart, G., & Pru?glmeier Marco. (2019). Enabling value stream mapping for internal logistics using multidimensional process mining. Expert Systems with Applications, 124, 130–142. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.eswa.2019.01.026

Meghan, B., Rune, P., Alain, G., Paolo, Z., & Eirik A?rsand. (2016). The opportunity to evaluate the impact of our changing health care system through archetypes and reinforced use of medical coding. International Journal of Integrated Care, 16(5), 6. https://doi.org/10.5334/ijic.2550

Narke, M. M., & Jayadeva, C. T. (2020). Value stream mapping: effective lean tool for smes. Materials Today: Proceedings: Part 2, 24, 1263–1272. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.matpr.2020.04.441

Oberhausen, C., & Plapper, P. (2017). Cross-enterprise value stream assessment. Journal of Advances in Management Research, 14(2), 182–193. https://doi.org/10.1108/JAMR-05-2016-0038

Oberhausen, C., & Plapper, P. (2017). Cross-enterprise value stream assessment. Journal of Advances in Management Research, 14(2), 182–193. https://doi.org/10.1108/JAMR-05-2016-0038

System Archetypes (2018). (Pdf). Retrieved from<https://thesystemsthinker.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/03/Systems-Archetypes-I-TRSA01_pk.pdf>

Toivonen, T., & Siitonen, J. (2016). Value stream analysis for complex processes and systems. Procedia Cirp, 39, 9–15. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procir.2016.01.035

Value stream mapping process (2020). Retrieved from https://quality-one.com/vsm/

MBA633 Real-world Business Analytics and Management Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Assessment Title - Individual Interpretation of Analytics Report – Gartner Magic Quadrant
Assessment Type: Written Report
Word Count: 1700 Words (+/-10%)
Weighting: 30 %
Total Marks: 30
Submission: Via Turnitin.
Due Date: Tuesday Week 7, 11:55pm AEDT

Your Task

Evaluate Business Intelligence Platforms using the Gartner Magic Quadrant. Summaries your findings in a report and evaluate the best tool for your chosen analytics application.

Assessment Description

The Gartner reports on current technology contain a plot such as the one shown below that summarises their findings. The figure is extracted from the Gartner report for Business Intelligence (BI) platforms.

Assessment Instructions for assignment help

This assessment comprises two components.

• Firstly, you are required to study the Gartner “Magic Quadrant for Analytics and Business Intelligence Platforms” shown above and articulate the insights in a report (1200 words).

i. Search the web for the 2019 and 2020 Magic Quadrants and note the changes between the two.

ii. Clearly state a BI application (to be) used in your workplace or potential workplace. You are required to provide a thesis highlighting the shortcoming in the current business practices, the improvement this application would bring, as well as the resultant targets from the BI application.

iii. What tool would you select to perform this analytics task?

• You will also be required to provide a summary of the key points made by the guest speaker (500 words).

NOTE: You will need to show evidence of appropriate research conducted (10 references) in order to succeed in this assessment.

Word Limits for Written Assessments

Submissions that exceed the word limit by more than 10% will cease to be marked from the point at which that limit is exceeded.

Study Assistance

Students may seek study assistance from their local Academic Learning Advisor or refer to the resources on the MyKBS Academic Success Centre page. Click here for this

Solution

Gartner “Magic Quadrant for Business Intelligence platform”

Introduction

The definition of self-service is shifting in this field as augmented capabilities pervade platforms. At the same time, cloud ecosystems and alignment with productivity tools have become key selection factors. This Magic Quadrant will help data and analytics leaders plan an analytics and BI roadmap. Gartner, a public company is strongly identified for its analysis including a global advisory firm, which renders tools, techniques, including advice in numerous firms furthermore sectors like IT, Human resources, marketing, sales, plus supply chain, finance, etc. It’s headquartered in Stamford, Connecticut, united states. Within utilizing the qualitative data analysis procedure, it publishes a range of research reports “magic quadrant” to describe market trends similar to directions, maturity, furthermore participants. The purposes of analytics and business intelligence are straightforward to use and accommodate in supporting the workflow in analytics of the preparation regarding data, visualization about data to achieve the generation of insights.

Background.

In the analytics and business intelligence market, vendors are registered from start-up ventures to large capital technology firms. Cloud platform performs an indispensable role in the ABI Market as the preponderance of spending within this market is based on cloud deployment including the presence of cloud platform player signify more extra in the market. Cloud vendors strive for large sets of entry points in analytics and the business market. As the market of ABI is no longer distinguished by their capacities of data visualization vendors in the ABI market can formulate fundamental execution indicator dashboards by utilizing different chart forms. Augmentation of Works like preparation of data, visualization of data, and insights of data demand the assistance of artificial intelligence including machine learning.

This study will examine specific 2019 and 2020 data including significant and notable changes.

Magic quadrants for analytics and business platforms.

The augmentation analytics procedure is stretching in every quarter. Artificial and business analytics accommodates in operating various sectors including capabilities areas, and especially domains blended with augmented analytics. Some of its features are:

• Security: Aptitudes that facilitate security platforms, user’s administration, auditing, including authentication platform.

• Manageability: This function operates to track the practice of ABI platforms including works on the information management system to share the information.

• Cloud Analytics: Aptitudes in sustaining the building, deploying, moreover managing the capacity in analytics.

• Data source connectivity: While optimizing execution, this empowers the user to connect the data, query, furthermore ingest the data.

• Data preparation: This facilitates aggregating and develops the data accumulated from different sources to create an analytics model.

• Catalogue: Aptitudes to produce the catalogue for the content of analytics so that it enhances ease for customers to access.

• Data visualization: Capacities to sustain highly visualized data by using images, charts, and features.

• Natural language query: This facilitates users to undoubtedly demand their query either by typing in a search box or spoken based on analytics content.

• Automated insights: Augmentation procedure in analytics assists in automating the method of insights by using ML and AI.

• Natural language generation: This authorizes the creation of automatic linguistic classifications of answers and data and analytic content.

• Reporting: This allows the ability to generate and distribute pixel-perfect, grid layout, multipage reports to users.

Major and notable changes between the Magic Quadrant of 2019 and 2020.

The 2019 mass emigration to the cloud determined a development towards cloud ecosystem dominance. Gartner analysts stated that this accelerated extension of the BI cloud flagged a transformation where cloud mounds are forthwith awaited to proceed to a perfectly assessed ABI platform. Consumers must examine vendor lock-in as adequately as to whether or not the multi-cloud exists in their critical layouts throughout vendor preference. Analytics including BI providers are frequently possessing to determine between freeing their products or concentrate on particular market sections including aligning their marketing and products to these verticals. Gartner revamped its evaluation also admittance standards for Magic Quadrants as the software market unfolds following an influential market development in criteria.

Distinguished researcher remarks that in the year 2020, the preponderance of spending within the market of business intelligence was based on cloud deployment. Touching the other side, the year 2019 examined a mass retreat to the cloud. In the year 2019, Qlik including ThoughtSpot has been wheeled as the market leader in analytics and business intelligence. While in 2020, Microsoft Has turned as top among leader quadrant.

Figure 1: Notable changes in 2019

Figure 2: Notable changes in 2020

Notable changes in the year 2019-2020 among major corporations.

In comparison to 2019, the Magic quadrant has encountered many developments concerning cloud infrastructure. Gartner remarked that in 2019 for cloud infrastructure it was unavoidable to not incorporate hyper-scale cloud providers, however in same the year, Gartner also discerned that it is crucial to incorporate a broad assortment of services beyond cloud infrastructure with the hyper-scale cloud provider.

BI application and its Shortcomings.

Data analytics is molding the business today. As further information furthermore processes exercise on digital format, vehicles like business intelligence (BI) have matured astonishingly valuable. The proper amalgamation of these can provide the company an advantage above the opposition. Notwithstanding owning its benefits, BI evolves with its fair portion of liabilities. If the company is practicing BI, some prevalent obstructions are to be anticipated.

Data Infringements- One of the most constraining anxieties with any data analysis system moves the uncertainty of leaks. If the company is utilizing a BI application to manage sensitive knowledge, an inaccuracy within the process could endanger it, hurting the company's partnership with the consumers. Higher than 30% of the examination of business pronounced that security concerns are the most prominent trials meeting BI.
Unusual Prices- BI software can be costly, while the potential for a big ROI can verify this, the original price can be a hindrance to the more modest companies which possess to reflect the expenses of the hardware including IT staff.

Complexity in analyzing varied data sources- The added comprising company's BI remains the more extra data it will utilize. A variation of diverse references can be advantageous however the systems may produce struggle operating crosswise terraces.

Bad Data Quality- A plethora of data can indicate a lot of what the company's BI vehicles investigate remains remote or accommodating, mudding outcomes including lagging down the method.
Opposition to adoption- One of the abundant impediments covering BI is employees rather than departments not aspiring to desegregate into their operations.

Having asserted the shortcoming, there are some major advantages, and improvements as well of using BI systems.

The Business Analytics tools that were possible as selections to perform this stated task were:

Sisense

It is one of the most candid business analytics tools to manage, for those who remain non-tech-savvy. It is user-friendly while enabling anyone within the company to operate heterogeneous datasets including visualizing the data without the sustenance of the IT department.

System

It is a BI device ideal for an organization that necessitates solidifying furthermore streamline methods between diverse B2B and B2C channels. It accommodates boost effectiveness moreover productivity plus it incorporates particular sales characteristics as well.

Dundas BI

It is one of the uppermost browsed-based business analytics tools. Similar to most cloud BI alternatives, it is adaptable moreover empowers users to communicate in real-time various data sources. It extends visualizations under the sort of customizable charts, reports, diagrams, and others.

Tableau

It is a BI program that offers data discovery including visualization added convenience. It permits analyzing, envisions, and yield data while circumventing the IT department.

Google Analytics

It is lumped against many business analytics tools, nevertheless, it's a standalone data analysis tool that grants to shadow business performance online. It facilitates corporations to mark RIO.

SAP Business Intelligence

It contributes excellent analytics software designated for all purposes such as end-users, administration, including IT. It renders a plenitude of functionalities within a single program the facilitates machine education, planning, analysis, and BI imminent analysis.

SAS

It is one of the most extensively utilized tools on the market, it operates as a varied furthermore sturdy tool that is effortless to determine for beginners. Some new modules incorporate anti-money laundering.

Excel.

Microsoft Excel is amidst the most successful business analytics tools, approximately all data science hunkers on Excel facing one degree or another. It wields the grunt obligation of business analytics, presenting itself indispensable for data collection including company on all coverings.

The main aim of these tools was to accommodate visualization, and business intelligence capabilities for the end-users to generate their reports including dashboards. Power BI is also one such tool that includes an accumulation of various software services, and app to convert a company's unstructured data into interactive dashboards, immersive visualization, interactive insights. It helped in visualizing the data sharing the insights furthermore additionally accommodates in preparing interactive business intelligence reports. All of these consist of certain ingredients: visualizations, Datasets, Reports, and Dashboards.

References

Howson, C., Sallam, R. L., Richardson, J. L., Tapadinhas, J., Idoine, C. J., and Woodward, A. 2018. ‘Magic quadrant for analytics and business intelligence platforms.’ Retrieved Aug, 16, 2018.

Canito, J., Ramos, P., Moro, S., and Rita, P. 2018, ‘Unfolding the relations between companies and technologies under the Big Data umbrella’, Computers in Industry, 99, 1-8.

O'Connell, D., Elliot, B., and Benitez, R. A. 2018. Magic Quadrant for Unified Communications as a Service, Worldwide. Abgerufen von https://www. gartner. com/document/3891484.

Rikhardsson, P., and Yigitbasioglu, O. 2018, ‘Business intelligence & analytics in management accounting research: Status and future focus’, International Journal of Accounting Information Systems, vol. 29, pp.37-58.

Tripathi, A., and Bagga, T. 2020, ‘Leading Business Intelligence (BI) Solutions and Market Trends’. Available at SSRN 3568414.

Klisarova-Belcheva, S., Ilieva, G., and Yankova, T. 2017. Business intelligence and analytics–contemporary system model. Trakia Journal of Sciences, vol. 15 no.1, pp.298-304.

Teruel, M. A., Maté, A., Navarro, E., González, P., and Trujillo, J. C. (2019). The New Era of Business Intelligence Applications: Building from a Collaborative Point of View. Business & Information Systems Engineering, vol. 61 no.5, pp.615-634.

Plazas, J. E., Bimonte, S., de Vaulx, C., Schneider, M., Nguyen, Q. D., Chanet, J. P., ... and Corrales, J. C. (2020), ‘A Conceptual Data Model and Its Automatic Implementation for IoT-Based Business Intelligence Applications’, IEEE Internet of Things Journal, vol. 7 no.10, 10719-10732.

Al-Zadjali, M., and Al-Busaidi, K. A. 2018, ‘Empowering CRM through business intelligence applications: a study in the telecommunications sector’. International Journal of Knowledge Management (IJKM), vol. 14 no.4, pp. 68-87.

Tripathi, A., Bagga, T., and Aggarwal, R. K. 2020, ‘Strategic impact of business intelligence: A review of literature’. Prabandhan: Indian Journal of Management, vol.13 no. 3, pp.35-48.

MBA622 Comprehensive Healthcare Strategies Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Assessment Title: Industry Sector Analysis
Length: 1500 words (+/- allowable range)
Weighting: 25%
Total Marks: 100
Submission: Online
Due Date: Week 5

Your task

Students are to write a 1500-word report that analyses an industry MBA622 - Comprehensive Healthcare

Strategies

segment of the Australian Healthcare sector based on the below selection of sectors.

Assessment Description.

This assessment provides students with an opportunity to research and analyses a particular healthcare segment to gain an initial insight into the opportunities and challenges that currently exist for organizations that deliver healthcare services in Australia in that segment. Students will present that research and analysis in the form of a formal report which requires students to adhere to a report structure including an Executive

Summary.

Assessment Instructions for assignment help

Students are to investigate an industry segment of the Australian healthcare sector and examine and evaluate its model of operations and growth over the last ten years. Recommended industry segments include:

• General public hospitals
• General practices
• Private hospitals
• Specialist medical services
• Pathology or diagnostic imaging services
• Dentistry or other related services
• Oncology services
• Mental health services
• Allied healthcare services
• Pharmaceutical industry
• Aged care

However, students are encouraged to determine the scope of their analysis in consultation with their lecturer. Assessments 2 and 3 will build on the initial analysis undertaken in Assessment 1.

The industry analysis must be in report form and should present appropriate criteria or business analysis tools as a framework in which to identify and analyses the challenges and opportunities confronting the segment. It should draw from a range of government and academic sources, as well as industry reports. It should cover:

• A definition of the industry, outlining its main activities

• An overview of the competitive landscape, identifying and describing major competitors or organizations within the segment and their business models

• Industry trends, presenting an overview of operating conditions and factors influencing operating conditions

• Ethical issues faced within the industry

Your analysis should focus on the broader environmental factors influencing operations within the sector. The report may also include charts or diagrams, which are not included in the word count. The findings presented in this report must be based on scholarly and peer-reviewed sources of information that were published no longer than 5 years ago and relevant to the field of strategic healthcare. These sources must be presented in the report in the form of in-text citations and a reference list adhering with Kaplan Harvard Referencing Style. Wikipedia and other ‘popular’ sites are not to be used.

Assessment Submission

This file must be submitted as a ‘Word’ document to avoid any technical issues that may occur from incorrect file format upload. Uploaded files with a virus will not be considered as a legitimate submission. MyKBS will notify you if there is an issue with the submitted file. In this case, you must contact your workshop facilitator via email and provide a brief description of the problem and a screenshot of the MyKBS error message. You are also encouraged to submit your work well before the deadline to avoid any possible delay involving the Turnitin similarity report or any other technical difficulties.
Late assignment submission penalties
Penalties will be imposed on late assignment submissions in accordance with Kaplan Business School “late assignment submission penalties” policy.

 Solution

 Introduction

The segment selected is aged care services. The objective is to provide an analysis of the segment and provide the ethical issues. Aged care offers help to elderly inhabitants to facilitate them with daily livelihood and other requirements. The aged care business offers older Australians a variety of diverse services, permitting them to access suitable stages of care when and where they need it as they grow old (Henderson et al., 2017). In conveying aged care facilities to the Australian society, the subdivision is both a fundamental sponsor of the comfort and self-respect of older Australians and a significant supplier to the Australian market. It can comprise aid with daily living, health care, lodging and apparatus such as walking structures or slopes.

Health industry segment

The Main Activities of aged care services comprise offering housing room for older people in standard housing care services and offering to house for aged citizens in a retirement community (health.gov.au, 2021).

Government-funded aged care facilities are accessible to qualified citizens. Government-funded aged care facilities comprise in-home help (care in residence), housing care in aged care (nursing) homes, and temporary care for instance respite care. In-house aged care offers support to help the elderly stay free for as long as achievable. It can assist with things such as personal care, transportation, foodstuff, shopping, housework, physio, communal actions, and adjustments to the care home. Housing care in aged care is for elderly citizens who can no longer reside at residence and require continuing aid with daily errands or health care. Temporary care can assist to develop comfort and autonomy or retrieving on their feet after an infirmary stay. It can moreover give the elderly or their carer a break. Aged people can get temporary facilities in their house, an aged care residence or in society (health.gov.au, 2021).

The Australian Government finances:

• After-hospital or changeover care – help for up to twelve weeks to assist them to get well after a wait in the infirmary
• Temporary curative care – support till eight weeks to assist them to enhance their health and sovereignty
• Respite care – help for some hours, days or more to give the elderly or their carer a break (health.gov.au, 2021).

The corporations having the major market share in the Aged Care facilities in Australia comprise Allity Aged Care, Arcare Aged Care, BlueCross and many more.

Ality

Allity is a net of forty-four homes situated throughout Queensland, NSW, Victoria and South Australia with a communal familiarity of their administration that makes it one of the mainly appreciated and reputable suppliers in the Australian aged care business.

Arcare

Arcare is currently one of the mainly pioneering aged care sources in Australia. Their initial aged care home was constructed in 1997 and since then they have developed to thirty-six all through Victoria, Queensland as well as New South Wales. Each house is completely credited by the Australian Aged Care superiority group with facilities counting 24-hour treatment, getting old in place, enduring care, responsive (dementia) care and relief care (healthcare channel. co, 2021).

BlueCross

A foremost private aged care source, BlueCross has been offering a broad variety of supple and receptive aged care facilities throughout the city and local Victoria since 1993. From residential care to in-house support and reprieve care, they are dedicated to serving elderly people subsist the best life likely daily. At present, the company runs thirty-four aged care homes in Victoria, sustaining over twenty-six hundred residents and more than a thousand patrons residing in their homes (Healthcare channel. co, 2021).

Bupa

Bupa is a health and care business dedicated to serving the clientele to survive longer, better, better-off lives. It presents a wide variety of services, counting aged care and retreat, dental, visual, health indemnity, and social safety plans, to progress the wellbeing of all Australians.

Bupa Australia and New Zealand is a division of the Bupa Group. It is a global healthcare corporation. It invests earnings into offering further and improved healthcare for the advantage of present and upcoming clientele around the globe (healthcare channel. co, 2021).

Analytical Tools Application

Porter’s five forces

Threat of entry

New entrants in aged care services brings novelty, new ways of doing things and put force on aged care by lower cost strategy. Increased threat demands for barrier in business for safeguarding the competitive edge of business.

Bargaining Power of Suppliers

All most all the corporations in aged care services purchase their raw material like medicine, mask and other supply from several suppliers. Suppliers in central position can reduce the margins of aged care (health.gov.au, 2021).

Bargaining Power of Buyers

Buyers are frequently a demanding group. They want to pay money for the best contributions accessible by paying the least amount price as achievable. This put pressure on aged care services in the long run (Walker and Paliadelis, 2016).

Threat of Substitute

When a new invention or service meets a comparable purchaser needs in dissimilar ways, industry abundance suffers. This is the case with aged care companies and it increases the need of understanding customer demands (Hugo et al., 2018)..

Rivalry

If the opposition among the present players in a business is strong then it will coerce down prices and reduce the general profitability of the business. Aged care services function in a very competitive sector. Increased rivalry can decrease the profitability and hamper the business sustainability in the long run.

Industry factors influencing operating conditions

Political

Political factors have an important function in determining the issues that can impact aged care services’ long term productivity in a country. An aged care service operates in Health Care Equipment & Services in many countries and pictures itself to diverse kinds of political environment and political system risks. Government spending can impact the tax policies of aged care and consumers can get advantage of the subsidies.

Economic

The Macro environment factors like – inflation rate, savings rate, interest rate, foreign exchange rate and economic cycle decide the collective insist and collective investment in a market. Economic factor regulates the spending of consumers, for instance high inflation rate or unemployment will reduce the purchasing power of consumer.

Social

Society’s traditions and way of doing things impact the traditions of a business in an environment. Social understanding assists the healthcare professional in understanding the root cause and the expected behavior towards certain group. For instance, people are shifting towards natural cures and understanding the societal demands can assist in the treatment.

Technological

Technology is fast disrupting various industries across the board. Over the last 5 years the industry has been transforming really fast, adopting digital technology for improving the services to the elderly. Digital tools assist in tracking the health and taking appointments from home which makes the process faster. Technology has also created different devices like hearing aid which increases the performance of aged care services.

Environmental

Aged care services in Australia must check for the climate, waste management and laws regarding the environmental damage. Environmental standards must be complied for operating otherwise heavy penalty can be faced by business. It will lead to loss and defamation of aged care name.

Legal

Copyrights, discrimination law, consumer protection and other laws must be applied as not abiding the rules can damage the reputation and profitability of the firm.

External Industry Challenges, Internal Weakness, and New Trends

The initial main trend experiencing the Australian aged care segment revisits to demographics again, and that is the irrefutable mass of the five million well-built baby boomer group who are currently incoming their retreat years in large figures (Dyer et al., 2020). Actually with approximately one-third of Australia's baby boomers by now past the authorized withdrawal age of sixty-five and about eight per cent of all Australians of sixty-five years and over existing in housing aged care, insist for novel aged care beds will increase by an expected seventy-six thousand places in the subsequent five years (japara.com.au, 2021).

Aged care in Australia is at present a hybrid arrangement, with the federal government partially casing the expenses of residential care lodging for aged and immobilized people who go by a string of eligibility experiments through what is identified as the Aged Care Funding Instrument (ACFI). Since 2016 entire federal government expenditure on aged care and correlated facilities was seventeen billion dollars for about 270,000 citizens (Harrison et al., 2019). With the figure of people in aged care likely to develop exponentially in impending years, the federal administration will locate it ever more hard to support the present stage of care it offers, meaning additional market-based advances will be required. Prosperous Australians with important resources like extremely-valued homes will be likely to shell out the superior out-of-pocket bill for aged care lodging, to finance those who have slight or no resources and thus little means to finance their treatment (Henderson et al., 2016).

Ethical issues

Care for the aged looks like healthcare in some way so that the recognizable values of medicinal ethics – admiration for autonomy, beneficence, and no maleficence - would moreover relate to principles in aged care.
There is though some major dissimilarity. The values of medical ethics have appeared mainly in the situation of the healthcare action of patients. For instance, the concentration of admiration for autonomy is on the capability and the liberty of patients to make choices regarding their health care. There are instances when cohorts or family associates might be concerned about those choices; however, the moral focus has been on the patient.

One difference to the conservative centre on autonomy is the additional acknowledgement of respect for self-respect. Related outlines of individual stress can be observed in the growth of planned nationwide codes of ethics for housing aged care.

Conclusion

Australia’s residents are getting older, because of longer life suspense and low fertility rates. The impact of aged population is a boost in the number of Australians wanting help in aged care. In answer, more private company providers are incoming the market, in rivalry with the government-funded as well as not-for-profit providers that have traditionally conquered.

Reference list

Dyer, S.M., Valeri, M., Arora, N., Tilden, D. and Crotty, M., 2020. Is Australia over?reliant on residential aged care to support our older population? The Medical Journal of Australia, 213(4), p.156. https://www.mja.com.au/system/files/issues/213_04/mja250670.pdf

Harrison, S.L., Dyer, S.M., Milte, R., Liu, E., Gnanamanickam, E.S. and Crotty, M., 2019. Alternative staffing structures in a clustered domestic model of residential aged care in Australia. Australasian journal on ageing, 38, pp.68-74. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/pdfdirect/10.1111/ajag.12674

Health.gov.au, (2021), About aged care, available at: https://www.health.gov.au/health-topics/aged-care/about-aged-care, accessed on: 13.12. 2021

Health.gov.au, (2021), What is aged care?, available at: https://www.health.gov.au/health-topics/aged-care/about-aged-care/what-is-aged-care, accessed on: 13.12. 2021

Healthcarechannel.co, (2021), 10 Biggest Aged Care Providers in Australia, available at: https://healthcarechannel.co/10-biggest-aged-care-providers-in-australia/, accessed on: 13.12. 2021

Henderson, J., Willis, E., Xiao, L. and Blackman, I., 2017. Missed care in residential aged care in Australia: an exploratory study. Collegian, 24(5), pp.411-416. https://www.academia.edu/download/57709753/Missed_care_in_residential_aged_care_in_Australia_title.pdf

Henderson, J., Willis, E., Xiao, L., Toffoli, L. and Verrall, C., 2016. Nurses' perceptions of the impact of the aged care reform on services for residents in multi?purpose services and residential aged care facilities in rural Australia. Australasian journal on ageing, 35(4), pp.E18-E23. https://agedcare.royalcommission.gov.au/system/files/2020-06/RCD.9999.0256.0011.pdf

Hugo, C., Isenring, E., Sinclair, D. and Agarwal, E., 2018. What does it cost to feed aged care residents in Australia?. Nutrition & Dietetics, 75(1), pp.6-10. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/pdf/10.1111/1747-0080.12368

Japara.com.au, (2021), Future Trends in Australian Aged Care, available at: https://japara.com.au/news/future-trends-in-australian-aged-care/, accessed on: 13.12. 2021

Walker, H. and Paliadelis, P., 2016. Older peoples’ experiences of living in a residential aged care facility in Australia. Australasian journal on ageing, 35(3), pp. E6-E10. https://meaningfulcarematters.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/MCM_SDL_MEANINGFUL-WORDS_02_Older-peoples-experiences-of-living-in-a-residential-aged-care-facility-in-Australia.pdf

PRJ5004 Procurement, Quality and Risk Management Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief:

Assessment 3: QRP management plan
Due date: Week 10
Group/individual: Individual
Word count/Time provided: 2000 words
Weighting: 25%
Unit Learning Outcomes: ULO1, ULO2, ULO3, ULO4, ULO5

Assessment 3 Detail for assignment help

This assessment requires students to analyze a real-life project (either ongoing or completed) to develop and writer QRP (Quality, Risk and Procurement) management plan. Student can select project in their field of interest, but project must be aligned with the discipline of project management. Following resources may assist student in selecting a real-life project:

• The Australian Government's Department Infrastructure and Transport. National Infrastructure Construction Schedule (NICS): https://www.nics.gov.au/Project

• Transport for UNSW: https://www.transport.nsw.gov.au/projects

• City of Sydney, Changing urban precincts:
http://www.cityofsydney.nsw.gov.au/vision/changing-urban-precincts

Assessments 3 Marking Criteria and Rubric

The assessment will be marked out of 100 and will be weighted 25% of the total unit mark. The
marking criteria and rubric are shown on the following page.

Solution

Introduction

This report aims to provide a proper evaluation of the provided case study and attempts to develop a proper QRP management plan based on the information provided in the case study. The case study describes a pipeline development project taken up by Transport for New South Wales, a governmental organization operating under the government of New South Wales, Australia. The pipeline will hopefully be a beneficial substitute for road transportation. The report will provide a proper evaluation of the project management approaches taken up by the project development team along with the potential of the project scope, the challenges, and risks that are associated with the project management process and also map out a QRP management plan which will help in properly managing various aspects of the project such as quality management, risk management, and procurement management. A brief analysis of the case study and a general discussion regarding QRP management is also a part of this report.

Case Project identification and analysis

Case Study Analysis

Transport for New South Wales is a governmental organization known for undertaking and delivering on the construction of major scale transport frameworks that hugely benefit the urban and rural areas of New South Wales. The case study reflects the operations and initiatives that the government organization is undertaking to recognize a proper course for developing a sophisticated fuel corridor. The fuel pipeline corridor, after completion, will connect the port of Newcastle and the Central Western region of New South Wales, which is also known as the Orana region (Transport for NSW 2018). The geographical importance of this region is high because of its role as a connector of North-South and East-West transportation systems through train tracks and roads. The organization makes sure that sustenance and security are the major factors that impact the operation properly and is utilising turtle investigation to find out the proper way of executing this project (Transport for NSW 2018). Currently, the idea of using bicycle roads is being evaluated, which will help the company reduce the impact of this humongous construction project on the daily lives of normal commuters. Currently, the transportation process of fuel in this region is solely reliant on transporting via vehicles. However, the increasing demand for fuel in various economic sectors in New South Wales has outlined the necessity of constructing alternative supply mechanisms as transportation by vehicles is not a cost-effective or safe supply mechanism (Transport for NSW 2018).

Discussion on QRP and its potential impact

The purpose of QRP management is to make sure that the delivery of the project is smooth and the process through which project goals are realized Is efficient and effective. QRP management stands for Quality, Risk, and Procurement Management (Khanal 2020). So it can be said that QRP management deals with managing the procurement initiatives, designing methods to avoid or mitigate risks that are associated with the said project, and ensuring that the quality of the project deliverables matches the expectations of the clients. A successful QRP management approach can enable a project to efficiently execute the operations that are needed to achieve the outcome of the project in a timely and cost-effective way.

Quality Management

Quality Management is defined as the processes and initiatives that are taken by project team executives to properly monitor the operations and procedures that are in need of proper execution to achieve success and increase the standard of the project. It is an approach that aims to satisfy the needs of stakeholders (Franco et al. 2020). Quality Management is done differently by different project teams, but the end goal is the same. The end goal is to attain an outcome that is satisfactory and serves the interests of all stakeholders that are connected with the project. The main purpose of quality management is to achieve satisfactory long-term objectives by supervising the execution of short-term objectives

Risk Management

Risk management, on the other hand, is defined as the processes that can help organizations recognize, analyse, avoid, and mitigate the risks that are associated with certain project development operations. It was created as a tool for financial companies (Shad et al. 2019). Risk management is a crucial part of every project that enables project teams to ensure they are not unprepared for tackling certain obstructions that can come up while undertaking certain initiatives. Risk management processes are executed by initiating thorough research and cognitively analyzing all elements of a certain operation. Risk management helps in Identifying probable risks, avoiding obstruction in the project development process, increases the chance of success of the execution process, and helps project teams to stay on top of the project development process.

Procurement Management

Procurement management is defined as the activities that monitor the acquisition of raw material, required products, and services and allows organizations to maximize efficiency. Procurement management is done by collaborating with and negotiating with supply partners in order to make sure that the procurement of required materials and services is smooth and cost-effective. Procurement regulations can increase the efficiency of procurement management (Rotech, Keitany, & Sang 2021).

QRP management plan

Comparison with regard to QRP management plan

As stated above, the QRP management plan is a holistic approach that combines three important factors, Quality, Risks, and Procurement, which have a major impact on project development and execution and makes sure that the procedures and activities taken up by the project development team run as smoothly as possible. The governmental organization, Transport for New South Wales has properly integrated QRP management in its core operations. The company has properly established the objectives of the project, which is to minimize the cost and security risks of fuel transportation through New South Wales. The pipeline corridor will be extended through the hunter valley, one of the places in New South Wales that contains a huge amount of mining initiatives that serve as a significant source of income for the communities in New South Wales (Transport for NSW 2018). This fuel Corridor will be able to provide value to the community of New South Wales by connecting Important regions of New South Wales with the fuel import terminals that exist in the port of Newcastle. There are major benefits of undertaking this project as it will facilitate fuel transportation without being dependent on road transport. The project will also save costs in the future and safeguard the communities of the New South Wales region. This will benefit major industries such as the agriculture and mining sectors of New South Wales. By defining the objectives of the project clearly, the governmental organization has complied with the core propositions of a proper QRP management scheme. The elements of the project execution and the similarities these elements share with the three contributing aspects of a QRP management scheme will be noted in this section. The establishment of proper quality management approaches helps a project team to focus on the interests of the stakeholders, align the project team’s objectives with the general purpose of the project, increase the quality of project outcomes and deliverables, locate flaws in the operating system through thorough monitoring and help the project to match the expectations of the stakeholders. Quality management procedures are taken up by Transport for New South Wales, which has helped the governmental organization to choose the region through which the pipeline corridor will be constructed along with increasing the convenience of commuters' and dwellers' daily lives.
Quality management is generally done by effectively monitoring and assessing the progress of the project operations. The company has to make sure that experienced, unbiased reviewers thoroughly monitor the construction process of the pipeline. This will help ensure that the pipeline can withstand the wear and tear of daily usage. The pipeline, after construction, will be the primary alternative through which fuel will be transported from Newcastle to the Orana region of New South Wales. The pipeline must be able to execute its purpose perfectly as the majority of the mining and agriculture industry will be dependent upon the efficiency of the pipeline. Quality management is responsible for significant changes (Vassilev & Velinov 2017). The organization has also utilized similar approaches to the standardized quality management system to ensure that the path of the pipeline touches all of the important mining and agriculture companies who are in dire need of the fuel which will be transported through the pipeline. By utilising proper quality management techniques, the organization can increase the quality of the project.

Risk management is an important process that increases a project team's ability to thoroughly assess, monitor, and combat any obstruction that rears its head during the project execution. The organization has taken up a thorough analysis of the factors that may influence the project and has come up with defined risks that may obstruct the project execution process. The main risks identified in the case study are the risk of harming the environment and inconveniencing the commuters' and dwellers' lives. Through the utilization of efficient risk management techniques, the organization must find out ways to combat these risks. The company is evaluating the idea of implementing bicycle lanes to decrease the impact of the project on commuters. In this case, transport for New South Wales has taken up a thorough investigation to ensure that the pipeline construction is done smoothly and securely. The company has identified that the construction project can obstruct the daily lives of communities dwellers and the local environment of NSW and has engaged in creating solutions.

Procurement management is the last integral part of QRP management planning. It involves establishing an efficient supply network through collaboration with supplier companies which facilitate the requirement of relevant services and materials. The organization, by being a governmental organisation, can be dependent on other governmental organizations to make sure that the procurement process is smooth. The organization must also engage in negotiation with local supplier companies and establish agreements with them if needed. The procurement management processes will help the company save time and money while constructing the pipeline corridor from New Castle to Orana. Procurement management helps organisations enforce strategic planning, maximise cost efficiency, and increase the reliability of the supply network. Transport for New South Wales has partnered with reputed supply companies to make sure that the project is executed properly. The governmental organization has implemented proper procurement management techniques and approaches to avail proper access to the construction materials, machinery, and services needed for the pipeline's construction.

Application of CMMI Model

The CMMI model is also known as the Capability Maturity Model Integration (Keshta 2019). is responsible for providing a structure for the incorporation of procedure enhancement in various process areas. The CMMI model effectively provides organisations with stability in operations, cost-efficiency, enhancement of company procedures, and satisfying the requirements asked of them. The main purpose of CMMI is to enhance organisational operation (Khraiwesh 2020). The organisation has taken up the CMMI model to attain these benefits and to mitigate the risks related to the project development. The organisation has utilized the CMMI appraisal process to ensure that it knows of certain information and factors that can help the construction of the pipeline corridor. The appraisal procedure takes a look at the major elements of the company's operation. Developing a service or goods, acquiring relevant facilities and goods, along initiation of relevant facility management are these elements. The company has utilized these elements to plan out the management process of the pipeline construction project. The organisation can make use of certain elements that are important to the CMMI model, such as enhancing productivity and improving procedures that are core to the project development process. The CMMI model enforces the use of five maturity levels (Hamzah et al. 2018). The utilisation of these maturity levels and the capability levels established by the CMMI will benefit the company heavily to achieve the benefits that are discussed before.

Conclusion

The organisation has taken up a major construction process to develop a fuel pipeline corridor that connects Orana with Newcastle port. The report tries to evaluate the management processes adopted by the organisation in this regard. The company can ensure that the project development process is fluent and efficient regarding cost and time by utilising QRP management methods. The company must manage the quality of the project as the pipeline will be a crucial delivery network of fuels through the entire Hunter Valley. The impact of adopting QRP management methods is described. A proper QRP plan by utilising the elements of the CMMI framework is also discussed.

References

Franco, S, Caroli, MG, Cappa, F & Del Chiappa, G 2020, ‘Are you good enough? CSR, quality management and corporate financial performance in the hospitality industry’, International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol. 88, p. 102395, doi: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijhm.2019.102395
Hamzah, MHI, Baharom, F, Mohd, H & Omar, MH 2018, ‘A construction of service-oriented architecture adoption maturity levels using adoption of innovation concept and CMMI’, Journal of Telecommunication, Electronic and Computer Engineering, vol. 10, no. 2-4, pp. 23-27, viewed 14 December 2021, <http://repo.uum.edu.my/25515/1/JTEC%2010%202-4%202018%2023%2027.pdf>.
Keshta, I 2019, ‘A model for defining project lifecycle phases: Implementation of CMMI level 2 specific practice’, Journal of King Saud University-Computer and Information Sciences, doi: https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jksuci.2019.10.013
Khanal, R 2020, ‘An Investigation of the Effectiveness of Flipped classroom teaching in project management course: A case study of Australian Higher Education’, PUPIL: International Journal of Teaching, Education and Learning, vol. 4, no. 2, pp. 348-368, viewed 14 December 2021, <https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/59f4/5d89acd20dcfc7d075cdd41d36ee619a7afa.pdf>.
Khraiwesh, M 2020, ‘Measures of Organizational Training in the Capability Maturity Model Integration (CMMI®)’, International Journal of Advanced Computer Science and Applications, vol. 11, no. 2, pp. 584-592, viewed 14 December 2021, <https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/3791/b2cdb3b0e90ab7960aa268d4512b32bfd4b3.pdf>.
Rotich, JC, Keitany, P & Sang, HW 2021, ‘Code of conduct and procurement management in selected public secondary schools: evidence in Kenya’, viewed 14 December 2021, <http://ir-library.kabianga.ac.ke/bitstream/handle/123456789/237/Joyce%20Cheruto%20Rotich.pdf?sequence=1&isAllowed=y>.
Shad, MK, Lai, FW, Fatt, CL, Klemeš, JJ & Bokhari, A 2019, ‘Integrating sustainability reporting into enterprise risk management and its relationship with business performance: A conceptual framework’, Journal of Cleaner Production, vol. 208, pp. 415-425, viewed 14 December 2021, <https://www.academia.edu/download/58763885/JOCP_2018_ISI__Q1_IF_5.65_Paper_Online.pdf>.
Transport for NSW (2018), Hunter Orana fuel pipeline, viewed 14 December 2021, <https://www.transport.nsw.gov.au/projects/current-projects/hunter-orana-fuel-pipeline>.
Vassilev, V & Velinov, E 2017, ‘Monitoring and evaluation of quality in rail transport services: An element of quality management’, Serbian Journal of Engineering Management, vol. 2, no. 1, pp. 1-7, viewed 14 December 2021, https://scindeks-clanci.ceon.rs/data/pdf/2466-4693/2017/2466-46931701001V.pdf

MBA621 Healthcare Systems Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Length:2000 words (+/- 10% allowable range)
Weighting: 40%
Total Marks: 100
Submission: Online
Due Date: Week 13

Your Task

Develop a 2000-word report outlining findings and recommendations for further action, built upon an ongoing analysis of the health service you examined in Assessment 2.

Assessment Description.

The purpose of this individual assessment is to foster students’ capacity to utilize a systems-thinking approach further to develop an understanding of the Australian healthcare system and its ability to provide care and prevent illness. Students will use data to predict the role and influence of preventative strategies and technology on demand for healthcare in the future, focusing on vulnerable populations. They will debate the ethical issues that can arise in managing health care systems and actively consider ways for systems and management challenges to be resolved. In addition, they will create an inventory of resource requirements applicable to a variety of healthcare settings, focusing on vulnerable populations.

Assessment Instructions

For assignment help students requires to build on the analysis undertaken in Assessment 2, where a specialist health service’s preparedness to meet the needs of Australia’s ageing population was considered.

The analysis, to date, has used systems thinking approach and has been based on the WHO six building blocks of a health system framework.

1) Service Delivery.
2) Health Workforce.
3) Information.
4) Medical Products, Vaccines and Technologies.
5) Financing.
6) Leadership and Governance (Stewardship).

In this assessment, students should provide a concise overview of the service and the main findings from Assessment 2. Then, through their research and analysis (systems thinking), focus on identifying how quality services and responsiveness to the needs of an ageing Australian population are maintained and enhanced by the service and its service providers.

To achieve the assessment requirements, the report should be constructed accordingly:

1) Executive summary.

2) Concise overview of the service and the main findings from Assessment 1.

3) Examination of how quality service provision is maintained and enhanced by the service.

4) Examination of responsiveness to the needs of an ageing Australian population and how it may be enhanced by the service.

5) Examination of ethical issues and considerations related to service delivery decisions and vulnerable populations.

6) Recommendations for future action.

7) References - A minimum of 15 references, at least 8 of these should be academic journals. Harvard referencing method applies.

To explore the full breadth of maintaining and enhancing quality service provision, students should consider the interconnectedness between the health service and the broader system of the National Safety and Quality Health Service (NSQHS) Standards, the National Registration and Accreditation Scheme (NRAS) for health practitioners maintained by the Australian Health Practitioner Regulation Authority (AHPRA) and other professionals who self-regulate under the banner of the National Alliance of Self Regulating Health Professions (NASRHP).

To provide a context for discussion, students should utilize appropriate standards to assist them in providing substantial examples of how quality services and responsiveness to the needs of an ageing Australian population are maintained and enhanced by the service and its service providers. For example, (this is not an exhaustive list):

• NSQHS: Clinical Governance Standard, Action 1.8, 1.9, 1.10, 1.15.

• NSQHS: Partnering with Consumers Standard, Action 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6.

• AHPRA: Continuing Professional Development.

• AHPRA: Regency of Practice.

• SA Health: Allied Health Clinical Governance Framework.

Assessment Submission

This file must be submitted as a ‘Word’ document to avoid any technical issues that may occur from incorrect file format upload. Uploaded files with a virus will not be considered as a legitimate submission.

MyKBS will notify you if there is an issue with the submitted file. In this case, you must contact your MyKBS error message. You are also encouraged to submit your work well before the deadline to avoid any possible delay involving the Turnitin similarity report or any other technical difficulties.

Late assignment submission penalties

Penalties will be imposed on late assignment submissions in accordance with Kaplan Business School
“late assignment submission penalties” policy.

Solution

OVERVIEW OF WOMEN AND CHILDREN HOSPITAL AND IT SERVICES

The Women's and Children's Hospital is established in north Adelaide region in South Australia. The cited hospital is considered as most popular hospitals in the South Australia as it provides services relating to inpatient and outpatient care along with emergency services. Moreover, special care services for the children in the state are also provided (Cronin, Hungerford and Wilson, 2021). It is largest maternity and obstetric service Centre in the state. Even secondary care health services are provided to the patients, further Breast screening service health department are also available in the hospital. The hospital complies with national digital health strategy which does have specified motives:

• To exchange health information in secured manner

• Better availability and access to prescriptions and health care services (Guoguang and Sawan 2021).

• Enhance model of care i.e. working digitally enabled models of care so that parameters of service could be increase i.e. accessibility, safety and efficiency.

• Thriving digital health industry to deliver world class innovation.

Health service relating to assessment of woman’s breasts for cancer prior to visibility of signs or symptoms of the disease is referred as Breast cancer screening services. It is necessary for all women to be informed by their health care provider in context with availability of best screening options for them. As far as I have assessed I have learned that incorporation of AI in health industry for breast screening would not only assist in early detection of diseases, appropriate treatment, decision making, diagnosis with the use of (AI)–based tool for two-dimensional mammography (Hambleton, 2018). I also assessed the significance of clinical decision support system which does assist in decision making at point of care. During assessment I learned that through data mining one could examine medical history appropriately and it can be assessed through demonstration of clinical investigation that through continuous use of same demonstrated that the concurrent use of this AI tool or technique it is possible to improve the diagnostic performance of radiologists in the recognition of breast cancer symptom or disease without prolonging their workflow.

Figure 1 Mind-map of Artificial Intelligence and technology role in Breast screening

ASSESSMENT OF MANNER IN WHICH QUALITY SERVICE PROVISION IS DEALING WITH CHALLENGES AND ACCELERATED BY WOMEN’S AND CHILDREN HOSPITAL

The fact cannot be denied that pre-covid investment in sector was growing steadily but after covid, investment in sector declined with high pace and similar phase continued in short to medium term, thus financial obstacles are faced in respect with implementation of different projects relating to breast screening services (Hansen et al, 2019). It has been assessed that there does exist casual bond between patients of South Australia and breast screening service in secondary care. However, the main challenge which is being faced is that aboriginal people are not aware about availability of health services relating to breast screening as patient does not have knowledge relating to cited disease. In simple words obstacles relating to breast screening services are increased and boundaries and interconnectedness i.e. people are not getting education or knowledge required in context with availability of medical care relating to health care services. It is one of the main reason due to which patients does not trust on the services available in state (Alwashmi, 2020). Further, free health care services are provided by Women's and Children's Hospital relating to breast screening services for urban people who does have Medicare. It is bitter truth that hospital does provide services effectively but they do not succeed in maintaining coordination similarly. Thus, it is required to be improved. Even the information relating to disease and medical care services in respect to breast cancer are not provided required information in majority health care services providing Centre’s. In this aspect, Women's and Children's Hospital has to deal with variety of challenges which does includes significant capital resources which are constrained due to covid-19 (Lupton, 2017).

Complexity of Breast screening health service in another constraint of multinational nature of digital health service industry. In general elderly or ageing population does face issues in understanding access to Breast screening services. Further, ethical challenges are also faced by company which includes privacy, protection ad consent and ethical services relating to Breast screening. But as ageing population does not have adequate knowledge of Breast screening services, moreover, security and privacy concern are also needed to be addressed in order to regain trust of ageing population (Adjekum, Blasimme and Vayena, 2018).

Thus, in order to regain their trust, NRAS i.e. national registration and accreditation scheme maintained through the Australian Health Practitioner Regulation Authority (AHPRA) as well as other experts who self-govern beneath the banner of National Alliance of Self Regulating Health Professions (NASRHP) should make initiative for rising awareness relating to Breast screening so that it could enjoy benefits too. The reason behind the same is that, it ensures that the health professionals are registered under the consistent, professional standards and high and would promote digital health services (Makeham, 2020). Lastly, Women's and Children's Hospital has acknowledged itself against National Quality and Safety Standard, which assure effective, high quality, and safety of patients. Moreover, it does highlights current and planned activities in order to ascertain role gaps and complies with standards provided in AHPRA and National Registration and Accreditation Scheme.

ASSESSMENT OF RESPONSIVENESS TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF BREAST SCREENING SERVICES AND HOW IT IS ACCELERATED THROUGH THE SERVICE

The fact cannot be denied that technology has evolved rapidly in health care and it has surely provided improved outcomes for patients (Ranpara, 2018). Women's and Children's Hospitalhave played significant role in empowering Breast screening services and system through emphasizing of evolvement of innovation and clinical quality and safety. The organization has made adequate efforts to indulge technology in health care sector through complying with below cited strategy efficiently. The National Digital Health Strategy followed by Australian Digital Health Agency emphasizes on following variants:

• Improving care coordination and fewer preventable hospitalization.

• enhancing quality of self-care

• mitigating duplication and operating cost (Schofield, Shaw and Pascoe, 2019)

• Working on future themes of digital health care.

• Enhancing models of care

The people who are availing breast screening services in the Women's and Children's Hospital are also provided free medical products in case Medicare provided in context with aged women. Even facility of free medicines is provided to patient which does avail normal check-up services. Further, services relating free vaccines specific category selected category ageing population is available with assistance of government and health care department in case it is being done through the hospital. Even latest technologies are available in hospital for providing advance services to patients. The services are based on old system as well new system; so that best quality could be provided by hospital and innovated techniques could be promoted. Even organization has made adequate pioneering activities between consumers, government, researches for assessing evidence based digital empowerment of key health priorities and collecting technical obstacles which include supporting Health Care Home trials and integrated management of chronic (Bennett et al, 2021). Even it emphasizes on improvement in digital services for advance care planning. From above assessment it can be analysed that company is responsive towards the requirement of incorporation of artificial intelligence in health care, however it requirement to make adequate initiatives for incorporating key drivers in technology transforming health care i.e. affordable technology, social media, acceptance of sharing data and connecting technology for meeting demands of consumer

ASSESSMENT OF ETHICAL ISSUES AND CONSIDERATION LINKED WITH RESPECT TO BREAST SCREENING SERVICES DECISIONS RELATING TO ACCEPTANCE OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE IN CONTEXT WITH CLINICAL DECISION SUPPORT

Ethics can be referred as code of moral values and principles which govern the behaviour of persons or groups with respect to access what is right and what is wrong. In context with health ethics, one has to ensure ethical conduct of health research, ethical implication of genetic cloning technology and critically assessing discrepancies in health status between population and ethical obligation which ensure that equitable access in health services as well as ethical implication of genetic cloning technology (McBride et al, 2019). The main ethical issues which are relating to acceptance of breast screening in context with clinical decision support is as follows:

Ethical implication relating to autonomy and complexity in application of e-services: Autonomy can be specified as right of individual to retaining control over his body. As even though the patient does not take best decision it does have right to make his or her decision in best interest. As a valid procedure does require voluntariness, disclosure, understanding and capacity (Butler et al, 2020). However, artificial intelligence cannot be incorporated adequately until same is accepted by the patients for diagnosis of Breast screening. For instance, as design research approaches does require participants engaging with specific artefact which can be applied for challenging standard way of thinking and provoking new ideas. Even assessing the extent to which clinicians do have responsibility for educating patients around complexities of Artificial Intelligence is another challenge as informed consent is required for deploying clinical artificial intelligence space.

Egoism and Utilitarianism issues in respect of ageing population as they are not happy or satisfied with available practices: Egoism equates morality with self-interest and utilitarianism suggest that decision is believed to be morally correct in case it eventually result in happens in comparison to unhappiness for those who are related to the decision. As in order to gain advantage of breast screen services it is necessary that people should be aware about negative implication of disease and availability of medical services in respect of same to attain its full advantage. Incorporation of artificial intelligence and technology does require variety of data input as well as machine learning techniques which are difficult for clinicians for understanding (Tapia et al, 2017). Further another issue attached with same is that clinical is not able to interpret the diagnosis completely and due to which ageing population fears due to and it result in alert emergency dispatchers or cardiac arrest than same does result in different issues. It is the main ethical issues which does restrict health care providers to provide acceptance to involvement of artificial intelligence in respect of breast screening services unless they are aware about same in detail manner.

Adequateness of non-maleficence theory or approach: It relates to expectation that health care provides will implicate actions which would inflict least harm possible for attainment of beneficial outcome (Youlden et al, 2020). It can be connected with Hippocratic oath. It is also connected with non-consequential theories which emphasis on moral obligation and duties rather than consequences. In case of implementation of AI for breast screening services in health care, ethical issues are to be deal relating to threat of privacy and confidentiality, informed consent and patient autonomy in order to attain acceptance or approval in clinical decision. For instance, in case of Australian Digital Health Agency for adopting new AI tool and software, ethics issue relating to of privatization in context with implementation of new artificial intelligence application or technique would eventually have to face privatization ethical issues before attainment of final approval (Ghanouni et al, 2020).

CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION FOR FUTURE ACTION

The main goals of Women and Children Hospital is to be more personal, preventive, predictive and participatory, and artificial intelligence can make major contributions for attaining same. The application of artificial intelligence could use corresponding robotic system for improving existing breast screen services. An overview of smart home function and tools does offer appropriate solution to people with loss of autonomy with assistance of intelligent solution based models would be beneficial for breast screening services as a variety of advantages can be gained with indulgent of technology in health care service.

Further the hospital requires to incorporate standard and framework such as NSQHS (Clinical Governance Standard), (Partnering with consumer standard), AHPRA, National Registration and Accreditation Scheme should also incorporate the subject of Artificial Intelligence acceptance for health services to enhanced extent. Further, the National Digital Health Strategy to be delivered in 2022 of Australian Digital Health Agency is emphasizing on better availability and access to health services along with enhancement of models of care which drive improved accessibility, safety and efficiency. Thus it should incorporate research on artificial intelligence techniques for health services and promotion of breast screening services by complying with standards of AHPRA, National Registration and Accreditation Scheme, NSQHS etc. so that positive decision could be taken for its acceptance or adoption.
 

REFERENCES

Adjekum, A, Blasimme, A & Vayena, E, 2018. Elements of trust in digital health systems: scoping review. Journal of medical Internet research, 20(12), p. e11254. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0166497220300912

Alwashmi, M F, 2020. The use of digital health in the detection and management of COVID-19. International journal of environmental research and public health, 17(8), p.2906. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2405844021007428

Bennett, I, Tourani, S, Cockburn, L, Reasbeck, J, Grobbelaar, N, Dann, S, Patrikios, P and Brazier, J., 2021. Breast cancer screening in women at high risk of hereditary breast cancer: An Australian experience. ANZ Journal of Surgery, 91(4), pp.685-690. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1111/16320

Butler, T L, Anderson, K, Condon, J R., Garvey, G, Brotherton, JM., Cunningham, J, Tong A, Moore S P, Maher C M, Mein, JK and Warren E F, 2020. Indigenous Australian women's experiences of participation in cervical screening. PloS one, 15(6), p. e0234536. https://journals.plos.org/plosone/article?id=10.1371/journal.pone.0234536

Cronin C, Hungerford C & Wilson R L, 2021. Using Digital Healh Technologies to Manage the Psychosocial Symptoms of Menopause in the Workplace: A Narrative Literature Review. Issues in mental health nursing, 42(6), pp.541-548.

Ghanouni, A, Sanderson, SC, Pashayan, N Renzi, C, Von Wagner, C and Waller J, 2020. Attitudes towards risk-stratified breast cancer screening among women in England: A cross-sectional survey. Journal of medical screening, 27(3), pp.138-145. https://www.mdpi.com/2075-4426/11/2/95

Guoguang R., & Sawan M., 2021. (Online). Available through <https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2095809919301535>. [Accessed on 13th October 2021]
Hambleton, S, 2018. A glimpse of 21st century care. Australian journal of general practice, 47(10), pp.670-673.

Hansen D P, Dinger M E, Hofmann O, Thorne N & Boughtwood T F 2019. Preparing Australia for genomic medicine: data, computing and digital health. Medical Journal of Australia, 210, pp.S30-S32. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0002929719302289

Lupton, D, 2017. Digital health: Critical and cross-disciplinary perspectives. Routledge.

Makeham, M., 2020. Role of digital technology in delivering ‘healthy futures’ and ‘healthy cities’. Internal Medicine Journal, 50(11), pp.1408-1409. https://researchers.mq.edu.au/en/publications/role-of-digital-technology-in-delivering-healthy-futures-and-heal

McBride K A, Fleming C A, George E S, Steiner G Z & MacMillan F, 2019. Double Discourse: Qualitative Perspectives on Breast Screening Participation among Obese Women and Their Health Care Providers. International journal of environmental research and public health, 16(4), p.534. https://researchers.mq.edu.au/en/publications/role-of-digital-technology-in-delivering-healthy-futures-and-heal

Ranpara, M 2018. Books: Look it up! What Patients, Doctors, Nurses, and Pharmacists Need to Know About the Internet and Primary Health Care: Navigating Technology for Health. The British Journal of General Practice, 68(674), p.434. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC6104871/

Schofield, Shaw N & Pascoe M., 2019. Toward comprehensive patient-centric care by integrating digital health technology with direct clinical contact in Australia. Journal of medical Internet research, 21(6), p.e12382. https://www.jmir.org/2019/6/e12382/

Tapia K.A, Garvey G, Mc Entee M., Rickard M & Brennan P, 2017. Breast cancer in Australian Indigenous women: incidence, mortality, and risk factors. Asian Pacific journal of cancer prevention: APJCP, 18(4), p.873. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/28545182/

Youlden D R, Baade, P D, Walker, R, Pyke, C M, Roder, D M & Aitken, J F, 2020. Breast cancer incidence and survival among young females in Queensland, Australia. Journal of adolescent and young adult oncology, 9(3), pp.402-409. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/31765264/

MGT501 Business Environment Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Assessment - Internal and External Stakeholder Analysis
Individual/Group - Individual
Length - 2,500 words
Learning Outcomes

This assessment addresses the following Subject Learning Outcomes:

a) Analyze and synthesize the fundamentals of business in the contemporary environment.

b) Construct and Justify a professional value proposition as a business practitioner

Submission - 12 Week Delivery: By 11:59pm AEST/AEDT Friday of

Module - 5.2 (week 10)
Intensive Class: Due by 11:59pm AEST/AEDT Friday of
Module 5 (week 5)
Weighting 50%
Total Marks 50 marks

Context:

Business stakeholder analysis is a technique for identifying stakeholders and analyzing their roles. The aim of the analysis is to map out the stakeholders’ level of influence and degree of interest with regards to the business. Stakeholder analysis can also be used to assess the relationships between different stakeholders and the issues they care about most.

Internal stakeholders are individuals or groups who are directly involved in the business, such as owners, board members, managers, employees, and investors. External stakeholders are indirectly influenced by the business activities, like customers, suppliers, competitors, society and government.

By understanding both perspectives, the business can engage and enhance communication with relevant stakeholders, reduce or prevent risks, identify business opportunities, improve internal stakeholders’ commitment in the business and the reputation of the business amongst external stakeholders.

Instructions:

In this assessment, you will examine a business organization in an industry that you have either previously worked or would like to work in the future. Leading up to the assessment submission, you MUST participate in the Assessment 2 weekly discussions in the Discussion Forums on Blackboard. You will locate this discussion forum in the Assessment Area of blackboard. Weekly discussion and contributions are based on Modules 2-4.

Note for assignment help Assessment 2 Discussion Forum:

• The business organization and its functionalities selected for the Discussion Forum MUST be the same with Assessment 2 write-up and submission.

• You MUST make some references to subject contents, including other readings.

• You are ENCOURAGED to employ minimum of 3 reference sources for each topic, two (2) academic (textbooks & peer-reviewed journal articles) and one (1) other sources (newspaper article, business/trade publication, or substantiated website).

• You are REQUIRED to extract and enclose each topic’s responses (e.g., your responses, and critique of your peer’s responses) of your ‘Assessment 2 Discussion Forum’ as appendix in your final Assessment 2 document.

Presenting a business example and contributing to the discussion forum, you will:

• identify and analyze functional areas in the business
• identify and analyze the internal and external stakeholders
• compare two industries with each other
• create a stakeholder matrix
• discuss chosen stakeholders and industries in the context of relevant theories and frameworks

Suggested format for Assessment 2

Your individual stakeholder analysis should follow standard report structure and include the following:

Executive Summary

o A concise summary of the main report in bullet points
• Introduction and background information on your business example
• Main body
o Identify functional areas
o Identify internal and external stakeholders and their roles
o Identify the nature and degree of main stakeholders’ interests, and implications of
conflicting interests
o Identify the level of main stakeholders’ influence
o Create a stakeholder matrix
o in the discussion forum, choose an example from your peers and compare the industry your business operates in with their industry, identify the main points of stakeholder dissimilarities and analyze the differences in stakeholder interests and influences

• Conclusion
• References
• Appendices

Support your observations and statements by incorporating links to theory and conceptual frameworks. Please ensure your sources are referenced clearly in the APA 6th style both in-text and in the reference list.

Referencing:

• You are REQUIRED to employ minimum of 15 reference sources, ten (10) academic (textbooks & peer- reviewed journal articles) and five (5) other sources (newspaper articles, business/trade publications, and substantiated websites). References to ‘Wikipedia’ or similar unsubstantiated sources are not acceptable.

• You are REQUIRED to use the correct APA referencing style for both in-text citations and reference listing. Please see more information on referencing here: http://library.laureate.net.au/research_skills/referencing

Submission Instructions:

Submit your management Assessment 2 Internal and External Stakeholder Analysis in the submission link in the main navigation menu in MGT501 Business Environment by the end of Module 5.2 (week 10).

Intensive Class: Due by the end of Module 5 (week 5)

Solution

Introduction:

Flight Centre Travel Group is a selected company in the Tourism and Travel Industry in Australia. Flight Centre Travel Group (FLT) is a renowned Australian Travel Agency. The Company founded in 1982 and the headquarters of the company is located in Brisbane Region, Australia. The FLT Group is one of the largest travel retailers across the world. The Group is also known as the largest corporate travel managers across the world. The Group has owned corporate and leisure travel business across 23 countries including New Zealand, Australia, Europe, The Americas, South Africa, The United Kingdom, Asia and The UAE (About Us - Flight Centre Travel Group. 2021). Due to the outbreak of the Covid-19 and restriction on travel and tourism, the company faced a loss of $662.1 Million and it also decreases the revenue of the company from $3055.3 Million in 2019 to $1898.1 Million in 2020 (FLT-2020-Annual-Report 2020). The Company employed 10615 total employees across all location the company operated their business (Our Story So Far - Flight Centre Travel Group. 2021). The assessment identified the functional areas, internal stakeholders and external stakeholders of the Company. It also discussed the interest and level of influence of each stakeholder on business.

Identification of Functional Areas of Flight Centre Company:

Following are the main functional areas of the company:

Sales and Marketing Department: The Sales and Marketing Department of the Company is responsible for promoting the services of the Company through using different Marketing Media like Social media platform, TV Ads, Newspaper and Magazine Ads. The Sales and Marketing department is especially responsible for developing and researching the marketing opportunities.

Human Resources Department: The main responsibility of the HRM Department is recruiting, organizing and utilizing the company’s workforce for ensuring better performance, and implementing the reward system for the employees (About Us - Flight Centre Travel Group. 2021). They are also responsible for maintaining the corporate social responsibility of the company. They are also responsible for delivering positive egalitarianism and diversity practices among the FCTG employees (Corporate Social Responsibility - Flight Centre Travel Group. 2021).

Finance Department:

This department of the company is responsible for acquiring the required funds for the company. Moreover, the department is responsible for managing the funds, expenditures, profit and losses within the organization.
Transportation department: The department is responsible for reservation and management of transport tickets, managing Airline ticketing and reservation, car rental and hiring services, managing rail passes and journey, offering deals and discounts, assisting customers, offering travel insurance etc.

Tourism and Entertainment Department: This department is also responsible for planning tour packaging and consulting with the sales department for pricing and costing of the packages, providing travel guide, managing events, holiday packages, offering discounts on leisure activities and travelling activities, etc.

Accommodation Sector: The department is responsible for accommodating hotel, entertainment services, accommodating cruise services, managing the cruise service and packages, managing standard and quality of the accommodation services etc. (Palgan, Zvolska & Mont, 2017).

Food and Beverage Sector: The department is also responsible for managing food and beverages for their customers in Cruise ships, hotels, offering discounts on food services, managing food packages, maintaining high standard and quality of the food and beverage services, etc.

Identification of Internal and External Stakeholders and their Roles:

Political Forces: The FCT Group operated their business in several countries. Australia and UAE is a politically stable country. However, UK, America is a politically unstable country. Political instability and stability create an effect on the business operation and rate of intervention by the Government (restriction and rules, tax rate and trade policies) in the business (Bello & Kamanga, 2020). These can create an effect on the business and its operations. It can increase the cost of the business operations.

Economic Forces: Interest rate, exchange rate, disposable income of customers and GDP and inflation rate can create an impact on the demand of services offered by the company. The proper investment decision, marketing and sales planning and promotional decision of the owners and recommendation by the managers of the company are essential to handle the economic investment of the company in the target market. The proper fund investment by the investors helps in the growth of the business (Investors - Flight Centre Travel Group. 2021).

Social Forces: The high and middle incoming capability of consumers and rich, healthy and wealthy lifestyle can increase demand for tourism and travel services. However, poor incoming capability, high cultural barriers, poor lifestyle of consumers etc. can reduce the demand for tourism and travel services (Kvasnová, Gajdošík & Maráková, 2019). Moreover, the effective presence of potential competitors and high consumers’ demands towards the services of the competitors can hamper the business operation in the market.

Technological Forces: Poor technological knowledge among the workforce of the country can damage the success of the business. However, high technical knowledge of the workforce of the country can increase the productivity of the company in the market. Moreover, the high technological circumstance of the competitors of the company can increase the competitive pressure on the business.

Environmental Force: Poor environmental rules and regulations maintained by the company and its suppliers can hamper the business operation in the target market. The negative environmental impacts on the local community due to poor business operation can reduce the business profitability factor in the market. The company maintains proper environmental regulations to enhance the positive image of the local community and it can reduce the environmental threats on the business.

Legal Forces: Positive involvement of the Union of the company can manage the company to satisfy the legal needs (employee protection law, customer right law, and health and safety law for employees). An unethical relationship between the suppliers and the company can damage the quality of the services supplied by the suppliers towards the company.

Based on the overall analysis, the internal stakeholders of the company are employees, investors and owners, managers, Union of the FCT Group.

The main role of the employees is to provide proper customer care services to the consumers of the Company.
The role of the managers is to build proper investment planning, marketing and sale planning and promotional planning for the company to cope up with the market condition in the different international market.

The role of the Investors and owners is to provide the necessary capital for running the business in the global market. Owners are responsible for making decisions about the activity of the business.

The role of the Union is to improve the working conditions for employees within the organization.

Based on the overall analysis, external stakeholders of the company are customers, Government, suppliers, local community and competitors.

Customers are always focusing on maximizes the value of their investment by receiving a high quality of services and safety while travelling.

The role of the government is to build proper rules and regulations related to the tourism, health and safety of the tourists and employees, and customer’s rights to improve the quality of the services offered by the tourism sectors (Rasoolimanesh et al., 2020).

The role of the suppliers is to supplying the appropriate high-quality services to the company like high-quality accommodation services, food and beverage services, and transporting services and other entertaining services.

The role of the local community is to support the business activity by utilizing the travel and tourism services. They can also protest if the business activity hampers them negatively.

Competitors are rivals of the company who increases the competitive pressure on the company to improve the quality and services of the company.

Identify the nature and degree of the interest of the main stakeholders:

Employees:

Employees are the foremost asset of the company. According to the theory of Hierarchy of needs theory by Maslow, the behavior of the employees depends on the level of the fulfilment of the needs as per their requirements (Hale et al., 2019). According to the expectancy theory by Vroom, if the services and rewards offered by the company fulfil the needs of the employees, then it increases the quality of the services (Chow & Leiringer, 2020). On the other hand, if FCT Group failed to meet the above-identified needs of the employees as per their requirements, then it affects the quality of the services offered by the employees.

Investors and owners:

Investors are investing their money to provide the necessary capital to the company for the continuation of the business (Yeh, 2018). The amount of the return of the investment is the main key interest of the investors and owners to make a profit from their investment. The low amount of return on investment can increase conflict between business and investors and owners.

Managers:

The main interest of the managers is in developing the appropriate investment decision to attract more investors to gather more funds for running the travel and tourism business in the international market (Yusof, Awang, Jusoff & Ibrahim, 2017). Poor investment decisions can create a conflict of interest between the investors and managers.

Union:

The main interest of the Union is to enhance the facilities and services offered by the company to employees. If the FCT Group failed to meet the expectation, then it can create the issue of conflict of interest between them.

Customers:

Customers are also the most influential stakeholders for the FCT Group. The main interest of the customers is to maximize the value of the invested money by getting high-quality travel and tourism services from the company (Tuan, Rajendran, Rowley, & Khai, 2019). The poor quality of the offered services can create a conflict of interest between the company and customers.

Government:

The main interest of the Government is to improve the quality and safety of tourism and travel activities. Illegal business transaction, poor environmental capacity and poor customer service activity can create a conflict of interest between the government and the company.

Competitors:

The main interest of the competitors is to build a marketing plan to capture the market share of the rival and also reinforce customer loyalty to build competitive pressure on other companies. Either, it can create the issue of price war and conflict of interest between competitors and FCT Group.

Suppliers:

The main interest of the suppliers is getting a proper financial return and other facilities from the FCT group after supplying their quality services to the tourists of the company (Suppliers - Flight Centre Travel Group. 2021). If the nature of the work performed by the supplier not satisfied according to the expectation of the company or the supplier starts the unfair competitive activity with the company, then it can create a conflict of interest between FCT Group and Suppliers.

Local Community:

The main interest of the surrounded local community is, the FCT Group should meet the needs and requirements of the community. The company should maintain the proper corporate social responsibility to meet the needs of the community (Gurran, 2018). If the company failed to meet the expectation, then it can create a conflict of interest among them.

Identification of the level of the influence of the main stakeholders of the company:

Employees: The level of influence is high. However, the employees have limited influence on making a decision for the business. However, employees can hamper the business activity if the FCT Group is failed to fulfil the needs and requirements of the employees in the workplace (Sari, Bendesa, & Antara, 2019). If the company provide proper facility to the employees (rewards, compensation, dignity, respect, health and safety precautions), then it helps the company to maintain the high quality of the customer services.

Investors and owners: The level of influence of the investors and owners is high because they influence the business objectives (Yeh, 2018). Investors and owners provide proper funds to help the business to grow their business operations in the market.

Managers: The level of influence is high because managers make a business decision and investing plans about the business activities to grow their business in the market ((Jaoua, 2018)). The proper planning and investment help the business to become a leading tourism company in the global market.

Union: The level of the Union’s influence is high because if the company failed to meet the needs and expectations of the Union, then it can also influence the employees’ behavior and customers’ behavior.

Customers: The level of the influence of the consumer is high to retain the business activity in the market. The behavior of the consumers towards the FCT Group can help the company to decide the standard and quality of the services. When the company understand the consumers’ needs and requirements, then the organization can easily improve the level of their services.

Government: The level of the influence of the Government is moderate while operating the business in the market. The rules and regulations passed by the government, tax rates, exchange rate and restriction on the travel and tourism activity can hamper the business operation in the market. However, a business-friendly environment can help the company to grow their business easily.

Competitors: The level of the influence is high because the pressure of the competitors influences the FCT Group to enhance their marketing and sales planning, pricing strategy and quality of the services offered towards the customers for the continuation of the business in the competitive market.

Suppliers: The level of influence of the suppliers is high. If the suppliers of accommodation services, airline, rail, car facilities and suppliers of food and beverages maintain the reliability of the deliveries and high standard of the products then it enhances the customer service facility offered by the company (Soukhathammavong & Park, 2019). However, if suppliers make any changes in the quality of the services, then it can hamper the quality of customer service offered by the FCT group.

Local Community: The level of influence is high. If the activities of the FCT group affect the local community negatively then they may protest against the company through the local council. They can also influence the business by utilizing their services.

Stakeholder matrix:

Fig 1: Stakeholder Matrix for Tourism Industry
Source: (Created by Author)
 

Comparison with other industry:

In comparison to the retail industry, the main external stakeholders of the retail industry are customers, Suppliers, Government and competitors, community. The internal stakeholders are Owners, investors, employees, landlords, managers.

Difference:

The retail industry operates its outlets in different locations and the company operates the outlets by the small numbers of employees per outlets. The power of the Union is not strong as the travel and tourism industry, so here landlords of the area where the outlet of the retail company situated are one of the main important stakeholders according to the political, economic and legal factors and its impact on the business.

Fig 2: Stakeholder Matrix for Retail Industry
Source: (Created by Author)

Interest and influence of stakeholders:

Customers: The main interest of the customers is to get high quality, standard, healthy and hygienic products by investing their money in purchasing the product. Customers are also greatly influence the market of the company.

Suppliers: The main interest of the suppliers is to get proper financial support and return after supplying the goods. The poor working condition of the supply chain and the unethical activities by the supplier who is responsible for supplying the particular product can negatively influence the business. It can reduce the sale of the products offered by the particular suppliers.

Government: The main interest of the government is to create pressure on the retail company to meet the environmental regulations, to reduce their carbon footprint, disposal of waste and water footprint to protect the environment. The Government highly influence the business of the retail company by imposing several legal rules and restriction on supplying of some products, tax rate, exchange and trade policies, transportation rate and policies.

Competitors: The main interest of the competitors is to grab the market share of the company. The Competitors of the retail company influences them to improve the quality of the products and services and also lower the cost of the products in comparison to the competitors.

Community: They are highly interested people. If the company can create a positive impact on the community, then the community can positively influence the retail company by purchasing their products and through a recommendation to others.

Owners: They are highly interested people. They influence the business by deciding the types of products and services offered to target customers and investment planning for the growth of the business.

Investors: The main interest of the investors to get a huge return based on their investment. As the tourism industry, they influence the growth of the business by investing money to expand the business successfully.

Employees: The main interest of the employees is to meet the needs of the retail company based on the return as rewards and proper compensation.

Landlords: The main interest of the landlords is to get a proper financial return based on the investment of their land for building the retail outlet on that land location. They influence the business by giving the land for developing the retail outlet on that location.

Managers: The main interest of the managers in Retail Company is the growth of the business and increase the profit of the business in the global market. The managers influence the business by giving recommendation on the promotional planning, investment planning, products and services of the company, etc.

Conclusion:

It concluded that both internal and external stakeholders of the Company influence the business of the Flight Centre Travel Group in a different way. They are all responsible for handling the impacts of political, economic, social, technological, environmental and legal factors on the business operations. They have the different interest that helps the company to grow up their business in the global market.

References:

About Us - Flight Centre Travel Group. (2021). Retrieved 24 June 2021, from https://www.fctgl.com/about-us/
Akbar, I., Yang, Z., Han, F., & Kanat, G. (2020). The influence of negative political environment on sustainable tourism: A study of aksu-jabagly world heritage site, Kazakhstan. Sustainability, 12(1), 143. https://www.mdpi.com/2071-1050/12/1/143

Asongu, S. A., Uduji, J. I., & Okolo-Obasi, E. N. (2019). Tourism and insecurity in the world. International Review of Economics, 66(4), 453-472. https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s12232-019-00330-z

Bello, F. G., & Kamanga, G. (2020). Drivers and barriers of corporate social responsibility in the tourism industry: The case of Malawi. Development Southern Africa, 37(2), 181-196. https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/0376835X.2018.1555028

Chow, V., & Leiringer, R. (2020). The practice of public engagement on projects: from managing external stakeholders to facilitating active contributors. Project Management Journal, 51(1), 24-37. https://journals.sagepub.com/doi/abs/10.1177/8756972819878346

Corporate Social Responsibility - Flight Centre Travel Group. (2021). Retrieved 25 June 2021, from https://www.fctgl.com/about-us/corporate-social-responsibility/
FLT-2020-Annual-Report (2020). Retrieved 24 June 2021, from https://www.fctgl.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/FLT-2020-Annual-Report.pdf

Gardiner, S., & Dolnicar, S. (2018). Networks becoming one-stop travel shops. Peer-to-Peer Accommodation Networks, 87. https://library.oapen.org/bitstream/handle/20.500.12657/30986/640674.pdf?sequence=1#page=98

Gurran, N. (2018). Global home-sharing, local communities and the Airbnb debate: a planning research agenda. Planning theory & practice, 19(2), 298-304. https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14649357.2017.1383731

Hale, A. J., Ricotta, D. N., Freed, J., Smith, C. C., & Huang, G. C. (2019). Adapting Maslow's hierarchy of needs as a framework for resident wellness. Teaching and learning in medicine, 31(1), 109-118. https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/10401334.2018.1456928

Investors - Flight Centre Travel Group. (2021). Retrieved 24 June 2021, from https://www.fctgl.com/investors/
Jaoua, F. (2018). Impact of strategic roles of middle managers on the relationship between successful strategy implementation and organizational performance. International Journal of Business Performance Management, 19(4), 476-499. https://www.inderscienceonline.com/doi/abs/10.1504/IJBPM.2018.095095

Jones, P., Hillier, D., & Comfort, D. (2017). The sustainable development goals and the tourism and hospitality industry. Athens Journal of Tourism, 4(1), 7-18. https://www.athensjournals.gr/tourism/2017-4-1-1-Jones.pdf

Kvasnová, D., Gajdošík, T., & Maráková, V. (2019). Are partnerships enhancing tourism destination competitiveness? Acta Universitatis Agriculturae et Silviculturae Mendelianae Brunensis, 67(3), 811-821. https://acta.mendelu.cz/pdfs/acu/2019/03/18.pdf

Litheko, A., & Potgieter, M. (2019). Strategic Management of Tourism Stakeholders: Bakgatla-ba-Kgafela, South Africa. African Journal of Hospitality, Tourism and Leisure, 8(2), 1-23. https://www.ajhtl.com/uploads/7/1/6/3/7163688/article_11_vol_8_2__2019.pdf

Oliver, J., & Schoff, P. (2017). Agency and Competition Law in Australia Following ACCC v Flight Centre Travel Group. Journal of European Competition Law & Practice, 8(5), 321-328. https://academic.oup.com/jeclap/article-pdf/doi/10.1093/jeclap/lpx026/17168666/lpx026.pdf?casa_token=kuKtLMJjJhgAAAAA:dzxuN5qNE3pXV8pGL-8vW7pROF0uEEsJ-OihiPgCsYEhnZflFCGHOqkB6jbdhVCx8-TFjVtBs2iVyg

Ooi, N., Duke, E., & O'Leary, J. (2018). Tourism in changing natural environments. Tourism geographies, 20(2), 193-201. https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/14616688.2018.1440418

Our Story So Far - Flight Centre Travel Group. (2021). Retrieved 25 June 2021, from https://www.fctgl.com/our-story-so-far/

Palgan, Y. V., Zvolska, L., & Mont, O. (2017). Sustainability framings of accommodation sharing. Environmental Innovation and Societal Transitions, 23, 70-83. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2210422416301368

Rasoolimanesh, S. M., Ramakrishna, S., Hall, C. M., Esfandiar, K., & Seyfi, S. (2020). A systematic scoping review of sustainable tourism indicators in relation to the sustainable development goals. Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 1-21. https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/09669582.2020.1775621

Sari, N. P. R., Bendesa, I. K. G., & Antara, M. (2019). The influence of quality of work life on employees’ performance with job satisfaction and work motivation as intervening variables in star-rated hotels in Ubud tourism area of Bali. Journal of Tourism and Hospitality Management, 7(1), 74-83. http://jthmnet.com/journals/jthm/Vol_7_No_1_June_2019/8.pdf

Soukhathammavong, B., & Park, E. (2019). The authentic souvenir: What does it mean to souvenir suppliers in the heritage destination? Tourism Management, 72, 105-116. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0261517718302905

Suppliers - Flight Centre Travel Group. (2021). Retrieved 24 June 2021, from https://www.fctgl.com/suppliers/

Tuan, L. T., Rajendran, D., Rowley, C., & Khai, D. C. (2019). Customer value co-creation in the business-to-business tourism context: The roles of corporate social responsibility and customer empowering behaviors. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Management, 39, 137-149. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S1447677018301955

Van der Zee, E., Gerrets, A. M., & Vanneste, D. (2017). Complexity in the governance of tourism networks: Balancing between external pressure and internal expectations. Journal of Destination Marketing & Management, 6(4), 296-308. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2212571X17302184

Van Niekerk, M., & Getz, D. (2019). Event stakeholders. Oxford: Goodfellow Publishers. https://www.goodfellowpublishers.com/free_files/Contents,%20cover%20and%20preface-2fb022e7f1605d91c78df3db080c1777.pdf

Yeh, C. M. (2018). Does board governance matter for foreign institutional investors to invest in listed tourism firms?. Tourism Management, 68, 66-78. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/abs/pii/S0261517718300451

Yusof, Y., Awang, Z., Jusoff, K., & Ibrahim, Y. (2017). The influence of green practices by non-green hotels on customer satisfaction and loyalty in hotel and tourism industry. International Journal of Green Economics, 11(1), 1-14. https://www.inderscienceonline.com/doi/abs/10.1504/IJGE.2017.082716

MBA643 Project Initiation, Planning, and Execution Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Assessment Title: Individual Report
Word Count: 1800 Words (+/-10%)
Weighting: 40 %
Total Marks: 40
Submission: Via Turnitin,
Due Date: Monday, Week 13, 23:55pm AEST

Your Task

This assessment is made up of two parts:

• Part A students are asked to imagine they have been engaged by a Renewable Energy (utilities) company to develop a report on key aspects of project risk management and how they might be used in proposed future projects in order to manage and limit risk.

In Part A you are asked to write a report based on one of the below companies:

Infigenergy: https://www.infigenenergy.com/
Tilt Renewables: https://www.tiltrenewables.com/

The company you will analyse will depend on the LAST digit of your student number:
o 0 and 5 = Tilt Renewables
o 6 and 9 = Infigenergy

• In Part B you are asked to conduct a capital budgeting analysis for the second company Tilt Renewables. Answer the short answer questions.

Assessment Description.

PART A (20 marks)

The report should begin with a short executive summary and conclude with several, short general recommendations. The content you include in the report should link the project management principles detailed below with the practices of the renewable energy company you have been allocated.

The topics for assignment help on which students need to make recommendations in their report include:

i) Project selection – How should the company you select determine what projects to undertake and what ones to avoid? What tools, measures, and practices are available to project analysts in this industry?

ii) Cost management – What is the role of project cost management for your chosen company? Why is it important? What strategies or approaches should the company you have chosen adopt in order to effectively manage project costs?

iii) Financing – What financing measures or options are generally available to assist companies like the one you have chosen to fund proposed new projects? The report should include reference to any implications associated with different funding types or models.

iv) Implementation and winding up – Are there any particular issues associated with commencing a project that your company must consider? Why are they important? Who do they impact or affect? What happens when the project finishes? How are projects wound up? Do they just end or are there resource or infrastructure considerations? Are there environmental issues associated with the end of a project?

Where possible, students should relate each section back to the renewable energy company they have been allocated. The executive summary should bring together general recommendations for the student’s chosen company relating to i)-iv).

Students should provide between 200-400 words per topic, together with approximately 200 words in total for executive summary and final recommendations.

PART B (20 marks)

Consider the following three sources and answer the following questions directly. You do not need to write a lot for each question and for some you will need to use excel calculations. Submit you excel spreadsheet together with your report in the separate submission inbox on the assessment table.

You have been asked to evaluate whether Tilt Renewables should undertake the Snow town North Solar Energy Farm based on the above sources. Assume this project has not yet been approved.

• Assume this is a twenty-five-year project.

• Consult source 1 for the estimated initial outlay/investment today (year 0)

• The investment will be depreciated on a straight-line basis over twenty-five years to 0 book value. It is estimated that the solar farm can be sold at the end of year 25 for $10 million.

• The solar farm will sell $15,000,000 worth of electricity each year into the grid from year 1-25

• Operating expenses for 25 years are $5.50 per solar panel per year (see number of solar panels from Source 

• The tax rate is 30%. All cash flows are annual and are received at the end of the year. The discount rate is 10%.

a) Based on the above information calculate the FCFs of the project. (10 marks)

b) Calculate the NPV for the solar farm. Should Tilt Renewables undertake this project? (5 marks)

c) Does the NPV take into account the CO2 emission reductions that the project will lead to (See Source 1)? Should it take this into account? Why or why not? (2 marks)

d) What is the debt to equity ratio in 2019 of Tilt Renewables according to source 3? How does this compare to other utility companies? What is the current share price according to Source 2 and when were shares first issued? (3 marks)

Solution

Introduction

In this digital era, energy has become an essential element of good quality of human life and economic development and growth. Most of our energy needs are fulfilled by the fossil fuels which are not only limited but also have adverse effect on the environment. Basis this problem, renewable energy has currently come up as an alternate solution. In this report, the focus is on the key aspects of the project risk management of the renewable sources of energy industry. (Benedek, Sebestyén, Bartók,2018)

The specific objectives here are:

1. To estimate most essential risk elements
2. To find out the capacity of such risk elements and ways to quantify them
3. To identify whether risks can be assessed with existing tools and techniques
4. To make out some innovative sources of such assessment

Project Selection

Not all the projects that come up in way of a company are taken up. That is the reason project selection exists. Project selection is thus one of the major stages of the task after the projects have been identified. Once identified, a project is not directly selected, but evaluated, compared and then finally considered for choosing. Project selection decision is sometimes considered even more typical and difficult as compared to identifying of a project. (Sinsel, Riemke &Hoffmann,2020)

There are various, tools, techniques, methods and measures for selecting a project.

Few of the acceptable methods and measures are:

1. The comparative study – In this method, international and published studies which deal with the problem of selection of an optimal renewable energy project in various countries are taken up and studied. This becomes are reference point for evaluating our own conditions and availabilities to take up the project.

2. The multicriteria approach – The success of any renewable energy plant is based on various criteria like securing the right land, access to capital, identifying reliable market, understanding the government policies in this context, identifying lines for transmitting the energy, etc. Under this approach every criterion is fully studied and then project is selected based on decision evaluation matrix of the study.

3. Analytical Hierarchy Approach – In this approach, structure of hierarchy is developed and pair wise comparison is made. Also, factors are compared based on hierarchy. Priority vector is derived, and consistency is calculated. Finally, alternative’s comprehensive priorities are got off.

Tilt Renewables has used multi criteria approach, as that is the most practical and effective approach. A list of top ten criteria is chosen and worked upon to find the economic viability and feasibility of the project.

There are several other tools which may come handy while evaluating our project like PVWatts Calculator,

Dynamic Solar Maps, GIS Data, and Analysis Tool. (Belu,2019).

Cost Management

It is the process by which a project manager plans the budgets of the project. This step starts with the initial phase of the project when the costs are approved for starting the project. Later on, those costs are closely monitored to see if the budgets are exceeded or not. In the process of cost management, the first step is cost estimation, then comes cost tracking to finally compare budgeted and actual costs. Project cost management is crucial as it sets the base line for project. It is the basis of make or break decision about the project. If this is not in place, a company may lose all its money as costs may exceed profits. Also, there are chances of incorrect invoicing to the customers. All this can make us overspend and have no track of where money is going. (Benge,2014)

To effectively manage costs, following points should be taken care of:

1. Planning for inflation as the prices change due to this which impacts project costs substantially.
2. Real time following of expenses to pluck a problem wherever and whenever it occurs and arises.
3. Prompt response to a major deviation whenever it is tracked.
4. Budgeting for unexpected costs as a new project can come up with things not accounted for, previously.
5. Company can also take up tools for cost management to have ease of control.

Tilt Renewables has set up an example in terms of its cost management as it has used up the proper techniques and followed the points mentioned above to come up to a position where, budgets can be made and cost management can be done properly.

Financing

Another important leg of any project is project financing. In today’s world apart from conventional methods of funding like IPO and bank loans, there are various other financing options available to a company. Various financing options are available like lease financing, loans and borrowings including working capital finance, long term loans, angel financing, seed financing and capital being brought up by institutional investors along with retail investors.

As a Project Manager, it is my duty to come up with proper Project Selection method that is backed by proper reasoning and logic so that the company can adopt it.

Especially when it comes to projects which are environment friendly, there are certain specific options available. Some of the available options are:

1. Equity – The conventional method of funding any project where shares of the company are issued against the money received from public at large.

2. Grants – for such projects of renewable energy, government provides grants that can be availed.

3. Incentives (state or local) – An environment friendly project bags incentives from various bodies that can be researched and asked for.

4. Debt/loan – Another traditional method of availing funds is taking loans from banks or other financial institutions

Other than the above, Energy Saving Performance Contracts, Tax equity incentives and monetising green attributes are among other sources of financing these projects.

Tilt Renewables has a blend of debt and equity in its financing structure while the former constituted 51.25% and the latter 48.75%. The company aims to maintain a blend of both so as to have optimal capital cost. The company has varied term loans ranging to a period of more than 5 years’ Various risks are associated with such funding like interest rate risk, credit risk, refinancing risk etc.

After a detailed analysis of the costs that need to be incurred, financing options can be explored. Normally, a combination of two or three financing options is ideal for such projects. Thew costs involved runs in millions and the financing from one source would generally not be sufficient and may also disturb the balance sheet equilibrium. Thus a combination of incentive, debt and equity is an ideal approach for financing. It should be done in such a manner that the weighted cost of capital is in line with the risks associated. (Benedek, Sebestyén, Bartók,2018)

Implementation and Winding Up

Post all the analysis comes the tedious part. The right implementation is the essence of every planning and projection. After studying the Tilt Renewables and its work, the project implementation
Project implementation steps are as under:

1. Preconstruction phase – This step includes project kick off with design and construction documents, plans and schedules for the project to begin.

2. Contract Execution Phase – This is overseeing the project control and changing the controls wherever needed.

3. Interconnection Phase – This phase is review and approval process based on inspection of the site and paper work submission for various approvals.

4. Project Construction Phase – This is quality control phase and oversight of project.

5. Commissioning Phase – The final testing and verification phase where permissions are received for commissioning the work.

These steps if taken up properly help in smooth implementation and execution of the project which will further help in achieving the targeted results. A proper and planned implementation not only ensures error free work but also saves lot of time and money on rework. (Chapman, 2019).

Winding up of a project is closure of a project either because the purpose for which the project was constituted is achieved or it is not a feasible and viable position for the company to run such project. In either case, winding up has to be in a particular manner and step by step process so as to not leave any harmful impact on environment and society. Apart from loss of time and money, another important concern is the human resource that was employed in the project. The experts hired at various levels and fields would go jobless. The bigger the project, the bigger the infrastructure; the bigger the infrastructure, the bigger the cost of disposal. The vast area acquired for the project needs to be cleared. The infrastructure developed should be disposed of in the best possible manner even if we have to incur some disposal costs as we cannot harm the nature. If the project goes on to run successfully and we need to think of closure after several years, by then the project will have rendered its value and the disposal would not mean disposal at loss. However, it should always be kept in mind disposal/winding up of the project is a process just like the initiation and should be done with utmost diligence and care. Tilt Renewables also clearly has its winding up policies stated so that there is no ill impact on the society and people at large. (Hillson, 2016).

Conclusion

We are talking about a renewable energy project i.e. the future of energy requirements. With huge investment, both financially and in terms of human capital, large gestation period, high risk and almost equal amount of decent profit after some initial years. More importantly a project that when set up will impact all aspects of the society, not only where it is being set up but also nearby localities.

Few recommendations that assure that such projects must be taken up are :

a. The basic understanding which runs is that a project which gives back to the society even a marginal stuff while helping investors earn a good amount of profit should be implemented.

b. The risk is high but so is the reward and if implemented with due care and diligent supervision, the project worth Millions will not only be beneficial for the owners but also the society at large.

c. We have discussed at length about the management of costs once the project is selected, along with the financing options available and how to choose the best finance option available. Then we have discussed the implementation of project and it is highly recommended that the project discussed should be taken up and implemented.

d. Such projects if economically viable must always be taken up.

e. Normally, there are lots of incentives and other unconventional means of financing such projects that can be utilised.

f. Tilt Renewables is a big name in this industry and based on the research of its work, it is highly recommended that if a future project on similar lines is taken up then this report of Tilt Renewables be used as base.

References
Agency, E. (2002). The Future for Renewable Energy 2: Prospects and Directions (2nd ed.). Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781315074436

Assmann, D. (Ed.). (2006). Renewable Energy: A Global Review of Technologies, Policies and Markets (1st ed.). Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781849772341

Belu, R. (2019). Fundamentals and Source Characteristics of Renewable Energy Systems (1st ed.). CRC Press. https://doi.org/10.1201/9780429297281

Benge, D. (2014). NRM1 Cost Management Handbook (1st ed.). Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781315848754

Chapman, R.J. (2014). The Rules of Project Risk Management: Implementation Guidelines for Major Projects (1st ed.). Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781315553177

Hillson, D. (2016). Managing Risk in Projects (1st ed.). Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781315249865

József Benedek, Tihamér-Tibor Sebestyén, Blanka Bartók, (2018),Evaluation of renewable energy sources in peripheral areas and renewable energy-based rural development, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 90,( 516-535) https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2018.03.020

Simon R. Sinsel, Rhea L. Riemke, Volker H. Hoffmann,(2020),Challenges and solution technologies for the integration of variable renewable energy sources—a review,RenewableEnergy,145,(2271-2285) https://doi.org/10.1016/j.renene.2019.06.147

Twidell, J., & Weir, T. (2005). Renewable Energy Resources, Routledge ,(2nd edition). https://doi.org/10.4324/9780203478721

Sorensen, B. (Ed.). (2011). Renewable Energy: Four Volume Set (1st ed.). Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781315793245

Jenkins, D. (2012). Renewable Energy Systems: The Earthscan Expert Guide to Renewable Energy Technologies for Home and Business (1st ed.). Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9780203117262
 

BIZ301 Organizational Creativity and Innovation Assignment Sample

Individual/Group - Individual
Length - 1,200 words +/?10%

Learning Outcomes - The Subject Learning Outcomes demonstrated by successful completion of the task below include:

a) Differentiate between the processes of creativity, innovation, and entrepreneurship.
b) Identify organizations that develop and foster the processes, practices, and attributes for creativity and innovation.
c) Explain the implications for organizational strategy, when developing a culture of creativity and/or innovation.
Weighting 35%

Total Marks - 100 marks

Task Instructions for assignment help

Students will review and analyze the chosen organization with theoretical models from the modules and produce a 1200-word report that responds to the following four questions:

1. From the perspective of the organisation’s customers, Identify and discuss the experience innovation that has been created.

2. Discuss and describe the convergence innovation that has been used by the organisation to enable it to provide the products/services it sells?

3. What role has Design Thinking played in the success of the organisation?

4. Do the organisation’s innovators/entrepreneurs demonstrate a covert or overt culture within the organisation? Justify your answer.

Suggested Outline & Content of your Report:

a) Cover Page – subject name, assessment name, student name, ID
b) Executive Summary
c) Table of Contents
d) Introduction
e) Discussion - answer to the 4 questions listed above.
f) Conclusion
g) References – minimum of 5 ACADEMIC REFERENCES

You are encouraged to use tables, charts and images in your report. Please note that the cover page, executive summary, references, appendices, tables, charts, and images do not form part of the word count.

Solution

Introduction

Creative business ideas are the reason that set the companies apart from one another. Innovation and creativity make the companies follow different marketing, promotion, technique, and selling of their products. Creativity is a crucial factor for the business in the current world mainly because innovation is essential to be ahead of the competitors in the current market. In order to explore how innovation is done, Green Collect company has been chosen for the analysis. Green Collect is a company “specialising in finding the best environmental outcome for a wide variety of hard-to-cycle products from offices to homes” (greencollect.org, 2022, para1). The company's main focusremains on innovating resources and recovery of the waste office items. In this assessment, the various methods and the approaches that the company is taking will be accessed. However, the main purpose of the assessment remains in discussing and applying the theoretical concepts from various modules for the subject towards evaluating the success of the chosen organization.

Discussion

Identifying the experience innovation created by Green Collect
The concept of experience innovation refers to the business differentiation and new growth approach with the help of which Green Collect will be able to look out for the opportunities from all the ideas and evaluation of the category. The experience space is distinct conceptually from the space of product, which is the conventional focus of the innovation (Prahalad, & Ramaswamy, .2003, p4).

Fig 1: The experience space
(Source: Prahalad, & Ramaswamy, 2003)

In this case, the company has successfully created experience innovation by creating an excellent website that can showcase the brand itself. This way, the company can bring the brand online, making it more accessible and helping the customers to discover the businesses. Without the company's online existence, it would be difficult for the customers to shop the products at the convenience of their homes. The site has a separate section called 'Shop' on the home page where all the recycled and re-used products that the company provides are listed categorically. For instance, there are categories for furniture, IT electronics, stationery with detailed price, size, and a picture of the product attached which makes it easier for the customer to shop. The company has also been adopting new support channels like Facebook and Instagram that help the company improve the customer experiences as the customers can access the company's support team efficiently.

Discussing and Describing Convergence Innovation That GreenCollect Uses

In the current world, creating value tends to ensure the company's growth and profitability, which comes from innovation. However, the convergence of the industries and the active role of the consumers in a networked society is increasing rapidly (Prahalad, & Ramaswamy, 2003, p2).

There is a need for a new point of view that will ensure that the individual customer will be actively co-construct the consumption experiences by the personalized interaction and co-creating values that are unique for themselves. The present world sees innovation “based on the convergence of seemingly heterogeneous and unrelated things that can help create exponential outcomes based on the economies of convergence and network” (Lee, &Trimi, 2021, p2).

In Green Collect, the company has used digital convergence innovation, which is a process in which the technology tends to exit with other disciplines and creates a dynamic system in which human interaction is important. Green Collect interacts with the local councils, businesses, and government departments and collects all the office wastes being sold to the customers according to their needs.

Role of Design Thinking in Green Collect Success

Human beings have been creating and designing things for a very long. From the age of stone axes to the current product design of the iPhone, this is the process of creating and solving the problem of the need (Clarke, 2020, Para 1).

Fig 2: Methodology of design thinking and the stages
(Source: self-made)

It can be stated that design thinking is a process in which one tries to understand the user, challenging the assumption and redefining the problems while making attempts so that the other strategies could be found out. The design thinking process includes things like discovery of empathy, defining the problem, generating ideas, creating and evaluating (Clarke, 2020, Para 1).

Empathetic discovery: At Green Collect the company has firstly found out the problem through empathetic discovery. The company empathizes with the user and the environment and observes them. The design thinkers tends to put detailed observation and tries to make usage of the things which might not be possible in general and inspire innovation. In this case, Green Collect has observed that office waste tends to be increasing rapidly which is not being easily seen by other people.

Problem Definition: All the alternatives to solve the problem are being considered in this stage. In this period, the problem to which one wants to find the solution becomes clear along with the objectives that need to be achieved. In this case, the main problem is reusing the office waste products so that there is a decrease in the physical space occupied by these waste products.

Generating Idea: In this, the first step remained to establish the dialogue regarding the possible solution that will carefully plan who will participate in the challenges provided. In this phase, ideas are generated to solve the problem and a multidisciplinary group focus is laid on the problem. In the end, the concepts are being expressed with the help of visual tools like photos, designs, etc. The ideas that were generated through this process were as follows:

· Acquiring more machinery

· Reusing the wastes that have been acquired

· Taking advantage of the knowledge workers so that manual recycling can be promoted

Prototype: It is a multidisciplinary group in which the ideas generated proceed with the assembly prototype. In this, the products that the company has acquired are being put on the company website with all the details and the features so that people can purchase them according to their needs at lower prices (Zbinden& Rossetti, 2020, p7).

Identifying If GreenCollect is Covert or Overt Culture

It has been observed that the overt culture is composed of the objective "company line" values and has been characterized as a culture of technoscience. On the other hand, the covert culture characterizes as a reflexive science culture that is being made up of a deeper level of motives or attitudes that is being helped implicitly at the personal level.

“Intelligence scholars have often remarked on the difficulty of accounting for covert action” (Luff, 2017, 29).

In this case, Green Collect is a social enterprise that is more focused on caring for people and the planet. The company's aim is to make a world where no waste exists. The company's focus remains on resources recovery and collecting the products from various officers and homes that can be sent to the landfill, sorting them carefully, and sorting them to find the best environmental outcome (greencollect.org, 2022, para1). The company's main priority remained to reuse, and if it cannot be reused, it will be recycled. Further, Green Collect has also created a workplace that has full flexibility and support the employees. This way it can be stated that the leader at Green Collect is following the overt culture.

Conclusion

From the above discussion, it has been observed that the company has been finding the best outcome for the products that are not easy to recycle. The company has successfully created experience innovation by creating an excellent website that can showcase the brand itself. The company has an official website through which it can reach a wide area of customers.
Also, the company convergence innovation is being used by the company as it interacts with the local councils, businesses, and government departments and collects all the office wastes sold to the customers according to their needs. Further, the company also uses the design thinking process to decide whether to reuse a product or recycle it. The company follows the overt culture in which the company is focused on caring for people and the planet both.

Reference

Clarke, R. (2020). Design Thinking. ALA Neal-Schuman. Web-s-ebscohost-com.torrens.idm.oclc.org. Retrieved 9 March 2022, from https://web-s-ebscohost-com.torrens.idm.oclc.org/ehost/ebookviewer/ebook/bmxlYmtfXzI0MzM1MDZfX0FO0?sid=21a51169-427a-4743-a260-a7ceba900eb9@redis&vid=0&format=EK&rid=1.

Lee, S. M., &Trimi, S. (2021). Convergence innovation in the digital age and in the COVID-19 pandemic crisis. Journal of Business Research, 123, 14-22.https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0148296320306226

Luff, J. (2017). Covert and Overt Operations: Interwar Political Policing in the United States and the United KingdomCovert and Overt Operations. The American Historical Review, 122(3), 727-757. https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article/122/3/727/3862792?login=true

Office Recycling | Retail Stores | Green Collect – Reuse – Upcycle – Recycle – Ewaste Recycling. Office Recycling | Retail Stores | Green Collect. (2022). Retrieved 9 March 2022, from https://www.greencollect.org/.

Prahalad, C., & Ramaswamy, V. (2003). The New Frontier of Experience Innovation. learn-ap-southeast-2-prod-fleet01-xythos.content .blackboardcdn.com. Retrieved 7 March 2022, from https://learn-ap-southeast-2-prod-fleet01-xythos.content.blackboardcdn.com/5c07149a959f5/3812369?X-Blackboard-Expiration=1646816400000&X-Blackboard-Signature=q3H2smi8BcGkPo1uc1jW79TC35T2BLWdDuX7AkBIU6E%3D&X-Blackboard-Client-Id=506568&response-cache-control=private%2C%20max-age%3D21600&response-content-disposition=inline%3B%20filename%2A%3DUTF-8%27%27Module%25201_Prahlad%2520and%2520Ramasway%25202003.pdf&response-content-type=application%2Fpdf&X-Amz-Security-Token=IQoJb3JpZ2luX2VjEGQaDmFwLXNvdXRoZWFzdC0yIkcwRQIhAPJ3cbiFVW7UtHyMJ1WIDaakqr%2FoG4Gsyw1RJ2Qe0RHHAiAhkG8R42ZomFy%2BQEolfJQ9WG14GGrg5Q0yAVuul58yACqNBAjN%2F%2F%2F%2F%2F%2F%2F%2F%2F%2F8BEAAaDDU1NjkwMzg2MTM2MSIMCauMEihf4RY2rUAlKuEDGIMm0w%2FRVROMU11bEuMf%2BaLHmtoMtIr5rqaHLbwvI6ixBzBc3PfOxRIUkiDSpZpnVyPUC2LRz8Wjbb1YWjvXptgRTleq8ukBPDpd7SMoUkje%2FI2QImI1ptRpp1KzVB7P9qz9C8HfjCx0e%2BTGYnZCOdTe%2FKoDJPb7ZMn84IwOYYvsv7cDID3xKebYr00yvSUycNqQCIKgjCemLRVFAzM5XdefOExucNXY5yMw7aoEvg3kZToTtjxSvoyEK9QFJ9nyIslnc5dSfpcVVDh97%2BuMtnUjt%2FgZdAx19jkB88YLtmsIU%2BHX8eg3O8UPvfmS5Tkc%2B1zHmvZaukajNKQEIfwp9bHSK1hBFErmkEjiDnbfth3UwL7RAfMSi87tVrszmb2LpJx0wMSecuJUoHwp1pb8QrcUPQMtuFNdwPnBC53Qbi60%2FuzlxJpbWsIf234dUjWXdUhX4eyNCbjmN30AJMOXIXZdOJ4TXg61ma%2BWj8QRNyQj3SshwFVoDl5qsE9Gzcz%2FKT2F7oAFS3Kb8WHi2SSbzAEBOrjrFwwBtGeTKE0VOn81xWvUijZDmZxv9Fok2DA6RpGWdLmfmwzHrL5aVJn5Esk%2BArz%2FxwniAh2kGWohV1ui2K4MY%2BFaGxI9HXsBQ8i11DDiy6CRBjqlAbTnOKwMTnWYORyd%2FNl9t8Zokd1jCvtmPWyWkO0%2FoBIpLt4W3%2FdR2HYJHVESVdZBLq9PPInxNdJ511F3vE4jHJXfEyRti9gSOtdOv3Giq4tN5m75uZ5R53j733Q0rbqHp7EVreiXOE5cxuCepjQtiypB5lkaHgU3Sno3Kn5EtUHQfHZhMLFutNP400BQ893nK20Vt4wCSV1B0THGzrkBzL99XJJoog%3D%3D&X-Amz-Algorithm=AWS4-HMAC-SHA256&X-Amz-Date=20220309T030000Z&X-Amz-SignedHeaders=host&X-Amz-Expires=21600&X-Amz-Credential=ASIAYDKQORRY6CSESFOJ%2F20220309%2Fap-southeast-2%2Fs3%2Faws4_request&X-Amz-Signature=124dc5fcb88a4495667427bd6d269aadb12bc8e4f80876dff7bb9bbe71378fa7.

Zbinden, M., & Rossetti, G. (2020). Design Thinking methodology. A Case Study: Recycling of PET Bottles. Ajer.org. Retrieved 9 March 2022, from https://www.ajer.org/papers/Vol-9-issue-5/R0905175184.pdf.

MBA504 Data Analytics for Business Assignment Sample

Word Count: 1500 Words (+/-10%)
Weighting: 30 %
Total Marks: 30
Submission: Turnitin
Due Date: Tuesday, Week 7 at 11.55 (AEST)

Assessment Description

This assessment requires you to read and interpret a report written by McKinsey Global Institute. The report analyses trends following the impact of Covid-19, such as remote work and the uptake of digitalization and automation in work processes. McKinsey Global Institute research combines the disciplines of economics and management, employing analytical tools with the insights of business leaders. This report explores the post Covid work environment in 8 countries from a range of perspectives and metrics.

Assessment Instructions for assignment help

In this assessment, you need to:

Part A (1000 words)

• Study “The future of work after COVID-19” report from a data analytics perspective and provide an analysis incorporating the key points. A synopsis without analysis is insufficient to satisfy the requirements of the assessment.

a. The key insights, commentary on methods used, critique of the presentation methods and visualisations as well as possible improvements should be described. This should be addressed based on your learnings from the course.

• Specifically:

a. Derive and quote and describe appropriate statistical metrics from the report
b. Suggest alternative graphical or visual representation
c. Comment on the data collection and management.

Part B (500 words)

• Reflect on the key takeaways from this report, specifically those regarding the importance of developing your data analytics skills.

Solution

Introduction

The COVID – 19 Pandemic has had an impact on day-to-day life and approx all other aspects related to it. This also has its impact on world economies and globalization, as it directly hit the labour working and supply chain, which are interrelated with each other due to globalization.
Here, the report presents a study and analysis of the MGI (McKinsey Global Institute) report on “The future of work after COVID?19". This research examines several aspects of global economies which have a long-term impact on several work areas and diverse labour markets and states their pre and post-COVID conditions.

Key Observations

• In this physical proximity of work and work force along with businesses models and consumer behaviours or all taken into consideration, and the different diverse labour markets that are chosen for this study are United States, United Kingdom, France, Germany, India, China, Japan and Spain (Amankwah et al., 2021).

• It has shown different occupation transitions and their increment rate predicted in the report is 25% by 2030.

• Report shows demand shifting across occupations and their percentage change it’s shown in the report.

• Proximity scores over different kind of human interactions and work environment presented is also shown in form of a matrix and given out a score out of 100.

• Trends before and after and reducing the pandemic are shown in the report in various kinds of occupations and businesses.

• It is also shown the data that percentage of 2018 workforce and present demand for potential of remote work in higher advance economies along with number of workers in percentage who can work remotely for 3 to 5 day in a week, it is only 25-30 percentage of work force.

Stakeholders

The key stakeholders are:

• Investors
• Organizations
• Employees
• Governments
• Global Communities

Methods Used

While preparing a report on “The Future of work after COVID-19”, MGI have chosen different occupations and made a cluster of them, by preparing five metrics and dividing them into 10 arenas, they have followed both qualitative and quantitative approach.

The analysis of different trends that are obtained after COVID and pre-COVID trends both are examined and based upon them different graphical representations are made, showing various changes in terms of working habits of people, changes in demands, the potential for remote work, occupation transitions, labour growth demand, digital and automation adoption and industries which were more sustainable during such times.

This represents, change in trends and projected different upcoming trends, for workforce and businesses, and also provides a deep study about occupations transitions and their necessity to focus from now,

Critical Analysis of Methods and Improvements

The MGI report is prepared by assessing the potential impact of covid-19 on workforce and their analysis is based upon their occupation and work activity. While taken into consideration the different clustering of work arenas and their reflections are made.
In order to identify major impact more than 800 occupations are chosen and these are having their different criteria’s such as the required in-door or outdoor working or what kind of work practices they followed. In this potential is also taken out so that different activities and occupations that are required to be perform to physically now can be done via remote work or not.

After taking consideration of all such data certain graphical representations are made which again suggest some kind of figures and facts. This shows that different kind of human interactions and work environment requirements in various aspects such as medical care, personal care, on site customer interaction, Home support, computer based office work, transportation of goods etc or all taken into consideration and based upon them certain proximity scores are obtained (Blit, 2020).

Figure 1 Evaluation of demand over pandemic period
(Source: Lund et al., 2021)

In this world developing and making analysis of this kind of data bar graphs can also be developed as they have much easier and understanding and it is easier for reduced to extract facts and figures and data from those graphs. In this 6 major economy of world chosen which involves United States, China, Japan, Germany, United Kingdom, France and India.

Data Collection and Management

In this the data is being chosen from LinkedIn for number of members who moved to small cities as compared to the large cities into United States of America in a time span of 2020 as compared to 2019. Also for countries the data of recovery are chosen from October 20-20 report of MGI over consumer sentiments during corona virus pandemic. Apart from this the data is being chosen from the Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia September 2020 report upon showing early trends from survey population (Couch et al., 2021).

While talking about human proximity data over workplace enter requirement of physical proximity and retailing with customers face to face discussions and environment over the work are all scored based upon us department of labour data. Also for standard occupational classification code the graphical representation given in this report uses 6 digit standard occupational codes and based upon them it provides percentage points over different countries on a wage criteria basis.
The 5 characteristics that are shown in report are chosen from the data by O*NET online and similar different sources. Based upon this data collection, the graphical representation of countries showing proximity scores for work places are presented.

Alternative Graphical or Visual Representation

For developing this report line charts can be used for displaying different kind of current trends, as line graphs are popularly recognised for their demonstrate capability of different trends in a concise and Swift manner. They are also helpful in indicating various kinds of representations over a single graph. Along with this bar charts can also be used in compare in different values and clusters that are made for different occupations and cities data represented in report (Chung et al., 2020).

Also to compare side by side values and data column charts are preferred and can be used in report show that visualisation of change of the market and business in terms of growth and their other characteristics. Also area charts are can be used in this to represent change in work culture and different kind of new occupations and work practices that are required and also comparative study of them before and after the COVID - 19.

Reflection

COVID – 19 was the worst pandemic that has hit the world in recent decades, and its impact was also high, such that supply chains are gets affected by this, and many countries are having high inflation and employment rates due to this pandemic. Even after two years, the impact of this is clearly visible.
Here, the physical proximity of work and work force along with businesses models and consumer behaviours are all taken into consideration, and the different diverse labour markets that are chosen for this study are United States, United Kingdom, France, Germany, India, China, Japan and Spain (Hodder, 2020).

The people and companies have changed their way of working, and instead of work which required physical presence, works which can be done remotely have attracted more people. As remote work looks like a more compatible and flexible methods of working, its demand was high, companies are also investing less in preparing workspaces and are focusing of remote work.

The physical dimension of work, Businesses policies and Workforce transitions in large scale and so on are included in factors which are impacted with COVID -19 pandemic.

Figure 2 Human interaction and work environment score
(Source: Lund et al., 2021)

The report shows that high wages occupation jobs are increasing and declining in a low wage occupation. This suggest that the scale and nature of transition of work force are very challenging in upcoming years and approx 107 million workers are needed to find different occupations by the year of 2030, as they are not able to compete with change in the demands and trends after Covid-19.

Figure 3 Representation showing potential remote work without losing effectiveness
(Source: Lund et al., 2021)

The above graphical representation shows that percentage of workforce who can do work from remote places, without losing effectiveness. And this chart shows that in developing countries, people can bear more load and not lose much effectiveness as compare to developing countries (Butterick et al., 2021). More than 800 occupations are chosen and these are having their different criteria’s such as the required in-door or outdoor working or what kind of work practices they followed.

Figure 4 Yearly Growth in ecommerce representation
(Source: Lund et al., 2021)

This graph represent year over growth of e-commerce retail sales and the period of 2019 - 2020 is chosen and annual average of 2015 - 19 is also shown and projected growth based upon these trends are presented.

There is a necessity for workers to learn different emotional and social skills as well as technology skills so that they can move to different high growth opportunities and higher wage bracket.

It is typical for the people to make transitions between occupations as they need to learn the different opportunities which are evolved and learn new skills for them. Also this report suggest that less educated workers, immigrants women’s and ethnic minorities are needed to make more occupation transition after this pandemic and they may need to face more challenges as compared to other people.
 

References

Chung, H., Seo, H., Forbes, S. and Birkett, H., 2020. Working from home during the COVID-19 lockdown: Changing preferences and the future of work.

Couch, D.L., O'Sullivan, B. and Malatzky, C., 2021. What COVID?19 could mean for the future of “work from home”: The provocations of three women in the academy. Gender, Work & Organization, 28, pp.266-275.

Blit, J., 2020. Automation and reallocation: will COVID-19 usher in the future of work?. Canadian Public Policy, 46(S2), pp.S192-S202.

Amankwah-Amoah, J., Khan, Z., Wood, G. and Knight, G., 2021. COVID-19 and digitalization: The great acceleration. Journal of Business Research, 136, pp.602-611.

Hodder, A., 2020. New Technology, Work and Employment in the era of COVID?19: reflecting on legacies of research. New technology, work and employment, 35(3), pp.262-275.

Butterick, M. and Charlwood, A., 2021. HRM and the COVID?19 pandemic: How can we stop making a bad situation worse?. Human Resource Management Journal, 31(4), pp.847-856.

Lund, S., Madgavkar, A., Manyika, J., Smit, S., Ellingrud, K., Meaney, M. and Robinson, O., 2021. The future of work after COVID-19. McKinsey Global Institute, 18.

MGT600 Team Performance Evaluation Assignment Sample

Individual/Group - Individual
Length - 1,500 words

Learning Outcomes - The Subject Learning Outcomes demonstrated by successful completion of the task below include:

a) Critically assess the key principles and theories underlying management to achieve high-performing organisations at projects, teams, and individual levels.

b) Critically evaluate and reflect on effective relationships between people and teams in organisations and projects.

c) Demonstrate effective communication and practical problem solving skills to manage people in a range of complex contexts.

d) Critically reflect on the roles and functions that managers perform in the context of the challenges and risks in the changing global environment.

e) Develop and justify contemporary management strategies to address a variety of people management issues to ensure best practice and quality outcomes.

Assessment Task for Online Assignment Help

You are required to critically assess the performance of your team and recommend improvements based on the relevant concepts and frameworks you have learnt in this subject in a 1,500-word team evaluation report. Please refer to the Instructions for details on how to complete this task.

Instructions

1. Review your team’s performance in completing the first two assessments and make recommendations for improvement.

• In reviewing the team performance, considerations must be given to the following:

How did your team come together and what phases or stages did it go through?

What roles did team members play?

What challenges were presented?

How did individual, team, and contextual dynamics impact performance?

What would you do differently to improve performance?

How would you apply your learnings in your current or future workplace?

• Please note that you are not required to review the quality and content of the assessments you produced as a team. Instead, you are required to review the performance of the team in completing the assessment tasks.

• You are required to specifically apply and discuss concepts from Modules 4, 5, and 6 as well as any relevant processes and concepts from earlier modules.

• The evaluation needs to be supported with evidence from academic research as well as examples from your own experiences and or observations. You will also find the module activities useful in prompting your thinking.

2. Write a team evaluation report of 1500 words using the following structure:

• Cover sheet: Student details (student name, ID number, subject code & name, assessment number and title)

• Executive summary

• Table of contents

• Introduction: Outline the purpose and structure of your report.

• Background: Briefly describe your team’s purpose and relevant contextual issues.

• Main discussion: Review your team’s performance covering key concepts from all modules. Exploring these within an appropriate theoretical framework would be appropriate here.

• Recommendations / action plan: Provide recommended strategies and actions to improve your team’s performance.

• Conclusion

• Reference list

• Appendices

3. You are strongly advised to read the rubric, which is an evaluation guide with criteria for grading your assignment—this will give you a clear picture of what a successful report looks like.

Solution

Introduction

Assessment 3 mainly focuses on the review of team performance as well as the key considerations being identified in order to manage a team. The context aims to elucidate different considerations and strategies that were taken in the previous assignments. This assessment will cover the overall review of the team performance of the age care division. There are several challenges being identified in the project related to team performance and evaluation. From the previous studies, it is evident that the team has faced several issues due to its poor positioning and weak production due to team mismanagement. This assessment will cover all the challenges that the team is currently facing along with the possible ways to extenuate the issues accordingly. Moreover, this assessment will also highlight theoretical discussions related to the topic of interest and how the team can use theories to mitigate the challenges accordingly.

The main discussion

The onset of the Covid-19 pandemic creates several issues for the team and presently the organization process is facing various issues due to the imposition of government rules and policies and employee leaves. Imposing restrictions by the government and leave of employees created disruption in the systematic flow of information in the staff maintenance of the healthcare institute. Disruption in the systemic flow of information further created conflicts and impingement among the team members. Therefore, to extenuate the issue, having a strong leadership as well as a manager is quintessential who will be responsible for proffering clear communication and direction to the team. In this way, it will be possible for the employees and workers in the team to pay close attention to the details of daily tasks and manage to complete every task as per clear communication and advice provided by the team leader.

Reviewing Team Performance

Communication and interaction are the best possible ways to deal with the issues and mismanagement of the team. In this context as per the previous studies, it is evident that communication and conflict management can be very beneficial for the overall growth and development of an organization and its members. In the case of managing every process, it is very important to practice regular communication and interaction within the system in order to influence the entire organization. Through the application of an effective communication medium, it can be possible for the team to review its performance and to develop the relationship between them effectively.

However, it is also very essential to make constant innovation accordingly in order to make the process more influenced (Sanyal and Hisam, 2018). There are certain ways to do so. In this context, the team leader needs to use certain key theories and frameworks to develop the overall management and operations. Communication management leadership, motivational leadership, and transformational leadership styles are the best effective ways to mitigate contemporary management issues and challenges accordingly. Through the application of these leadership approaches, it can be possible for the team to develop its interagency communicational structure, operations, and overall infrastructure (Vamathevan et al. 2019). Moreover, it can also be essential for the team to use constructive interagency communication within the system to link all the processes and tasks under a single thread to achieve a common goal or a vision.

Several Challenges Identified

There are several challenges being faced by the team manager in order to make all the processes as per plan and to motivate all the members accordingly. In this context, it is very essential to identify these challenges and mitigate them accordingly for better business and social care operations. These are:

? Improper staff counting and performance disability are considered as the potential challenges that the team faced accordingly. This challenge is evident as a result of improper staff management, human resource operations, and poor leadership practice in the team (Akande-Sholabi and Adebisi, 2020).

? New government policies and regulations are also considered as one of the major challenges being faced by the team to work accordingly. The increasing taxations and other restrictions due to COVID 19 have made several changes in the planned strategy of the team.

? Limited resources and infrastructure of the team is also a notable challenge in this case. More precisely, increasing employee leave due to COVID 19 and fewer technical considerations to influence the working process are responsible for the increasing interferences in the organizational operations and team management.

? The team has faced several issues due to poor communication and less interest of the supervisor in the business details. In this context, through the application of this issue, it is very difficult for the members to practice regular communication among them for better business application.

? The team has also faced challenges as a result of the limited human resource operations of the team. In this context, due to the poor infrastructure of the human resources, it is very difficult for the team members to manage all the processes accordingly along with increasing their overall concentration accordingly.

Figure 1: Identified challenges
(Source: Created by the learner)

Mitigating the challenges

There are several ways to mitigate the identified challenges. In this context, the team leader needs to incorporate strategies and considerations accordingly to influence the entire system. These are

? Development of infrastructure: It is very important for the team and the team leader to develop the overall infrastructure of the team. This will include the incorporation of a communication medium, practice of theoretical concepts, and innovative marketing strategies (Rani et al. 2020).

? Implementation of the latest technology: Implementation of the latest technology can also be an important consideration to mitigate contemporary challenges. Through the application of the latest technology, it can also be possible to develop the overall processes such as HR management, employee management, and operational measures. Moreover, implementation of technology can also be helpful in the case of making constant innovation in the existing system. An improved human resource system can be very beneficial for the employees, members, and the team leader to pay closer attention to the details of the overall team and organizational processes accordingly.

? Use of effective leadership styles: Using effective leadership approaches and considerations can also be helpful to mitigate the identified challenges. In this context, the team leader needs to use motivational theory along with transformational leadership theory to influence the employees and increase their focus on daily operations (Kumar et al. 2022). The team leader can use these leadership approaches in order to manage the safe flow of the entire business and the members accordingly.

Figure 2: Mitigating strategies
(Source: Created by the learner)

Theoretical Discussion

As per the views of Asbari et al. (2020), transformational leadership is a process that helps a leader to extenuate conflicts among the team and can increase the overall success of a team by encouraging them. Strong transformational leadership helps a leader to establish a strong relationship among the team members which further helps the leader to bring enthusiasm and engagement of the team members with the work. Envisaging the analysis explains that the exigencies of a strong leadership style boost the morale of the team members and implement vision and value for them. Therefore effectuating a transformational leadership approach not only helps the health care institutions to make all the team members united in a common cause but also will stimulate and encourage them for learning and creativity respectively.

Figure 3: Transformational leadership style
(Source: Kotamena et al. 2020)

On the other hand, according to Calvo & Topa (2019), motivational leadership is about creating positivity and vision among the employees and team members. The authors have also elucidated that practising motivational leadership at the workplace helps a manager to see the best among the employees and it can further inspire them to work toward a common goal. It can be seen that when a member of one team tries to communicate with another team it is creating conflicts in the healthcare institution. Therefore, practising a motivational leadership style will help to bring all the teammates closer by providing them with the same vision or goal. Here the goal is to improve the analytical ability, evaluating ability and problem-solving ability of the team to identify “exploit” opportunities in the real-world environment and to exert control over the workplace. Despite this, contemplating motivational leadership by the manager would help the manager to improve the self-confidence and self-esteem of the team members which will further improve employee health, vision and purpose. Therefore, the cultivation of motivational leadership will be susceptible to extenuating disruption of communication, lower level of absenteeism, and poor team member engagement, It will further develop the competencies of the team members by making them creative and setting goals and growing interest in the project work.

Figure 4: Motivational leadership style for the team manager
(Source: Thrassou et al. 2018)

One of the major issues behind the conflicts among the team members is the lack of trust among the team members which further radix or disrupt the constructive integrity of communication, contextual dynamics of team performances. Therefore to knock off the issue authors like Andersson (2019), enunciated communication management theory, which states that communication management increases trust among the members and improves employee engagement with the work which further redounds to provide clarity and direction to the employees about team’s goals and objectives.

Figure 5: Communication management theory
(Source: Zerfass et al. 2020)

Therefore, reversing the situation, the team can come forth with a communication management theory which will allow them to promote team building and trust which can further improve productivity, and team management and the ability of the team to administer and monitor “teamwork”, “communication”, “objective settings” and “performance appraisal”. 

Recommendations and Action Plan

? In order to enhance the communication among the team members, it is recommended that the team should adopt interagency communication. Practising interagency communication will help the team to create a sense of community ownership among them which will further help them to address their needs and demands while working toward a common goal or objectives.

? SMART action plan

Table 1: SMART action plan
(Source: Self-Developed)

Recommendation for the Students Group

? In order to extenuate the conflicts between the team members, the team adopted a transformational leadership style. Despite this, it is recommended that the team can further adopt Laissez Faire's leadership style. It will allow the team members to express their ideas and feelings without any hesitation. In addition to it, Laissez Faire's leadership style brings creativity to the team members which will further help teams to reduce conflicts among team members.

? On the other hand, adopting a transformational leadership style will help the team members to bring enthusiasm and motivation among the team members which will further impel the students for learning by bracing up their creativity.

? In order to increase the engagement of team members, the team can adopt Belbin's team development theory. Adoption of Belbin’s team development theory will help the team members to discover their strengths in the workplace. Despite this, it will further help the students to be multifunctional while working on a project..

? The student team can also adopt Belbin's team development theory; it will further help them work on a project unitedly. Despite this, Belbin’s team development theory will help the team members to gather strength from the students to knock off the weakness of the team.

Conclusion

It can be concluded from the above analysis that communication is one of the significant weapons that motivates the team members to work unitedly toward a common goal. Without proper leadership style and communication strategies create bad interpersonal relations that further create mistrust, abstinence and low morale among the team members. It creates hindrances in knowledge sharing which further the “grapevine effect” among the team members. It can also create aggrieved feelings which can commence unhealthy competition among the students.

References

Akande-Sholabi, W., & Adebisi, Y. A. (2020). The impact of COVID-19 pandemic on medicine security in Africa: Nigeria as a case study. The Pan African Medical Journal, 35(Suppl 2). Retrieved on 09.08.2022 retrieved from: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC7875805/

Kumar, V., Ya, K. Z., & Lai, K. K. (2022). Mapping the key challenges and managing the opportunities in supply chain distribution during COVID-19: a case of Myanmar pharmaceutical company. Journal of Global Operations and Strategic Sourcing, (ahead-of-print). Retrieved on 09.08.2022 retrieved from: https://www.emerald.com/insight/content/doi/10.1108/JGOSS-01-2022-0002/full/html

Rani, K. G. A., Hamad, M. A., Zaher, D. M., Sieburth, S. M., Madani, N., & Al-Tel, T. H. (2020). Drug development post COVID-19 pandemic: toward a better system to meet current and future global health challenges. Expert Opinion on Drug Discovery, 1. Retrieved on 09.08.2022 retrieved from: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC7784828/

Sanyal, S., & Hisam, M. W. (2018). The impact of teamwork on work performance of employees: A study of faculty members in Dhofar University. IOSR Journal of Business and Management, 20(3), 15-22. Retrieved on 09.08.2022 retrieved from: https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Shouvik-
Sanyal/publication/325287860_The_Impact_of_Teamwork_on_Work_Performance_of_Employees_A_Study_of_Faculty_Members_in_Dhofar_University/links/5b040753a6fdccf9e4f7cdfd/The-Impact-of-Teamwork-on-Work-Performance-of-Employees-A-Study-of-Faculty-Members-in-Dhofar-University.pdf

Vamathevan, J., Clark, D., Cz Odrowski, P., Dunham, I., Ferran, E., Lee, G., ... & Zhao, S. (2019). Applications of machine learning in drug discovery and development. Nature reviews Drug discovery, 18(6), 463-477. Retrieved on 09.08.2022 retrieved from: https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC6552674/

Andersson, R. (2019). Employee communication responsibility: Its antecedents and implications for strategic communication management. International Journal of Strategic Communication, 13(1), 60-75. https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/pdf/10.1080/1553118X.2018.1547731

Asbari, M., Santoso, P. B., & Prasetya, A. B. (2020). Elliptical And Anti Democratic Transformational Leadership Critics: Is It Still Relevant?(A Literature Study). INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF SOCIAL, POLICY AND LAW, 1(1), 12-16. https://www.econstor.eu/bitstream/10419/247923/1/1667895761.pdf

Calvo, C., & Topa, G. (2019). Leadership and motivational climate: The relationship with objectives, commitment, and satisfaction in base soccer players. Behavioral Sciences, 9(3), 29. https://www.mdpi.com/2076-328X/9/3/29/pdf

Kotamena, F., Senjaya, P., & Prasetya, A. B. (2020). A Literature Review: Is Transformational Leadership Elitist and Antidemocratic?. International Journal of Social, Policy And Law, 1(1), 36-43. https://ijospl.org/index.php/ijospl/article/download/15/7

Thrassou, A., Orfanos, D., & Tsoukatos, E. (2018). Linking motivational leadership with creativity. In Innovation and capacity building (pp. 77-108). Palgrave Macmillan, Cham. http://ndl.ethernet.edu.et/bitstream/123456789/73522/1/209.pdf#page=95

Zerfass, A., Hagelstein, J., & Tench, R. (2020). Artificial intelligence in communication management: a cross-national study on adoption and knowledge, impact, challenges and risks. Journal of Communication Management, 24(4), 377-389. http://eprints.leedsbeckett.ac.uk/6737/1/ArtificialIntelligenceInCommunicationManagementAM-TENCH.pdf

CVE80010 Principles of Sustainability Assignment Sample

Your task is to write a report that examines the ways in which climate change is predicted to impact upon your home city. What you consider to be your home city should be the one closest to your heart – it is not necessary to be where you were born or have lived the longest.

The basic changes that you must cover are changes in precipitation, sea level, humidity, wind and temperature. Your report must cover social impacts, and you have to integrate regional considerations including water supplies, food supplies and refugee movements. You should include the readily apparent adaptations or actions briefly that are taken likely to mitigate the impacts– but this is not the primary focus of the task.

Climate change projections are typically discussed against a series of different reference years (e.g. 2030, 2050, 2100) because some regions will experience different impacts at different times (rather than just increasing severity of each) – so make sure your report considers this variability over at least two of the projected times.

If your home city has already developed a climate change risk assessment or adaptation plan, your report should find a different angle to consider the issue from. It is not acceptable to take a single report as your only reference source. If you feel the amount of work already completed for your chosen city leaves you no room for originality, then you may wish to choose a different city that you’re familiar with.

Your report should total 1500 words +? 10% (excluding bibliography),for assignment help but keep in mind the effectiveness of images, diagrams, and maps in communicating complex information. It must be succinctly written, i.e. it must communicate a large amount of information using the limited number of words you’re permitted.

Solution

Introduction

The study is to explore the changes in the weather condition. It is to predict the changes in the climatic condition and its subsequent impact on Mumbai City. Mumbai city is found to have experienced significant climatic changes and have been affected by the major crisis as a result of potential changes in the humidity level, precipitation and temperature (Adam et al., 2021). The study is to explore the changes in the past and the weather situation at the current time and subsequent changes that are predictable within the context of the city.

Sea level

The climate changes are evident in Mumbai City as there is a significant change in the level of the sea as a result of rising temperature. It has been founded Mumbai city is one of the 12 listed cities that are to face the event of submergence as a result of extreme sea surface temperature rainfall and rapid organization.

Figure 1: flood in Mumbai
(Source:Psmsl.org, 2022).

As per the global standard it has been noted that there is a significant increase of the sea level by 3.4 every 10 years, but the sea-level rise in Mumbai city is found to be extraordinary as the sea level rises half a meter annually.

Figure2: drought in Mumbai
(Source: Science News, 2022)

The event of a flood is regular in Mumbai and the local climate strategies and noted disaster that is to befall on the city.

Figure 3: Sea level rise projection
(Source: Science News, 2022)

Historical data has found significant changes in the sea level and the prediction towards 2100 is found to be severe and may influence the city climate further.

Humidity level

High humidity influences the atmosphere with the ability to function as a greenhouse gas. It will reflect the heat towards the earth and Mumbai city experiences a high level of humidity and it increases the temperature level of the city.

Figure: impact of climate change on the humidity level
(Source: Impact of humidity level, 2022)

The rainfall in the monsoon is found to be excessive. Mumbai is always at a high risk of flood and IPCC has warned it accordingly.

Change in precipitation

Climate change is evident with the changes in the rainfall over Mumbai. The quantity of rainfall has declined significantly over the period leading to significant damage climatic condition of the city (Patel., 2022).

Figure 4: Rainfall frequency
(Source: Snapshot.epa.gov., 2022)

The GCM data has revealed that the intensity of the rainfall has declined over the period. There is a significant number of dry days and the frequency of the rainfall has been affected as time progresses. The pre-monsoon and post-monsoon seasons provide a significant scarcity of the flow of rainwater (Science News, 2022). From the perspective of a civil engineer, the city is widely affected. They are not capable of maintaining the drainage system when the monsoon season starts and affects the flow with waterlogging.

Figure: Temperature and humidity
Source: (Imdmumbai.gov.in, 2022)

The rainwater of 1936 in Mumbai city was found to be good enough but when there is a progress of time the rainwater flow has declined significantly in Mumbai city. Extreme weather conditions are a challenging situation for human society. The impact of climate change is more strong on human beings. It is human society that has contributed to the changes in the weather and climate conditions. The greenhouse gasses contribute to heavy rainfall. The building service engineerhas to face obstruction when there is high rainfall. The work could hardly progress in the season.

Figure 5: Models of climate change
(Source: Bury, Bauch and Anand, 2019)

There is a marked improvement in climate change. Accumulated rainfall has been affected by the entire period. The annual statistic has provided potential changes in the rainfall event. The Monsoon period is responsible for 96% of rainfall (Bhuyan et al., 2018).
Wind

The simulated weather data has provided a significant historical understanding of the climatic condition of Mumbai City. The normal speed of the wind in Mumbai is found to be between 15 km per hour and 10 km per hour. A potential change is noted in the rainy season when the wind speed is found to be 30 kmph and 25 kmph (Bury, Bauch and Anand, 2019). The great dominant average hourly wind direction in Mumbai throughout the year (Schaer and Pantakar, 2018). The average global wind speed has changed from 7 mph to 7.4 mph. The changes in the climatic condition influence car accelerated sea-level rise losses of sea ice and intense waves.

Temperature

Changes in the temperature level at the global level influence the climatic condition in a significant and effective way. The average temperature changes 2.4C over 124 years. The intergovernmental panel on climate change has reported a 4.6 degree Celsius rise in the May temperature within the context of the workplace (Patel., 2022). The temperature changes have significantly changed the rainfall heatwaves emission and extreme weather. It has been noted that Maharashtra has recorded moderate warming of 0.25C 0.42C. The data has revealed a consistent rise in temperature over the period since 1990. The potential changes in that temperature level have influenced the environment in a significant and effective way. The failure of HVAC will negatively influence the city and affect the environment of the city in a potentially negative way.

Figure 6: Average Change in temperature
(Source: Bhuyan et al., 2018)

It has been noted that it is a great threat to the consistent rise of the temperature. A 1.5 Celsius degree rise in the global temperature may have a significant impact on the development with water scarcity droughts floods and heatwaves. The changes in the rainfall and temperature will create a unique phenomenon that will submerge the city and affect the city in a potentially negative. It is a synergic effect that will have a potential impact on the city.

Social Impact

The study of urbanization and the use of vehicles cause significant damage to the existing environment within the context of the workplace (Bury, Bauch and Anand, 2019). The climate change profile has a significant impact on the organization. It is difficult for Mumbai City to manage the greater challenge in managing the health effects of extreme event livelihood security, food security, water security and cultural identity as a result of climatic changes.

Water Supplies

Mumbai city has been part of the hill and floodplain. Mumbai has grown to be a city with the highest vulnerability as a result of growing climate changes. Mumbai city has experienced longer summers and smaller winters (Rahaman et al., 2021). It has affected the city with moderate warming. The maximum temperature of the city rises 0.8 Celsius till 2030. India comes at the 7th position in the global climate risk index 2021. The population of the city is expected to grow 25% in the year 2021. Water supply has been a persistent issue in Mumbai. The absence of an appropriate quantity of water has affected the construction activities. The shortage of water results from the high demand for industry and activities (Patel., 2022). Mumbai city has experienced 96% rainfall in the monsoon season and for the rest of the year, there is a significant water scarcity (Science News., 2022). The changes in the climatic condition influence the water allocation and affect the organization in managing the water supply. Social progress is obstructed as society does not find enough water supply. Mumbai city is always affected by the water crisis. The drinking water supply is the lowest.

Food Supplies

Mumbai city hardly produces a significant quantity of food and it relies on the other rural region and cities for the food supply. Food production is found to be at risk and the production and growth of maize wheat and other crops are declining. The global climatic changes have affected the environment in a significant and effective way making it more difficult for the population to obtain food (Bhuyan et al., 2018). Agricultural development is affected as a result of climate changes. The loss of agricultural productivity affects efficiency within the context of the workplace.

Figure 7: impact of climate change hunger
(Source: Bhuyan et al., 2018)

Hunger and poverty increase over the period and they have a significant impact on the consumer at the global level. The food supply in Mumbai is abundant as it collects a large number of products from external suppliers (Patel., 2022). Biodiversity is widely effective as a result of changes in the capability of the soil in producing food. Climate change has a diversity in time on the food supply and affects the level of hunger in the City(Schaer and Pantakar, 2018). The urban population of the city is always affected by the food shortage.

Refugee movements

The World Bank identifies the people who have moved from one place to another place to avoid hunger and deprivation. The refugees moving for climate change are considered to be internally displaced people. The weather-related disaster creates climate refugees and Mumbai city has already experienced climate change and is also expected to submerge into the sea(Khosla and Bhardwaj, 2019). Bangladesh is found to have further predicted the submergence of 17% of the country by 2050.
Climate refugees in India are estimated to be 39.7 million people in 2022 (Mi et al., 2019). A large number of people is moving from one place to another with the issue of climate change and weather events. The major city of India is found at severe risk within the context of the changing climatic situation.

The action was taken by the government

Action against climate change is essentially required to cope with the existing problem and overcome the barrier of progress and development. The Government of India is found to have taken an effective and positive approach to the management of climate change. The government is found to have undertaken solar mission energy-efficient product sustainable mission of habitat National water mission green India and sustainable agriculture (Sudipta et al., 2021). These are the potential means of the development of the organization within the context of the climate. The global consumption of oil has been effectively managed with the proper use of a variety of products.

Conclusion

It can be said that the growing impact of climate changes influence the capability and efficiency of the city in obtaining the resources. The government's decision to develop sustainable practices in the area of solar system water crisis management and natural habitat will improve the organization in a significant and effective. The impact of political instability, lack of proper initiatives towards the management of climate change and insufficient participation has affected the organzaition in a significant way. The high risk and uncertainty will be seen if the government is not following the strict decisions.

Reference List

Bhuyan, M. D. I., Islam, M. M., and Bhuiyan, M. E. K. 2018. A trend analysis of temperature and rainfall to predict climate change for the northwestern region of Bangladesh. American Journal of Climate Change, 7(2), 115-134.https://www.scirp.org/journal/paperinformation.aspx?paperid=83822

Bury, T. M., Bauch, C. T., and Anand, M. 2019. Charting pathways to climate change mitigation in a coupled socio-climate model. PLoS computational biology, 15(6), e1007000.https://journals.plos.org/ploscompbiol/article?id=10.1371/journal.pcbi.1007000

Mi, Z., Guan, D., Liu, Z., Liu, J., Viguié, V., Fromer, N., and Wang, Y. 2019. Cities: The core of climate change mitigation. Journal of Cleaner Production, 207, 582-589.https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0959652618330488

News, C., and News, m. 2022. Mumbai, Konkan region witnessed 3.7mm sea-level rise every year between 2006-2018 | Mumbai News - Times of India. The Times of India. Retrieved 22 March 2022, from https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/city/mumbai/mumbai-konkan-region-witnessed-3-7mm-sea-level-rise-every-year-between-2006-2018/articleshow/88477942.cms.

Patel. 2022. Mumbai: The city that was born of the sea may eventually be consumed by it. Scroll. in. Retrieved 22 March 2022, from https://scroll.in/magazine/1004151/mumbai-the-city-that-was-born-of-the-sea-may-eventually-be-consumed-by-it.

Science News. 2022. As waters rise, coastal megacities like Mumbai face catastrophe. Science News. Retrieved 22 March 2022, from https://www.sciencenews.org/article/waters-rise-coastal-megacities-mumbai-face-catastrophe.

Schaer, C., and Pantakar, A. 2018. Promoting private sector engagement in climate change adaptation and flood resilience—a case study of innovative approaches applied by MSMEs in Mumbai, India. In Theory and Practice of Climate Adaptation (pp. 175-191). Springer, Cham.snapshot.epa.gov. 2022. 19january2017snapshot.epa.gov. Retrieved 22 March 2022, from https://19january2017snapshot.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2016-08/fisheries-location.png.

Adam, H.N., Movik, S., Parthasarathy, D., Narayanan, N.C. and Mehta, L., 2021. Climate change and uncertainty in India's maximum city, Mumbai. In The Politics of Climate Change and Uncertainty in India (pp. 134-160). Routledge.https://library.oapen.org/bitstream/handle/20.500.12657/52014/9781000531503.pdf?sequence=1#page=155

Schaer, C. and Pantakar, A., 2018. Promoting private sector engagement in climate change adaptation and flood resilience—a case study of innovative approaches applied by MSMEs in Mumbai, India. In Theory and Practice of Climate Adaptation (pp. 175-191). Springer, Cham.https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Sudipta-Chakraborty-8/publication/353345105_3_Impact_of_Climate_Change_on_Sea_Level_Rise_along_the_Coastline_of_Mumbai_City_India/links/60f65a929541032c6d50b3ad/3-Impact-of-Climate-Change-on-Sea-Level-Rise-along-the-Coastline-of-Mumbai-City-India.pdf

Sudipta, C., Kambekar, A.R. and Arnab, S., 2021. Effect of Climate Change and Sea Level Rise Along the Coastline of Mumbai in 2050-using MIKE 21. Journal of Offshore
Structure and Technology, 8(3), pp.55-64p.https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Sudipta-Chakraborty-8/publication/358919702_Offshore_Structure_and_Technology_Effect_of_Climate_Change_and_Sea_Level_Rise_Along_the_Coastline_of_Mumbai_in_2050-using_MIKE_21/links/621d92362542ea3cacb9ccc5/Offshore-Structure-and-Technology-Effect-of-Climate-Change-and-Sea-Level-Rise-Along-the-Coastline-of-Mumbai-in-2050-using-MIKE-21.pdf

Khosla, R. and Bhardwaj, A., 2019. Urbanization in the time of climate change: Examining the response of Indian cities. Wiley Interdisciplinary Reviews: Climate Change, 10(1), p.e560.https://wires.onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.1002/wcc.560

Rahaman, S., Jahangir, S., Haque, M.S., Chen, R. and Kumar, P., 2021. Spatio-temporal changes of green spaces and their impact on the urban environment of Mumbai, India. Environment, development and sustainability, 23(4), pp.6481-6501.https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s10668-020-00882-z
impact of humidity level, 2022. impact of humidity level as a result of climate change - Google Search. [online] Google.com. Available at: <https://www.google.com/search?q=impact+of+humidity+level+as+a+result+result+of+climate+change&sxsrf=APq-WBv78BVQEsslD7CSq17br2H7zEVbFQ:1647949709480&source=lnms&tbm=isch&sa=X&ved=2ahUKEwjD86mI09n2AhXSmeYKHT5MADUQ_AUoAnoECAEQBA&biw=1280&bih=568&dpr=1#imgrc=rGM45OQTQpgzDM> [Accessed 22 March 2022].

Imdmumbai.gov.in, 2022. Official website of Regional Meteorological Centre Mumbai, Government of India. [online] Imdmumbai.gov.in. Available at: <http://imdmumbai.gov.in/scripts/latest.asp?releaseId=EWD> [Accessed 22 March 2022].

MEM604 Engineering Management Capstone Assignment Sample

Individual/Group - Individual
Length - 2500 words (+/- 10%)

Learning Outcomes

The Subject Learning Outcomes demonstrated by successful completion of the task below include:

b) Evaluate and apply research ethics in engineering management research.

c) Assess and employ complex research design and methods and problem solving skills in a research project.

d) Critically reflect and apply learning and knowledge from previous MEM subjects to an engineering management?based research topic in a real business environment.

Assessment Task for Online Assignment Help

Completion and acceptance of a final research project report in 2500 words (+/- 10%) to include: the title of the research topic; aim of the research: research questions addressed; methodology, research ethics, research limitations; description of the research completed; findings and recommendations; research gaps and further research required; references.

Please refer to the Task Instructions for details on how to complete this task.

Instruction

To complete this assessment, you need to organise and write a report on the research that you have done throughout the subject, including building on the research that you presented in Assessment 2.

Below is a guide to structuring the report:

1. Student name, student number, academic supervisor
2. Introduction
3. Title of the research topic
4. Project purpose and objectives
5. Research questions
6. Methodology
7. Summary of research conducted against research questions
8. Findings
9. Recommendations
10. Conclusions
11. Further research required
12. References
13. Attachments

Solution

Introduction

A project is undertaken to solve an issue or meet customer requirements. The task for Capstone was conducted to measure sustainability management to maintain an adequate supply chain for Tesco. Tesco has a complex supply chain connecting with varied local, regional, and international suppliers; hence requires optimisation and utilisation to reduce costs and waste while protecting and promoting related communities. The project has been conducted to understand issues that Tesco faces in its supply chain and measures it can adopt to promote sustainability at all levels.

Title of Research Topic- “SUSTAINABILITY MANAGEMENT FOR SUPPLY CHAIN EFFICIENCY OF TESCO”

Project purpose and Objectives

The project's purpose was to signify sustainability management to promote effectiveness in Tesco's supply chain. Currently, Tesco has been making efforts to manage its supply chain by embedding sustainability principles. Although the retail giant has faced many issues, the ongoing pandemic has increased. It has become essential for Tesco to measure gaps at all levels to improve cost- efficiencies, reduce wastage and protect all stakeholders' interests.

Objectives of Study

The purpose helped to develop project objectives that have been discussed below.

• Evaluating challenges Tesco faces that impact the supply chain hinders business growth.
• Ascertaining impacts of sustainability on Tesco’s overall supply chain management.
• Analysing measures that could solve supply chain issues faced by Tesco provides a guideline for companies operating in the retail sector.

Research Questions

To achieve meaningful insights for the project, research questions were developed.

• Question 1: What sustainability challenges in supply chain management are currently being faced by Tesco?

• Question 2: What are a sustainable supply chain's potential impacts on achieving business growth?

• Question 3: How do Tesco measure requirements and maintain an efficient supply chain?

• Question 4: How new and advanced technology will benefit the supply chain management of retail companies like Tesco?

Methodology

Research onion to choose appropriate methods for conducting research for the project. Considering the layers, from the external to an internal layer of the onion, interpretivism philosophy was used for understanding factual information and interpreting it accordingly. The research approach of the deductive paradigm was applied to realise existing sustainable practices and align the supply chain with a real-time company named Tesco Plc.

It was essential to align the project study’s aims and objectives while saving time; secondary research methods were used. Since the second strategy was used, techniques like qualitative and descriptive were used while finding articles and browsing company reports and other information online. The descriptive and qualitative tools have helped collect information while making the findings more inclusive, logical, usable, and validated. The innermost circle of the research onion was data collection and analysis methods. The secondary information was collected and published from 2012 to 2022 online. In addition, Tesco's website, reports, peer-reviewed journals, and publicly available articles were used. All the pieces were analysed through descriptive and qualitative tools for deriving meaningful insights.

Summary of Findings

Collected information helped to answer the research questions identified in the initial research proposal. The findings helped to understand that Tesco Plc has been facing supply chain disruptions owing to Brexit, pandemics, staff shortages and other factors. There is a lack of technological integration within the supply chain, which has distribution challenges and hence, many stores’ lacks supply to fill up spaces on the shelves. An efficient supply chain is essential to maintain quality products, brand reputation and customer expectations. Hence, Tesco Plc uses storage information technology systems which help it to order directly from the manufacturer, thus, retaining the quality without the fuss of packaging, change of temperature and others. Although, it lacks innovation and use of technology in the entire supply chain.

It has created an accelerator tracker program for tracking innovations with suppliers in the food supply chain to reduce wastage and costs and improve optimisation. Although, the sustainability tracking could be done with the UN's tracker for Sustainable Development Goals. In addition, investing in advanced technologies like Block Chain and AI could improve transparency, interoperability, and cost-effectiveness while fulfilling sustainable business goals.
Findings

Challenges Faced by Tesco

In 2021, Tesco faced significant supply chain disruption when shoppers found most of the shelves empty. Food and consumer goods shelves were open, and Tesco claimed that distribution challenges had led to such a crisis. This indicates that Tesco lacked long-term planning and trustable relations with suppliers, which led to supply and distribution issues across all stores. To address the problems, Tesco improved rail distribution, providing a bonus of £1000 to drivers. The supply chain and distribution challenges have increased with Brexit, allowing only two trips across the EU borders in a week.

In addition, the supply chain issues have increased with high shipping costs and blocking Suez Canal (Reuters, 2021). This became acute when Tesco and other retailers in the UK faced problems like staff shortages that impacted operations in warehousing, packing and other related functions. Since the pandemic accompanied with Ukraine -Russia crisis, all petrol pumping stations are facing a higher crisis due to lack of supply. This has impacted the transportation of goods, consumer goods and other products in Large or heavy vehicles requiring a substantial amount of fuel.

In this view, amidst the lockdown, uncertainty and a series of extended lockdowns provided the impetus to sell more, where the sales and profits were recorded at 16.6%. Even though the sales of Tesco increased, the company faced acute supply chain disruption, which impacted its operational and other functions (Clayton, 2021).

Tesco procures its supplies from different underdeveloped nations or lower socio-economic regions where unethical sourcing is common. The sustainability challenge is further increased by using heavy and oversized good vehicles, which emit high GHG and pollute the environment. Packaging and transportation materials must also be shifted to sustainable, recyclable, and reusable products.

Potential Impacts of The Supply Chain on Achieving Business Growth

In recent times, Tesco Plc has had many issues in its supply chain and distribution functions driven by internal and external forces. As mentioned, most of Tesco Plc's shelves were empty during Christmas. If such incidents occur frequently, consumer purchasing from competitor stores like Aldi will increase, reducing the market share of Tesco Plc in the UK. This will result in a shift in consumer preferences.

Supplier relationship is the core factor that severally impacts the business, as Tesco Plc resells the manufactured products at the lowest prices. Aldi sells the same products at lower prices, while Amazon provides faster delivery of groceries to its members. Hence, the suppliers might shift to other opportunities like the rise of e-commerce and competitive pricing offered by Aldi and others.

In addition, supermarkets are obligated to pay 1% of the revenue generated in the UK owing to the mistreatment of suppliers. Hence, optimisation and an efficient supply chain are essential to retain customers, strengthen supplier relations, satisfy stakeholders and cope with stiff competition in the retail industry (Topham, 2021). Sustainability is vital to improving brand reputation and reaping short-, medium- and long-term objectives.

In this view, Tesco has initiated many strategies to cope with its sustainable supply chain. Tesco Plc is the first retailer to offer sustainability associated with the finances of the supply chain. Thus, the company motivates its suppliers through monetary bonuses for applying approaches that reduce GHG emissions (SDG, 2022). Besides, Tesco Plc has collaborated with WWF and has launched an accelerator programme for tracking food systems and inventions.

These initiatives are in the initial stages and are expected to improve business goals and objectives. Hence, such strategies will prove effective in the long run and will positively impact be achieving business objectives. In addition, if supply chain management sustainability practices are efficiently embedded in the long run, Tesco Plc might benefit from the following reasons.

Reduction in Overall Environmental Impacts

EU has tightened environmental norms, which has obligated retailers to reduce emissions. Thus, following sustainability in the supply chain will help align with international and regional laws and enable cost savings. It helps to reduce labour costs by more than 50%, along with an improvement in profit margins by 0.25%. Hence, reducing wastage and improving efficiency during transportation through good heavy vehicles.

Improving Supply Continuity

Diversifying the supply chain in Tesco's operation avoids over-reliance on the singular chain. The pandemic to Brexit and other factors has disrupted the supply chain and distribution challenges. Tesco has already initiated diversification by collaborating with sustainable supply chain start-ups, which helps the company to maintain resilience in meeting business objectives (Nutburn, 2019).

Improving Business Reputation

Since Tesco Plc has initiated sustainable supply chain strategies, improving the lives of people linked at different levels of the supply chain will help enhance business growth. The supply chain efficiency improves brand reputation, which enhances business growth. A high brand reputation will help rebuild trust and cope with the competition posed by the UK retail industry (Nutburn, 2019).

Companies like Tesco Plc need to embed sustainable supply chains like ISO 14001 to identify gaps that could hinder efficient green savings. This accreditation supports environmental compliance, improves brand reputation, and opens more business opportunities.

Measuring Performance and Embedding Sustainable, Efficient Supply Chain

Sustainability in the supply chain is a newer concept for Tesco Plc as it initiated the strategy after facing a supply and distribution-related crisis. It has launched accelerator programs for tracking food systems to measure its sustainability initiative with start-up companies. Since Tesco Plc operates in different categories, it sources food products from local farmers and farmlands. Thus, accelerator programs will help to track innovation in food sources, thus reducing impacts on food security systems (Tesco Plc. 2022).

In addition, the innovation connection was built by Tesco Plc in collaboration with WWF to address barriers to the sustainable innovation of food supply chains. This strategy will also help to scale ideas and technology for which the start-up supplier companies must pair with pitch scale up- projects. These partners will be provided funds with £150,000 to scale innovation (Hart, 2021).

The current tracking program is only linked to the food supply chain, although its overall supply chain still lacks a measuring system for aligning with sustainability. Hence, United Nations has developed SDG targets that will enable global development (SDG, 2022). Tesco Plc could use the SDG tracker to measure its performance in different environmental-related goals. Tesco Plc can align its sustainable goals with 17 developed of them developed by the UN that will help to protect the environment while also achieving desired business goals (SDG, 2022).

Benefits of New and Advanced Technology in Supply Chain Management in Retail Companies

The supply chain has a vital role to play in maintaining product quality. Well-organised supply chains and distribution channels help reduce waste and manage costs while ensuring product quality. Tesco Plc faced supply chain crises when most of its shelves were empty. Thus, it revamped its supply chain, which could help procure supplies before the open frame. Although, the pandemic and other external forces again imposed a crisis that resulted in delays in deliveries and loss of opportunities (Supply Chain. In. 2020).

Besides, new storage technologies helped to retain this crisis to a large extent. This technology allows Tesco Plc to receive perishable items directly from production units, reducing wastage, packing and additional time required during distribution (Tesco Plc. 2022). This has helped to provide fresh products from manufacturers located within the UK and helped Tesco Plc to combat some parts of the crisis that was imposed due to national and international lockdowns.

Although, there is a lack of advanced technologies that could help cope with the crisis. Big data can enable historical information to study changing trends and related factors. In addition, artificial intelligence can be used in varied ways, like planning demand and understanding purchasing decisions. In recent times, Tesco Plc has used AI in storage technology; however entire functions should be embedded with such technologies. This will help in further optimisation and efficient supply chain.

Blockchain technology is considered the future of supply, which will help companies like Tesco Plc drive supply chain transparency. It will help to improve traceability, thus, reducing loss and enhancing visibility (Deloitte, 2017). It will minimise complex paperwork and help Tesco Plc lower its administrative costs. Blockchain technology will help Tesco Plc improve interoperability while enabling firms to embed sustainability principles.

Recommendations

Tesco Plc requires developing Sustainable supply chain goals, which should be aligned with those 14 objectives set by the UN. This will help meet local and international environmental norms that will promote the brand reputation and overall community development and optimise the supply chain. UN tracking tools are recommended for measuring sustainability goals and developing new milestones.

In addition, Tesco must adopt and invest in new technologies like Blockchain, AI, and significant to improve suppliers' transparency, predict trends, reduce wastage and costs, to optimise inventories to reduce the incidence of empty shelves. The company recently lacks innovation in the supply chain; hence, distribution in all stores is affected by changes in the internal and external environment. Thus, newer technologies will help build transparency, thereby planning alternative strategies without compromising customer expectations and profits.

Tesco Plc is suggested to embed sustainability within the supply chain, which will help to build resiliency and promote growth. In addition, Tesco Plc needs to develop strategies for ethical conduct while procuring from lower socio-economic regions. The supply chain management should aim to foster all development while coping with the competition.

Supplier codes are suggested to be developed to secure long-term relationships with suppliers while ensuring the right quality and quantity are delivered within the requested time frame. The existing supplier base should be trained on modern technologies to adopt sustainable and contemporary methods to promote higher efficiency.
Conclusion

Tesco Plc is a renowned retail company in the UK facing major supply chain issues linked with sustainability. The project aimed to understand the sustainable challenge faced within the supply chain of Tesco Plc along with the benefits of new technology, measuring the goals and impacts of the supply chain on business objectives. Tesco Plc lacks innovation and alignment with global sustainable goals. The lack of appropriate strategies has implicated the application of modern techniques to improve transparency and costs while building the resiliency of the supply chains. Tesco Plc needs to align its sustainable goals with the UN to acquire global standards in supply chain management. Also, Blockchain is one of the modern technologies considered to be the future of supply chains. Hence, the company should invest in tools to optimise supply chain operations.

References

Clayton, I. (2021). Empty shelves at Tesco amid supply chain issues. https://www.oxfordmail.co.uk/news/19692677.empty-shelves-tesco-amid-supply-chain-issues/ (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

Deloitte, (2017). Using blockchain to drive supply chain transparency. https://www2.deloitte.com/us/en/pages/operations/articles/blockchain-supply-chain-innovation.html (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

Hart, C. (2021). How Tesco is rewarding suppliers for green performance. https://www.cips.org/supply-management/news/2021/april/how-tesco-is-rewarding-suppliers-for-green-performance/ (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

Nutburn, M. (2019). Five benefits of a sustainable supply chain. https://www.cips.org/supply-management/opinion/2019/july/five-benefits-of-a-sustainable-supply-chain/ (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

Reuters, (2021). Tesco defies supply chain challenges to lift profit outlook. https://retail.economictimes.indiatimes.com/news/food-entertainment/grocery/tesco-defies-supply-chain-challenges-to-lift-profit-outlook/86809651 (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

SDG. (2022). Measuring progress towards the Sustainable Development Goals. https://sdg-tracker.org/ (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

Supply Chain. In. (2020). Tesco’s new supply chain plan for fresher produce and reduced food waste. https://supplychaindigital.com/digital-supply-chain/tescos-new-supply-chain-plan-fresher-produce-and-reduced-food-waste (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

Tesco Plc. 2022. Tesco opens up supply chain to sustainability start-ups. https://www.tescoplc.com/news/2022/tesco-opens-up-supply-chain-to-sustainability-start-ups/ (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

Topham, G. (2021). Supply chain crisis: PM brings in ex-Tesco boss to ease shortages. https://www.theguardian.com/business/2021/oct/08/supply-chain-crisis-uk-government-brings-in-ex-tesco-boss-to-help-sort-issues (Retrieved 09 August 2022).

MBA501 Dynamic Strategy and Disruptive Innovation Assignment Sample

Assessment Type - Individual
Length - 2000 words (+/- 10% allowable range)
Weighting: 40%

Assessment Description

This assessment focuses on stakeholder engagement (workshop 05), business-level strategies (workshop 07) and corporate-level strategies (workshop 08). After identifying key stakeholders of Unilever, you need to develop a stakeholder engagement plan covering three stakeholders by incorporating the template discussed in workshop 05. Based on Porter’s five generic strategy framework, you need to identify the business level strategy adopted by one business unit/product group from Unilever's Beauty and Personal Care Division. You must provide an analysis of the suitability of this strategy. After that, you need to identify at least 2-to 3 corporate-level strategic initiatives undertaken by the Beauty and Personal Care Division over the last decade. You must analyse the purpose of these corporate-level strategic initiatives in the context of the template discussed in workshop 08.

Assessment Instructions for Best Assignment Help

Need to identify 7-9 stakeholders of Unilever – Division Beauty and Personal Care and select

A. Introduction to Unilever – Division Beauty and Personal Care Provided a concise introduction to Unilever. This introduction should include a brief history, scale of the operation (revenue, staff strength, etc.), products/ services, and industry dynamics. This section should not exceed 400 words.

Need to identify 7-9 stakeholders of Unilever – Division Beauty and Personal Care and select three stakeholders for engagement planning. Provide a brief introduction to the stakeholders.

You must utilise the stakeholder engagement planning template discussed in workshop 05: include the completed templates in the appendix. The report should contain a summary of the engagement plan for each stakeholder. This section should not exceed 600 words.

C. Business-level strategies adopted by Unilever – Division Beauty and Personal Care

Based on Porter’s Five Generic Strategy framework discussed in workshop 05, identify the business-level strategy adopted by one business unit/ product group of Unilever – Division Beauty and Personal Care. You need to indicate the rationale for determining the chosen strategy and critique the suitability. This section should not exceed 500 words.

Please note: you are only expected to explore one business unit/ product group when analyzing the business-level strategies.

D. Corporate-level strategic initiatives Unilever

Analyse the corporate-level strategic initiatives of Unilever by exploring past activities - greenfield expansions, joint ventures, strategic alliances, mergers & acquisitions, etc., over the last ten years. You must identify at least three such initiatives discussed in workshop 08. You must incorporate the template used in workshop 08 to review these initiatives’ purpose: the completed template should be included in the appendix. This section should not exceed 700 words.

E. Recommendations

Based on your analysis, provide recommendations to Unilever management on stakeholder engagement, and strategic initiatives that can defend the competitive position and stimulate growth. This section should not exceed 300 words. There is no need for a conclusion.

Solution

A. Introduction to Unilever

Unilever plc is a British multinational consumer goods company with headquarters in London. Food, condiments, ice cream, cleaning supplies, cosmetics, and personal care goods are all available from Unilever. Products made by Unilever, the world's largest soap maker, may be purchased in over 190 different nations. Lifebuoy, Dove, Sunsilk, Knorr, Lux, Sunlight, Rexona/Degree, are just some of Unilever's well-known brands (Web.archive.org, 2022).

Unilever is made up of the Foods and Beverages, Home Care, and Beauty & Personal Care businesses. R&D facilities may be found in China, India, the Netherlands, the United Kingdom, and the United States. Unilever was formed on September 2, 1929, when the British soap company Lever Brothers and the Dutch margarine company Margarine Unie amalgamated. In the latter half of the twentieth century, the company started to branch out abroad and diversify its product offerings away from the production of oils and fats (Bloomberg.org, 2022). It has acquired several firms since its founding in 1971, including Lipton, Brooke Bond, Chesebrough-Ponds, Best Foods The specialised chemicals section of Unilever was sold to ICI in 1997. Under Paul Polman's leadership in the 2010s, the company gradually shifted its focus away from food brands showing sluggish performance and into health and beauty companies (Ackerman, 2020).

As well as being included in the FTSE 100 Index, Unilever is also listed on the London Stock Exchange as its primary trading venue. Due to Unilever's recent Euronext Amsterdam IPO, the company is now tracked by the AEX index. On 30 November 2020, Unilever announced that all of its Dutch and UK operations will be fully integrated under a single London-based organisation. Unilever has had an underlying sales increase of 4.5% this fiscal year, bringing in 52.4 billion Euros in revenue. The company's core operating margin is 17.4 percent [Figure 1].

Figure 1: Background of Unilever
(Source: Unilever, 2022)

B. Stakeholder engagement plan

In the Beauty and Personal Care division of Unilever, working collaboratively with their stakeholders such as their employees, customers, investors, authorities and legislators, suppliers, researchers, NGOs, communities, and peer companies is essential to achieving their mission and growing their company (Leonidou et al. 2020). The three stakeholders identified for the engagement planning are the customers, employees, and the government in this report.

Customers

To guide their innovation and marketing efforts, Unilever has a dedicated team working on Consumer and Marketing Insights. Their 37 internal People Data Centres, for instance, examine information gleaned from social media, Consumer Carelines, as well as digital marketing to inform their responses to customer comments (Unilever, 2022).

Employees

The results of the annual UniVoice poll are a vital resource for gauging the workforce's morale. Their 2021 UniVoice staff survey saw around 90,000. Excellent levels of staff engagement were maintained across the company, putting them in the top 25% for engagement relative to industry norms. To ensure that all employees have frequent and direct access to the CEO and ULE, they organise biweekly 'Your call' meetings during which the CEO and ULE take questions from the staff and provide answers (Unilever, 2022).

Government

Communication with government, authorities, and NGOs, as well as political activity and contributions, are covered under our Code. These dealings must be sanctioned, following all relevant laws and Values, and conducted openly (Lavery, 2018). They do not contribute to or endorse any political party, politician, or interest group. In addition to stating publicly that no monetary donations were made to political candidates in 2021, they also provide this information in the Annual Report and Financial Statements (Unilever, 2022).

Based on the above discussion, the engagement plan has been designed for the three stakeholders, including the stakeholders' major expectations and how those expectations can be converted into desirable outcomes [Refer to appendix 1].

C. Business-level strategies adopted by Unilever to critically evaluate the business-level strategy adopted by the Beauty and Personal Care division of Unilever, Dove is chosen as a business unit.

Cost leadership

In order to get an advantage over the competition, cost leadership advocates cutting costs to the bone. Dove has a cost-leadership strategy across a wide range of consumer markets (Agwu and Onwuegbuzie, 2017).

Maintaining market supremacy via strategic value chain management is the primary goal of implementing this strategy. Dove is able to increase its market share by focusing on the middle class, which makes up the bulk of the consumer market in most countries, thanks to this strategy. Cost is an important factor for middle-class consumers, thus becoming a market leader in this area is essential for catering to their needs (Hacklin et al. 2018).
Dove has built a solid competitive edge due to the widespread popularity of its products and the simplicity with which they can be purchased all over the globe. Dove not only maintains competitive pricing by minimising production costs and maximising delivery efficiency but also regularly offers discounts and coupons to achieve sales targets and alleviate pressure from its closest competitors. As a result of promotions and sales, customers will hopefully become more familiar with the brand and purchase more of the product (Ze et al. 2018).

Dove's cost leadership strategy has been discussed at length, and the numerous advantages of this generic marketing approach have been described, including the company's ability to quickly build brand awareness, increase its customer base, boost consumer demand, and meet its sales goals. Even though cost leadership is highlighted as the primary strategy in the study, the firm also employs the differentiation strategy to provide the groundwork for a sustained competitive advantage in the fiercely comparative global consumer market (Omsa et al. 2017).

Figure 2: Porter’s generic model
(Source: Islami et al. 2020)

Differentiation

Dove has been successful in broadening its customer base by taking a secondary generic strategy based on the brand's unique selling points. Dove sets itself apart from rivals by marketing its goods in a way that highlights its distinctive benefits. The company, which has earned a good name for itself in the industry, takes steps to set its wares apart from the competition. Dove spends much on marketing, advertising, and celebrity endorsement to differentiate itself from other brands (Ze et al. 2018).

Marketing and public relations efforts highlight the company's lengthy history in the market, the durability of its brand identity, and its worldwide presence as competitive advantages. The brand's logo is also a distinguishing feature. The logo has done wonders for the brand's recognition and success among consumers since it is both unique and easy to recall. One key differentiator is that the brand's underlying ideals have remained consistent throughout all of its incarnations.

D. Corporate-level strategic initiatives Unilever

Greenfield investments

In order to take advantage of the reduced corporation tax rates that apply to greenfield industrial investments, Unilever decided to establish a new subsidiary. The company behind Dove shampoo and Rin bar has announced plans to establish a wholly owned subsidiary with an approved share capital of Rs2,000 crore and an initial investment of between Rs500 and Rs800 crore to establish production facilities for current product categories (The New Indian Express, 2022). The combination of the reduced tax and the 'Make in India' drive makes it possible for the company to make investments that would have been too costly to justify before (The New Indian Express, 2022). In order to take advantage of growth prospects in today's dynamic business climate, a new subsidiary has been established, which will allow the parent firm to become more nimble and customer-centric. As of now, the Rs 38,000 crore firm employs over 18,000 employees across its more than 28 production locations spread around the nation (The New Indian Express, 2022).

Acquisitions and mergers

In 2022, Unilever said that it had reached an agreement to purchase a controlling interest in Nutrafol, a market leader in hair health products. As of right now, Unilever has a 13.2% ownership in Nutrafol via its investment arm Unilever Ventures. Hair health problems affect around 114% of U.S. customers, making them the most talked-about aspect of personal grooming for both sexes (Unilever, 2022). Nutrafol is in a great position to expand its multichannel presence, which includes a network of more than 3,000 doctors who sell its products, thanks to its cutting-edge in-house digital skills and scalable technology. Nutrafol is well-positioned for long-term, scalable, and lucrative expansion because of its dedicated client base (Unilever, 2022).
Partnerships

The 2020 launch of Unilever's Partner with Purpose (UPWP) initiative marked a new phase in the company's commitment to purpose-led partnerships, which it hopes will continue to drive cutting-edge innovation, preserve and restore natural resources, and normalise sustainable lifestyles throughout the world. With UPWP, the company can rapidly adapt to changing customer preferences because of a more modern approach to forming partnerships. To fulfill its lofty promises and foster mutual progress, they are becoming closer to its partners via this initiative by fostering more accountable and open innovation (Unilever, 2022).

To improve life for everyone, they are constructing a brand-new partner ecosystem. Partnerships with them may be formed on a one-to-one level or as part of a larger network of businesses. Regardless of the context, they count on all of their collaborators to share their commitment to fostering mutual development and competitiveness while also being a positive factor in the lives of people and the earth. They can and must accomplish both if they work together. Unilever's three Compass beliefs—that brands with purpose flourish, people with meaning thrive, and organizations with purpose last—form the basis for the UPWP initiative (Unilever, 2022).

As a company, they are dedicated to ethical and open innovation. Its ambitious sustainability objectives are defined in its Positive Beauty, Clean Future, and Force for Good division strategies, and they are working with its partners to develop and implement solutions to help them accomplish those goals.
For instance, Quix, a Chilean Home Care brand, collaborated with specialty chemicals firm Evonik to introduce the first home cleaning solution in the world to incorporate Rhamnolipid. This foamy ingredient is both renewable and biodegradable (Unilever, 2022).

To achieve their plastics objectives, they partnered with Viridor, UK-based recycling, resources, and waste management firm, to provide more PCR capability to the UK. They collaborated with Nextek, a community resource management expert, to make the black plastic wrapping for Unilever's TRESemmé and Lynx products identifiable by recycling facility scanners. This new technology might lead to an annual increase in the recycling of plastic bottles by roughly 2,500 metric tonnes (Unilever, 2022).

E. Recommendations

Stakeholder engagement

Various project activities may elicit different responses from stakeholders; understanding these reactions and developing strategies to address them can help the company to avoid unwarranted criticism. When stakeholders' environments or expectations of a company's behaviour change, they may respond in various ways (Leonidou et al. 2020). The company should match the list of stakeholders with the factors that might potentially set them off, such as construction noise, dust, or effects on their quality of life. The company needs to calculate the potential effect these responses will have on the project or strategy, and decide whether specific communication, mitigation, or a different approach is needed (Lavery, 2018).

Strategic initiatives to defend competitive position

Though cutting costs is a common strategy for firms looking to differentiate themselves, sometimes the opposite approach is the best one. "Prestige pricing" refers to the practise of charging higher prices in order to attract customers who may not otherwise consider a brand or product because of its lower price. The only exception is that the goods must be worth the higher price they want to charge (Distanont and Khongmalai, 2020). Moreover, in order to look authoritative and credible, businesses are frequently urged to utilise data points and statistics in their marketing material. A company like Unilever may be the one people use as an example. Gathering market data is simple with the use of programmes like Google's Consumer Surveys and SurveyMonkey; nonetheless, it is important to follow basic surveying and sample standards (Hagiu and Wright, 2020).

Simulating growth

Establishing a customer loyalty programme is a great way to keep the current clientele happy. It might perhaps help the company bring in new customers, too. It will benefit the business in the long term if they provide their customers with a reason to spend more revenue with them. Thus, Unilever should create a compelling customer loyalty programme and make it available to the current clientele (Kalogiannidis, 2021).

References

Ackerman, N., 2020. ‘An important day’: Unilever announces completion of unification plans. [online] Evening Standard. Available at: <https://www.standard.co.uk/business/unilever-unification-completion-london-b114027.html> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Agwu, M.E. and Onwuegbuzie, H., 2017. Strategic importance of functional level strategies as effective tools for the achievement of organizational goals. Archives of Business Research, 5(12).

Bloomberg.com. 2022. Bloomberg - Are you a robot?. [online] Available at: <https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2014-12-04/unilever-plans-to-split-spreads-business-into-standalone-unit?leadSource=uverify%20wall> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Distanont, A. and Khongmalai, O., 2020. The role of innovation in creating a competitive advantage. Kasetsart Journal of Social Sciences, 41(1), pp.15-21.

Hacklin, F., Björkdahl, J. and Wallin, M.W., 2018. Strategies for business model innovation: How firms reel in migrating value. Long range planning, 51(1), pp.82-110.

Hagiu, A. and Wright, J., 2020. When data creates competitive advantage. Harvard business review, 98(1), pp.94-101.

Islami, X., Mustafa, N. and Topuzovska Latkovikj, M., 2020. Linking Porter’s generic strategies to firm performance. Future Business Journal, 6(1), pp.1-15.

Kalogiannidis, S., 2021. Business Trust and Communication as Predictors of Business Growth. WSEAS Transactions on Business and Economics, 18, pp.1512-1522.
Lavery, J.V., 2018. Building an evidence base for stakeholder engagement. Science, 361(6402), pp.554-556.

Leonidou, E., Christofi, M., Vrontis, D. and Thrassou, A., 2020. An integrative framework of stakeholder engagement for innovation management and entrepreneurship development. Journal of Business Research, 119, pp.245-258.

Omsa, S., Abdullah, I.H. and Jamali, H., 2017. Five competitive forces model and the implementation of Porter’s generic strategies to gain firm performances.

The New Indian Express. 2022. Hindustan Unilever to set up manufacturing arm to avail benefits of lower corporate tax rates. [online] Available at: <https://www.newindianexpress.com/business/2020/feb/26/hindustan-unilever-to-invest-in-greenfield-manufacturing-to-avail-lower-corporate-tax-rate-benefits-2108699.html> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Unilever. 2022. Acquisitions and disposals. [online] Available at: <https://www.unilever.com/investors/news-and-announcements/acquisitions-disposals/> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Unilever. 2022. Annual Report and Accounts 2021 Highlights. [online] Available at: <https://www.unilever.com/investors/annual-report-and-accounts/> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Unilever. 2022. Engaging with stakeholders. [online] Available at: <https://www.unilever.com/planet-and-society/responsible-business/engaging-with-stakeholders/> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Unilever. 2022. Partner with Purpose. [online] Available at: <https://www.unilever.com/suppliers/partner-with-purpose/> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Unilever. 2022. Unilever to acquire majority stake in Nutrafol. [online] Available at: <https://www.unilever.com/news/press-and-media/press-releases/2022/unilever-to-acquire-majority-stake-in-nutrafol/> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Web.archive.org. 2022. Operational highlights - At a glance | Sustainable living | Unilever Global. [online] Available at: <https://web.archive.org/web/20140402110549/http://unilever.com/sustainable-living/ourapproach/ourbusinessataglance/> [Accessed 12 September 2022].

Ze, Y., Abbas, H., Hussain, T. and Jiao, H., 2018. Analyzing the differentiation strategies of big companies competing with each other. Strategic Management, 23(3), pp.25-37.

IND301B Industry project Assignment Sample

Individual/Group - Individual / Group
Length - 1500 / 2500 words (+/- 10%)

Learning Outcomes - The Subject Learning Outcomes demonstrated by the successful completion of the task below include:

a) Critically analyse and assess the IS technology that will support an organization’s goals and vision
b) Propose recommendations for an IS strategy

Task Instructions for online assignment help

In the Feasibility Report you will be required to:

a) Identify and describe the organisation which you have selected for your independent research and the industry in which they operate. Please ensure that your organisation has been approved by your Learning Facilitator.

b) Ascertain by research the problem which you will address for this organisation and describe this problem clearly in your report. The combination of the organisation and the selected problem together form the topic for this assignment.

c) Undertake a brief literature review of valid and reliable sources that you have used to

support your research.

d) Outline your research design and research methods and the data sources that you intend to use for your project.

e) A short project plan (timeline) on how you intend to develop your report.

Your Learning Facilitator will advise if you are completing this assessment individually or in a group. If you are completing the assessment in a group, form a group of 3 to 4 members. Please read the attached Group Work Guide document for information on group formation, registration and administration.

Solution

Background

The organisation which will be focused on in this report is Billabong. Gordon Merchant established Billabong in 1973 on the Gold Coast of Queensland, Australia (Anderson, 2017). Billabong today sells a variety of clothes ranging from track pants to T-shirts and shorts, thanks to Gordon Merchant's debut with a board shaper and handcrafted board shorts. The company began with zero and has grown to become one of the world's largest corporations. It is one of Australia's major corporations with operations on four continents. It is a distributor and marketer of clothing, decorations, and sporting items, particularly in the renowned Australian sporting industry worldwide. Billabong International Limited's core mission clearly explains the organisation's goals for emphasising their goods and services. In addition, the stated mission specifies the company's performance targets, the methods the company implements to attain those objectives, target client segments, and the territory in which the company works (Billabong, 2022). The company's vision statement is very straightforward and up to the mark. It indicates that the company has not engaged in significant debates and discussions in order to express its ideas and perspectives to the general public and crucial collaborators. According to the study, Billabong's possibilities in its present condition are not promising (Anderson, 2017). Billabong's current troubles include massive indebtedness and an absence of a significant competitive edge, as well as a shortage of retail department managerial expertise, which is producing inventory turnover difficulties. The company is facing many difficulties in the supply chain and operational process due to such issues.

Literature Review

Concept of Big Data and Relation with Supply Chain

Big data is really a reasonably modern and popular idea that has the potential to improve businesses. The terminology "big data" refers to a large amount of information that is collected at a significant level from a variety of resources (Jin, 2019).
The study conducted by Fosso et al. (2018) revealed that the use of big data in the supply chain management significantly increases the efficiency of the business performances. It is considered important for business organisations to have a better control on the supply of materials, acquisition, manufacturing facilities, transportation, advertising, and various associated processes that allow products, operations, funds, and data to travel ahead and reverse (Richey, 2020). Govindan et al. (2018) also opined that big data help companies to have a close overview of business and operational activities along with identifying bottlenecks that slow down the performance of supply chain process. This in turn, supports in managing operational costs and streamline the supply chain activities of the organisations.

Big Data Analysis for Distribution Network

Outer streams and inner systems that incorporate network architecture or equipment in the manufacturing area produce a considerable volume of data in the manufacturing process. It is possible to enhance the effectiveness of the transportation and advertising operation as well as the constant surveillance of processes and items by applying big data for better evaluation and incorporation of various datasets. According to Nguyen et al. (2018), manufacturers must employ big data and analytical tools to expand the manufacturing base. The practice of picking the proper and appropriate seller for the distribution network is complicated because of the enormous numbers of sellers and the diversity of their identification and assessment factors. With the ability of web services and connection to current big data technologies and analytical packages, accessibility and visibility to statistics are more natural and consumer oriented with technological innovations (Mishra et al., 2018). Additionally, relational supplier management entails instituting self-control in strategy implementation and overseeing all conversations with a corporation's vendors in an attempt to minimise the threat of failings and enhance the significance of these relationships. In this process, developing tight connections with major suppliers and improving engagement with each other is critical to identifying and generating additional value and lowering the chance of loss (Ngai, 2018). Employing big data analytics tools, precise details on organisational purchasing behaviour may be obtained, which can aid in the management of supply chain operations and also supplier management (Gunasekaran et al. 2017). For instance, big data could offer detailed knowledge on the payback of every initiative's expenditure and a comprehensive assessment of possible suppliers. As per the view of Dubey, Gunasekaran & Childe (2019), businesses depend on supply chain management to get a competitive advantage; they must collaborate with inbound and outbound suppliers and be ready to optimise their supply chains. Consumers anticipate speedy logistics services and transportation, as well as a variety of different alternatives, designs, and functionalities. It is believed that organisations that fulfil these requirements would be documenting success tales. Tseng et al. (2021) mentioned that a crucial element is to provide client relevant data and projection analysis. Market analysis, product creation, sourcing choices, transportation, and consumer response are all sectors where big data plays an important part in supply chain operations.

Four Phase Modelling of Big Data Analysis

Nowadays, data does not travel in a predictable manner. Data transfers, particularly via technological interactions across many supply chain participants, increasingly appear to be a contemporaneous exchange (Hofmann, 2018). Big data analysis might be deployed throughout the end-to-end distribution network. The majority of businesses embrace big data to enhance their operations on a regular basis. In data analysis, there are four phases that are often used. According to Engelseth & Wang (2018), the initial phase is to make certain that the information is accurate, organised, and coordinated so that it can be analysed properly. The second phase is to verify that the correct information is available in the correct format, at the correct time, as well as in the correct location. Quantitative assessments, such as advanced statistics, are the third phase. Modern analysis, such as forecasting modelling, computerised systems, and real-time information processing, is used in the fourth phase. The effective application of big data might contribute to advancements in supply chain operations. A comprehensive awareness of market dynamics and client requirements would result in distribution networks that are flexible (Li et al., 2018). The application of big data, as well as advanced analytics in the complete operations of distribution networks, would generate sustainable production lines (Talwar, Kaur & Dhir, 2021).

Table 1. Four Phase Modelling of Big Data Analysis
(Source: Engelseth & Wang (2018)

Research

There are mainly three types of designs used in research, and the explanatory design would be used in this research subject. The objective of the explanatory concept is to provide scholars with a more detailed understanding of a particular topic. It is primarily carried out for issues that have not been well explored in the past, and as a result, it establishes goals, produces an analytical framework, and gives a suitable framework for performing research investigations (Lim & Oppenheimer, 2020). It really is necessary when presenting new information regarding a report's perspective. In comparison to the other two research approaches, this one concentrate primarily on describing the importance of big data analytics on Billabong's distribution network in a precise and comprehensive way. Also, data evaluation can be achieved in two forms: first, through primary evaluation, and subsequently, through secondary evaluation. Secondary data evaluation will be performed in this research project in order to achieve superior research results. The investigation takes into account a variety of data depending on attributes, such as peer-reviewed articles, papers, and effective literary materials used by academics (Panchenko&Samovilova, 2020). Secondary data evaluation includes gathering material from publications, peer-reviewed papers, books, and other sources to determine the influence of big data analytics on Billabong's logistics management.
Timeline

Table 2: Gantt Chart
(Source: Created by Author)

It would be necessary to perform a brief background study as well as research regarding the topic for understanding the effect of big data analytics on the distribution network of Billabong. Both of these could take 2 to 3 months. After analysing the background, the researcher would be required to determine the design of the research and the data collection technique that helps them to take the research further. After completing the gathering of data, the researcher must interpret that data and compile the results of the research in order to come to a conclusion regarding the research.

Conclusion

In several domains, like supply chain operations, big data analytics is considered a complicating factor. In this space, there are numerous opportunities for development in the implementation of suitable analysis methods. The report aims to indicate several of the most basic and latest features of big data analytics in logistics management, as well as to highlight a few important supply chain managerial processes for administrators. Various issues have emerged from the research such as market analysis, transportation and sourcing choices which could be properly addressed in the consultative report. The next steps of the process would be to address these issues with great concerns and find solutions. To mitigate these issues, the potential solutions for Billabong Company are:

? Billabong could strengthen its strategic planning and demand-sensing skills by utilising data from various sources.

? By helping supply chain managers to analyse their database to forecast when a specific client is more certain to be at residence, big data analysis could help them to bring items with reduced delivery efforts.

? Billabong might establish a significant data set to confront transporters and logistical solution vendors by integrating information on the cost segmentation of activities of vehicles and facilities around the world.

References

Anderson, E. (2017). Billabong. Stock Journal, 62, 62–62. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://www.proquest.com/docview/1931363060?accountid=176901&parentSessionId=q7prQJIBNlptiFLArjoaIEMZVQzjrdpLkobJ3gykNhA%3D

Billabong, (2022). Billabong. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://www.billabong.com/

Dubey, R., Gunasekaran, A., & Childe, S. J. (2019). Big data analytics capability in supply chain agility. Management Decision, 57(8), 2092–2112. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9053579629?queryString=Big%20data%20analytics%20capability%20in%20supply%20chain%20agility&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Engelseth, P., & Wang, H. (2018). Big data and connectivity in long-linked supply chains. The Journal of Business and Industrial Marketing, 33(8), 1201–1208. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9054688215?queryString=Big%20data%20and%20connectivity%20in%20long-linked%20supply%20chains&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Hofmann, E. (2018). Big data analytics and demand forecasting in supply chains: a conceptual analysis. International Journal of Logistics Management, 29(2), 739–766. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/7667499311?queryString=Big%20data%20analytics%20and%20demand%20forecasting%20in%20supply%20chains%3A%20a%20conceptual%20analysis&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Jin, W. (2019). Big data technology progress and development trend. Journal of Physics: Conference Series, 1237(2). Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9210296139?queryString=Big%20data%20technology%20progress%20and%20development%20trend&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Li, L., Ting, C., Hao, T., & Yu, T. (2018). Customer demand analysis of the electronic commerce supply chain using big data. Annals of Operations Research, 268(1-2), 113–128. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/7794586136?queryString=Customer%20demand%20analysis%20of%20the%20electronic%20commerce%20supply%20chain%20using%20big%20data&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Creswell, J. W. (2014). Research design : qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods approaches (4th ed.). SAGE Publications. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/815758208?queryString=Explanatory%20research%20design&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Mishra, D., Gunasekaran, A., Papadopoulos, T., & Childe, S. J. (2018). Big data and supply chain management: a review and bibliometric analysis. Annals of Operations Research, 270(1-2), 313–336. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/7855532005?queryString=Big%20data%20and%20supply%20chain%20management%3A%20a%20review%20and%20bibliometric%20analysis&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Ngai, E. (2018). Big data analytics in logistics and supply chain management. International Journal of Logistics Management, 29(2), 478–484. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/7667225714?queryString=Big%20data%20analytics%20in%20logistics%20and%20supply%20chain%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Nguyen, T., Zhou, L., Spiegler, V., Ieromonachou, P., Lin, Y. (2018). Big data analytics in supply chain management: a state-of-the-art literature review. Computers & Operations Research, 98, 254–254. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/7854811439?queryString=Big%20data%20analytics%20in%20supply%20chain%20management%3A%20a%20state-of-the-art%20literature%20review&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Panchenko, L., & Samovilova, N. (2020). Secondary data analysis in educational research: opportunities for phd students. Shs Web of Conferences, 75. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://www.proquest.com/docview/2442626613?OpenUrlRefId=info:xri/sid:wcdiscovery&accountid=176901

Richey, R. G. (2020). Supply chain management and logistics: an editorial approach for a new era. Journal of Business Logistics, 41(2), 90–93. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/8628153084?queryString=Supply%20chain%20management%20and%20logistics%3A%20an%20editorial%20approach%20for%20a%20new%20era&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Tseng, M.-L., Bui, T.-D., Lim, M. K., Tsai, F. M., & Tan, R. R. (2021). Comparing world regional sustainable supply chain finance using big data analytics: a bibliometric analysis. Industrial Management & Data Systems, 121(3), 657–700. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9053929996?queryString=Comparing%20world%20regional%20sustainable%20supply%20chain%20finance%20using%20big%20data%20analytics%3A%20a%20bibliometric%20analysis.&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false

Fosso, W. S., Gunasekaran, A., Dubey, R., & Ngai, E. W. T. (2018). Big data analytics in operations and supply chain management. Annals of Operations Research, 270(1-2). Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/7844780884?queryString=big%20data%20and%20supply%20chain%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&content=peerReviewed&changedFacet=content

Govindan, K., Cheng, T. C. E., Mishra, N., & Shukla, N. (2018). Big data analytics and application for logistics and supply chain management. Transportation Research Part E, 114, 343–349 Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/8607919160?queryString=big%20data%20and%20supply%20chain%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&content=peerReviewed&changedFacet=content&page=2

Gunasekaran, A., Papadopoulos, T., Dubey, R., Wamba, S. F., Childe, S. J., Hazen, B., & Akter, S. (2017). Big data and predictive analytics for supply chain and organizational performance. Journal of Business Research, 70, 308–308. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/6875141651?queryString=big%20data%20and%20supply%20chain%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&content=peerReviewed&changedFacet=content&page=2

Talwar, S., Kaur, P., & Dhir, A. (2021). Big data in operations and supply chain management: a systematic literature review and future research agenda. International Journal of Production Research, 59(11), 3509–3534. Retrieved on: 26 February 2022; retrieved from: https://lesa.on.worldcat.org/search/detail/9056114742?queryString=big%20data%20and%20supply%20chain%20management&clusterResults=true&stickyFacetsChecked=true&groupVariantRecords=false&content=peerReviewed&changedFacet=content&page=3

MBA631 Digital Marketing and Communication Assignment Sample

Assessment Type: Individual written report

Length: 2500 words (+/- 10% allowable range)

Your task

Using the same company that you were assigned with in the first assessment, individually, you are required to prepare an Integrated Digital Marketing (IDM) plan and present it as a 2000 word report. Please note that If you focus on any other company than the one your workshop facilitator
provides at the beginning of this subject, your submission will receive a grade of zero.

Assessment Instructions

Using the findings from your first assessment, you are required to review the company’s digital marketing problems by developing an Integrated Digital Marketing (IDM) plan in an attempt to solve these problems with the use of digital marketing knowledge you have learned from this subject.

Your key objective is to integrate your subject knowledge by focusing on the set of digital marketing models and frameworks, strategies and tactics, to generate a personalised and successful IDM plan for your company. Your plan must attempt to raise awareness and generate interest in your company’s product/service to a target segment. You must include tools to monitor your campaign and to measure its digital impact, e.g., YouTube subscribers, Instagram likes, Facebook comments, Twitter retweets, blog mentions, and so on. The recommendations provided should showcase your creativity while still being feasible. Your digital marketing plan report should follow the format below:

1) Introduction (Approximately 400 words)

a. concisely describe your company’s current business mission, strategy and operations, the industry in which the company operates, industry trends, major competitions, client strengths and weaknesses in relation to major competitors, macro environmental threats and opportunities, and current digital presence.

b. Describe the company’s marketing strategy in terms of current product/service offerings, the target markets to which these are directed, customer segments and value propositions, and the product/service positioning strategies being used to deliver the value propositions to its customer segments.

2) Integrated (traditional + digital) Marketing Strategy (Approximately 400 words)

Based on 1a and 1b points above, identify the primary marketing challenges (justified by the audit from the first assessment) being faced by the company and any recommendations you may have about how these could be addressed.

Summarise your justification for changing your company’s marketing strategy to achieve digital integration by re-targeting marketing efforts, re-defining customer segments, re-positioning product/service offerings, and/or changing value propositions. Identify specific changes being proposed in product, price, channel and promotion strategies through digital transformation.

3) Digital Marketing Plan (Approximately 1200 words)

Describe your proposed digital marketing plan in detail. Then, for each item or activity listed, discuss how it will help the company achieve the recommended marketing strategy, address the marketing challenges you’ve identified, and capitalise on any new digital marketing opportunities related to these challenges.

In describing the digital assets/platforms, e.g., tools, you believe the company should implement in their strategy, please bear in mind that not all digital platforms discussed across the trimester need to be implemented. Therefore, only use the ones you believe are directly related to the company and the ones you see as the best tools to help the company to achieve its objectives and digital integration. Use your judgement in selecting the digital platforms and include making selections from items covered in the subject, including but not limited to:

- SEO/Analytics;
- Social Media Marketing, e.g., Facebook advertising;
- Social Media, e.g., creation of a Facebook fan page;
- Mobile Marketing;
- Email Marketing;
- Content Marketing; and
- Any of the trends highlighted in the second assessment.

4) Concluding statement (Approximately 500 words)

Use this section to summarise the highlights of your digital marketing plan.

5) Reference List (Not included in the word limit of your submission).

Solution

1. Introduction

The mission of World Of Music is to ensure that people in the market wherever they operate have access to appropriate musical equipment for their requirements and get the proper support thereafter. The organisation is focused on advertising the organisational offerings at the best price across Australia. The company expects that they do not charge more compared to its competitors in the music industry of the nation. The company is also committed to bit the competitors in terms of prices of the offerings (Worldofmusic.com.au, 2022). The staffs that are recruited and engaged by the organisation are all musicians and have hands-on experiences in performing live and touring, sound mixing, digital and analogue recording, designing systems and giving music tuition. Music stores across Australia are the sales points of the business. Apart from this, a range of other services including music lessons upstairs in the shops are also organised on Mondays, Thursdays and Saturdays. The company also gives music lessons on various instruments including guitar, piano, keyboard, drums, bass and vocals and others. Repairing music accessories is another service that is also offered by the company. World Of Music has also engaged technicians with the business who can facilitate customers with amplifier and electronics repairs. The building space of the business, which is located in Nepean Hwy In Brighton East is also shared with a recording studio upstairs. The name of the music studio is The Alamo (Worldofmusic.com.au,2022).

The pandemic of Covid-19 has had a significant impact on the music product industry of Australia. It has been found that throughout the pandemic, the music product industry of Australia has faced issues in the supply chain. However, an increased sales performance of guitars has been achieved by the industry in 2021, whereas a decrease in sales of school band instruments has been noticed (Australianmusic.asn.au, 2022). “bettermusic.com” and “belfieldmusic.com” are the major competitors of the business in Australia. Both companies have their own official website and stores across the nation. In addition, the offerings of these companies are almost similar to the offerings of the World Of Music. Based on all the discussed facts it can be stated that clients of music products in Australia have options to choose their required products from multiple service providers. However, to get a music product at lower costs, customers will definitely be attracted to interaction with the World Of Music. By launching a website that is oriented with attractive content that represents the details, accessibility, quality and attraction of the music equipment and other musical services and by using social media platforms that are Facebook and Instragam, World Of Music has established a strong digital presence.

In order to identify and analyse the macro-environmental threats and opportunities, a PEST framework can be used. Identification and analysis of those for management assignments -

PEST analysis

Table 1: Identification and analysis of the macro-environmental threats and opportunities for the World Of Music by performing a PEST analysis
(Source: Author)

The official website of the business and social media platforms that are Facebook and Instagram are digital platforms used for marketing purposes. In these digital platforms, the company consistently updates the new and fresh arrival of new musical products through written and multimedia posts. Attractive offers on the purchase of a range of products are given by the organisation at the end of every financial year. Young age people of Australia are the target customers of the business. Weekend sales are also organised by the company for the customers that mail the company directly for querying about the offerings (Chaffey and Ellis-Chadwick, 2019). With an intention of increasing customer engagement, drives, where customers have to guess musical instruments are also organised. In these types of events, customers are rewarded and made attracted to become loyal to the business. The company is also involved in educating people regarding sourcing and utilising the offerings and gaining trust by posting the reviews and recommendations of the customers on the digital platforms it uses. Therefore, the company targets its potential customers in the Australian market based on age, which is a demographic variable of the Australian population. The company is committed to serving costumes at lower costs compared to the competitors.

2. Integrated marketing strategy

Based on the above discussion and the areas of improvement identified by performing an audit in assessment 1 it can be estimated the organisation faces challenges to go through the content about the offerings as the size of the webpage is high and users can face issues checking all the elements of the webpage thoroughly (Ellins,2014). There are chances that customers will be bored by visiting a slow website of the business and reject going through the content thoroughly. Due to the absence of an H1 header tag on the website, the marketers of the organisation cannot keep visitors to the website engaged. The H1 header tag can be described as an HTML heading. It is supposed to be used by the organisation to mark up the title of the web page to show what the content of the website is all about (Hollingsworth, 2020). Due to the absence of this, customers might lose interest at first glance after visiting the website of business. It has been analysed that the website the organisation uses for marketing and other purposes is not mobile compatible. Due to this, the organisation can fail to enhance marketing communication with potential customers in the market. The factor is that, in 2020, people using mobile globally have visited 68.1% of websites (Enge, 2021). The organisation is also expected to face challenges to make the customers feel safe as on the website of the business clear text email addresses are seen. As indicated in the study by Abd Aziz and Abd Wahid (2018), due to this, customers can be concerned about their personal data and refuse to interact with the organisation. Therefore, the marketers of the organisation can fail to communicate with potential customers in the market regarding their musical offerings.

For the mitigation of the discussed challenges, the marketers of World Of Music can initiate direct marketing to the customers to be enhanced that will show interest in the products. Considering an example, the website of the business can be modified in a way that will assist customers to put their email addresses to remain updated about new and fresh music products and different types of offers. As indicated in the study by Tran and Strutton (2020), thus, by collecting email addresses of slightly interested customers, by sending emails with convincing marketing content in the form of direct marketing, the marketers of the organisation can be able to convince customers to purchase the products. Along with young age people, the Australian population that is active on different social media platforms can be targeted to enhance marketing communication. Along with the website of the business, the organisation can also initiate positioning its products and services on the e-Commerce platforms such as Amazon. Apart from low-cost offerings, the marketers can offer the customers free education on the utilisation of the offered product once a customer purchases anything. There is no area of change in the product and pricing strategy of the business. However, marketers can initiate advertising the organisational musical products on more social media platforms such as Twitter (Zanini et al., 2019). This can increase the brand value of the business. As indicated in the study by Ganz et al. (2018), for effective promotion of musical offerings, online musical events on social media platforms can be organised. By doing so, the marketers of the World Of Music can show how effective their offerings are.

3. Digital Marketing Plan

In the implementation of a digital marketing strategy, the official website of the business can be used by the organisation to make people aware of the music products they can offer. Apart from this, social media platforms that are Facebook, Instagram, YouTube and Twitter can be utilised by the organisation. All these social media platforms must be used by the organisation to make people aware of the different products and the offers that can be availed from the purchase of those products. The social media platform can mainly be used to post different types of promotional written and multimedia content that will complement the offerings of the business. The official website of the business must be modified in a way in which the customers have to give their personal details to be aware of the fresh and new music products and available offers for the purchase of those products (Tran and Strutton, 2020). On the official website, the customers are expected to be asked to give their email addresses mandatorily. By doing so, the marketers of the organisation can be able to gather the email addresses of customers to enhance direct marketing about the products by sending emails with attractive product complementing content. In the enhancement of the digital market, marketers must try to enhance communication about the offerings of the organisation not only with the young Australian population but also with the population that are active on social media platforms (Zanini et al., 2019). By doing so, the marketers can be able to establish an increased customer base for the business. Along with the official website, the organisation can also initiate positioning its products in eCommerce platforms such as Amazon, where the customers can see the details of those positioned products and order according to their needs. However, the availability of low-cost offerings to be ordered online is not enough for the company. At the initial stage, the organisation can also offer free education regarding the use of musical products from the purchase of the products online. This can also be proved as a viable promotional activity to generate increased sales of the products online. In addition, for effective promotion of the organisational offerings online, the organisation can initiate organising musical concerts online using social media platforms (Ganz et al., 2018).

The digital marketing plan that can be executed by the World Of Music has been made by utilising the 7Cs of the digital marketing framework. 7Cs of digital marketing is a replicable and scalable framework using which the landscapes of digital marketing can be assessed by the marketers of the organisation from both internal and external points of view of the business. The following are the selected elements of the framework that can be considered in the enhancement of digital marketing in the consideration of which suitable technologies from the listed can be recommended to be used by the organisation in the execution of its digital marketing efforts:

Figure 1: 7Cs of digital marketing
(Source: Devrix.com, 2021)

In the enhancement of digital marketing, it is necessary for the organisation to know the targeted customers thoroughly to increase the effectiveness of their digital marketing efforts. This process is expected to be started with the formation of a detailer customer persona. As an example, it has been found that since 2020, most of the visits to the websites are being done by people using mobile, therefore, to make the digital marketing efforts effective, the organisation should make the business websites mobile compatible.

To make the implementation of a digital marketing strategy effective, it is necessary for the organisation to create high-quality, unique and expert content. Therefore, the marketers of the business must be involved in creating creative content formats, updating outdated information about the offerings and complying with the latest search engine algorithms (Cannel et al., 2022). This should be done not only to make users easily reach the brand but also to make the website rank higher in web browsers.

For the enhancement of effective digital marketing, it is necessary for the organisation to be aware of the wider context of the targeted audience. Therefore, marketers must consider buyer intent, correlate those with the trends in the industry, and then produce, and promote content that can be proven relevant to the requirements of the targeted customers.

The marketers of the organisation to enhance community marketing to make the implementation of digital marketing strategy successful can use Facebook, Instagram and Twitter. It is necessary for the marketers to be involved in marketing interaction with the customers in a transparent, non-intrusive and conversational way because customers can have a high extent of bargaining power due to the availability of multiple options from which they can purchase the musical products they need (Pongsuwan, 2021).

The implementation of this element of the model is related to customer experience and core principles that can be maintained by the organisation while applying digital marketing strategy for the promotion of the organisational offerings. By finalising the sales of the organisational offerings along with marketing of the organisational offerings through Ecommerce platform, the implementation of this element can be made by the World Of Music (Junaidi, 2020). The use of ecommerce platform can make the organisational offerings more convenient to the customers. Thus, the marketing of the organisational offerings can be more successful.

A cohesive digital marketing strategy can be applied by the marketers of the World Of Music by using all possible technological channels that can be used. Along with the use of company website, social media marketing, Ecommerce marketing, direct marketing and others, the use of affiliate marketing using internet can be finalised.

Conversion

Conversion can b achieved in the enhancement of digital marketing by setting suitable key performance indicators, which can indicate the success of the digital marketing efforts. At this stage, the amount of visitors in the website, social media and others platforms along with sales increments if occur can be finalised as the KPIs (Karmarkar, 2022).

4. Concluding statement

It can be concluded that the discussed political, technological and social factors can provide opportunities for the business. However, the discussed economic factor is threatening the digital marketing efforts and overall sales of the business online. The balance of the H1 header is a significant factor for which the organisation can lose potential customers in the market. Due to the absence of an H1 header on the website of the business, people that can visit the website of the business can lose interest in thoroughly checking the website. The factor is that they cannot understand what the website is all about at the first glance due to the absence of this element in the website. Along with the official website, Amazon.com which is an eCommerce platform can be used by the organisation to position its musical offerings. The discussed social media platforms can mainly be used by the organisation to promote its offerings online. The discussed social media platforms can be used to post written and multimedia content that will complement the offerings of the business. Apart from this, musical concerts online can be organised by the organisation using the discussed social media platforms. Along with low-cost offerings, by offering free educational sessions regarding the use of musical products, the World Of Music can initiate to change its business value proposition while applying the planned digital marketing strategy. The official website should be initiated to be modified in a way that will assist customers to give their personal addresses using email addresses. By doing so, the marketers of the organisation can be able to enhance direct marketing more efficiently by sending emails to customers that will show their interest in the products.

5. Reference list

Abd Aziz, N.N. and Abd Wahid, N., 2018. Why consumers are hesitant to shop online: The major concerns towards online shopping. International Journal of Academic Research in Business and Social Sciences, 8(9).

Australianmusic.asn.au, 2022. MARKET REPORT 2021: EXECUTIVE SUMMARY. [Online] Available at: https://australianmusic.asn.au/industry-statistics/market-report-2021-executive-summary/ [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Cannel, C., Bilmanoch, S. and Dechacheep, S., 2022. 7C Online Marketing Communication Strategies That Affect Noon. com Website Success. SIAM COMMUNICATION REVIEW, 21(1), pp.137-151.

Chaffey, D. and Ellis-Chadwick, F., 2019. Digital marketing: strategy, implementation & practice. Pearson uk.

Devrix.com, 2021. How to Effectively Implement the 7 Cs of Digital Marketing? [Online] Available at: https://devrix.com/tutorial/how-to-effectively-implement-7-cs-digital-marketing/ [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Ellins.J, 2014. Webpages – Size Matters! [Online] Available at: https://www.hallaminternet.com/webpages-size-matters/ [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Enge.E, 2021. Mobile vs. Desktop Usage in 2020. [Online] Available at: https://www.perficient.com/insights/research-hub/mobile-vs-desktop-usage [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Ganz, O., Rose, S.W. and Cantrell, J., 2018. Swisher Sweets ‘Artist Project’: using musical events to promote cigars. Tobacco control, 27(e1), pp.e93-e95.

Gartner.com, 2021 Gartner Forecasts IT Spending in Australia to Grow 6.5% in 2022. [Online] Available at: https://www.gartner.com/en/newsroom/press-releases/2021-10-26-gartner-forecasts-it-spending-in-australia-to-grow-6-#:~:text=Spending%20on%20technology%20products%20and,latest%20forecast%20from%20Gartner%2C%20Inc [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Hollingsworth.S, 2020. How Important Is an H1 Tag for SEO? [Online] Available at: https://www.searchenginejournal.com/h1-tag-seo-how-important/387306/ [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Junaidi, J., 2020. Impact of Digital Marketing on the Growth of E-Service Sales. International Journal of Psychosocial Rehabilitation, 24(01), pp.1219-1229.
Karmarkar, M.A., 2022. Using Twitter to Teach Business Communication Teaching the 7 C’s of Communication. English Language Teachers’ Association of India (ELTAI) J, 64(4), p.14.

Mudditt.J, 2022. Why is Australia’s inflation rate so high? [Online] Available at: https://www.forbes.com/advisor/au/personal-finance/why-is-inflation-rate-so-high/#:~:text=In%20August%2C%20The%20Australian%20Bureau,9.1%25%20and%209.4%25%20respectively [Accessed on 1st October 2022]
Pongsuwan, N., 2021. The Marketing Mix on Customer’s Perspective (7Cs) Affecting on AIS Prepaid Customer’s Loyalty.

Roymorgan.com, 2020. 12.7 million Australians use streaming music services. [Online] Available at: https://www.roymorgan.com/findings/12-7-million-australians-use-streaming-music-services [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Theglobaleconomy.com, 2022. Political stability - Country rankings. [Online] Available at: https://www.theglobaleconomy.com/rankings/wb_political_stability/Australia/ [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Tran, G.A. and Strutton, D., 2020. Comparing email and SNS users: Investigating e-servicescape, customer reviews, trust, loyalty and E-WOM. Journal of Retailing and Consumer Services, 53, p.101782.

Worldofmusic.com.au, 2022. About World Of Music. [Online] Available at: https://www.worldofmusic.com.au/about-world-of-music [Accessed on 1st October 2022]

Zanini, M.T., de Moraes, F.C., Lima, V., Migueles, C., Lourenco, C. and Irigaray, H.A.R., 2019. Soccer and Twitter: virtual brand community engagement practices. Marketing Intelligence & Planning.

MGT60040 Management Analyses and Problem Solving Assignment Sample

Your written report for assignment help should be 2500 words (+/- 10%) in length and will describe the analysis you have undertaken on the data you have gathered through news/media reports or research. You must use only secondary data sources.

What is required?

1. Identifies the problem properly and does a gap analysis of where the organization is at present and where it wants to be (performing SWOT analyses)

2. You should discuss the objectives or criteria that are most appropriate to the organization (for example cost; time; organizational capacity; etc.); You can formulate and present a means and fundamental objectives table.

3. You are advised to propose 4-5 distinct alternatives/options for closing the identified gap(s);

4. Analyse how well each alternative fares against the objectives/criteria chosen (including
objectives by alternatives table);

5. You need to provide a recommendation as to which alternative you suggest the client should choose. This should be done by performing/illustrating dominated alternatives and applying Evan swap technique to choose the best alternative. This can be illustrated in a table titled consequences table.

6. Discuss any risks, uncertainties and linked decisions associated with the chosen alternative.

7. Steps to implement the chosen alternative that helps close the gap between where the
organization is now and where it wants to be.

8. Conclusion

You are advised to write the report using business report format (https://swinburne.instructure.com/courses/44522/files/18000211?module_item_id=275531 ), incorporating Swinburne’s recommended APA referencing style guide.

Solution

Introduction

This paper will shed light on Qantas as well as its operations. This report has identified some of the significant issues faced by the company along with its objectives. This study will also evaluate the company's functions and whether the company functions are following its objectives. A SWOT analysis will be done on Qantas to identify its weaknesses. Those have been evaluated further to identify alternatives Qantas could consider to mitigate the challenging factors and achieve the objectives. In order to help the organisation bridge the gaps between its goals and its actual situation, one solution has been selected to present to the client for further consideration. Risks, uncertainties, and linked decisions associated with the chosen alternative have been elaborated in brief. Finally, some steps have been shed light to implement the chosen alternative effectively.

1. Problems Based on SWOT

This section will highlight the four elements of the SWOT analysis of Qantas by focusing on its strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.
Strengths

? Cost-efficient Operation

The company has been operating its functions in the market for over a century. Over these years, it has acquired experience saving operational costs to reflect through the generated revenues. For the last three years of its operation in the market, Qantas was able to save $2 billion in yearly costs (Heiets, Oleshko & Leshchinsky 2021). This was accomplished by working together with the airlines and the unions to cut back on the unwarranted compensation increases and the 18-month pay freeze.

? Expansion of Domestic travel

In Australia, the hospitality and travel industry is emerging rapidly, and thus, the rise of domestic travel has been observed. Some of its market competitors have been found to stop expanding their capacities during the post-pandemic scenario, primarily intended to recover from the significant financial losses (Heiets, Oleshko & Leshchinsky 2021). Qantas has identified this opportunity to expand its businesses in the Australian market. Thus, the airline industry was able to fill more tickets to enhance its domestic market returns to some noticeable margin.

? Growth

Qantas has been performing its operations in the market for a century now, and over these years, it has gained much experience in developing suitable strategies for maintaining consistent growth. The company has considered multiple strategies or methods to maintain its revenue inflow since the beginning. Thus, in the contemporary scenario, it has been found to use a robust strategic framework to support it as a backbone (White, 2018).

? Brand Awareness

Qantas invests much in creating brand awareness in the global market, especially in the Australian market. In order to do this, the company considers using social media platforms, innovative advertising strategies, print media, and public relations (White, 2018). Significant events also have been found to be launched on behalf of Qantas from time to time. Hence, it has been identified to be one of its strengths.
Weaknesses

? Disputes in Union

Due to a complex operational structure, Qantas has faced major unionization issues. This was due to the company not being able to fulfil the requirements of its unions to some extent which made the company struggle to maintain the established connection. Additionally, several outside forces forced Qantas to make significant adjustments to its business strategies and operations, which were later found to be at odds with the needs and demands of the affiliated unions, including the Transport Workers Union and the Australian Licensed Aircraft Engineers Association (ALAEA) (Raynes & Tsui, 2018).

? Failed financial planning

It has been found that Qantas was not able to do its financial planning appropriately. Evidence suggests that the company could have used more capital to make significant improvements within its functions as well as provide quality services to the consumers, which has not been done (Raynes & Tsui, 2018). This was primarily due to the company's primary focus on reducing operational costs, which made it miss some valuable changes within its internal structure.

? Directorates

The company has planned to offer direct flights between Europe and Australia. In this case, it has been done swiftly and without any error. When it comes to offering long-distance flights, Qantas has faced multiple issues, including generating profitability for the company and creating demand with a competitive pricing strategy. This is primarily due to high market competition and maintaining correct pricing for the services.
Opportunities

? Economic Advantages

During the current scenario, increased consumer spending can be observed in the airline's services, especially during the post-pandemic (Heiets & Prakittachakul, 2020). Hence, it has been considered one of the significant opportunities for the company to consider.

? High Demand

Increased cargo service demand will likely grow significantly within the next few years. Hence, it has been considered a massive opportunity for the company to grow in the target markets and expand its business functions.

? Low Inflation rate

Since the market is stable enough to support the airline businesses, it has been considered to be another opportunity for Qantas to provide services at a competitive price range due to a low inflation rate (Heiets & Prakittachakul, 2020).

? Increased Business travel

During the post-pandemic, an increment can be observed within business travel, which would also benefit Qantas to provide services for the business classes. This has created many scopes for the company to generate desired revenues from the market as the frequency of business travel has increased significantly.
Threats

? Market competition

The airline industry is emerging, and thus, more businesses are showing up each time. This has put the company under pressure to attract consumers from the market.

? Increasing pay

Rising pay levels and prices have become significant concerns for Qantas (Oxenbridge et al., 2010).

? Management cost

The fuel cost is rising along with other management, which has been identified as a threat.

2. Objectives of Qantas

As per the statement of qantas.com (2019), the objectives of Qantas are:

Acting responsibly and transparently

Qantas aims to achieve top quartile TSR, and to meet this, Qantas follows six strategic pillars.

Following the financial framework

Qantas aims to deliver sustainable services to ensure a long-term return to its stakeholders, and this is done through a prudent approach to capital management (qantas.com, 2019).

Maintaining a balanced scorecard.

With the help of this approach, Qantas aims to measure its performance over time in delivering desired services to clients (qantas.com, 2019).

3. Alternatives to be considered by Qantas

Unionization

Qantas can focus on improving its unionization by meeting their requirements and reaching a mutual understanding for generating desired profits for both sides.

Enhanced financial planning

This would help Qantas make innovative changes within the workspace and services, allowing it to use the capital appropriately.

Determining the service qualities

Qantas can provide competitive services to meet consumer demands and also generate profitability. This would improve the brand image of Qantas.

Innovation

The company can consider innovation in making suitable changes within its operations, which would further help it mitigate the competition and financial planning-related issues.

4. Analysis of the Alternatives

This section will analyze each alternative chosen for Qantas to consider to mitigate the gaps between where the company is in the current situation and where the company is aiming to move.

Unionization

As per the statement of Whitley (2022), the COVID-19 pandemic has affected all kinds of businesses, especially airline services such as Qantas, due to the temporary lockdown situations as well as restrictions for people to travel from one place to another. Hence, it has highly affected the financial health of businesses like Qantas. In order to recover from this adverse situation, organizations such as Qantas had to focus on making changes within its operations to some noticeable margin which would further support the organization restore their financial health and re-establish the brand image within the target markets. The unionization process has been complicated in the instance of Qantas because the demands of the affiliated unions have been seen to shift in response to the pandemic. In contrast, the company itself was focusing on restoring its brand reputation. Thus, Qantas was unable to consider its demands to include those in its operational change during the post-pandemic. 97% of staff belonging to such unions have rejected the company's offer of better pay and allowances (Whitley, 2022). Hence, it can be recommended that Qantas focus on and fulfill the demands of the associated unions in order to provide a better service to its global clients. Although this would cost the company some extra pennies to provide better pay to the workers of the union members, it would support the company in restoring its brand image as well as reputation by providing quality services to its global consumer base.

Enhanced Financial Planning

During the post-pandemic, Qantas could not perform its financial planning to some desired margin, which affected the internal operations of the company to some noticeable margin. COVID-19 has affected most of the hospitality and airline businesses to some significant extent, from which most have recovered by focusing on innovative and creative approaches. Although Qantas has been focusing on reducing its operational costs by considering various methods and strategies, it could not recover from the financial losses caused by the COVID-19 pandemic. Hence, it can be recommended that the company improve its financial planning by aligning its goals and objectives, which would help it to deal with the adverse situation of the COVID-19 pandemic and reduce operational costs. With adequate financial planning, Qantas would also be capable of delivering desired services to the global client base by fulfilling their demands as well as requirements appropriately. This would further help it follow the financial framework and maintain a balanced scorecard, which is some of the organization 's objectives.

Innovation

Lack of innovation also can be observed within the development of policies and determining the company's business functions. This has further affected the service qualities as well as the competitive advantages of the company. During the post-pandemic, other airline businesses have focused on innovative and creative approaches to determine their service qualities and achieve advantages in the market. According to Nolan (2022), the passengers of Qantas have been facing long flight delay issues due to some technical problems. The company still follows traditional operations methods; hence, the fast-paced market is producing significant challenges for the company. Hence, it can be recommended that Qantas follow both innovative and creative approaches in its operational planning, which would enhance the quality of the services and mitigate such issues faced by its passengers. The company can also consider technological innovation, which would support Qantas in making data-driven approaches to gaining the desired competitive advantages. This would also help the company deal with financial planning-related issues.

Enhancing the Service qualities

This is another alternative approach recommended for Qantas to meet its corporate objectives and its long-term and short-term goals. It was recommended as an alternative as it could provide certain competitive advantages to the airline company, which would further help Qantas generate desired profitability. According to Gans (2011), the company has been providing below-average domestic experiences to its global clients, which has contributed much to generating significant quality gaps within its services. Hence, this was presented as one of the alternatives to Qantas to focus on improving the service quality, which would further support the company in maintaining a balanced scorecard.

5. Recommendations

This section will highlight the chosen alternatives among all four with proper justification for choosing that particularly. In addition, the even swap method will be utilized in order to select the most suitable solution for the customer by analyzing the performance of each of the potential options.

Innovation

Innovation has been chosen among all the alternatives, and this one is recommended to the client. There are multiple reasons to choose this one among the other alternatives discussed in the previous section of this report. During the post-pandemic, increased market competition can be observed within the hospitality as well as airline businesses globally (Amankwah-Amoah, 2021). Furthermore, adverse impacts of the pandemic compelled the governments to go through temporary lockdowns, which further affected the financial health of the companies to some noticeable margin. In order to deal with the issues, businesses belonging to the hospitality and airline sectors have been adopting innovative and creative methods to re-establish their brand images in the market and regain their competitive positions. This has helped them improve the service quality as well as company policies to operate the business functions. Hence, this particular alternative has been chosen to be the best one as a recommendation for Qantas as this would allow the company to go through major changes within its operations by introducing advanced technologies as well as innovative methods in improving the service qualities as well as delivery. This would also help Qantas follow its financial frameworks and maintain a balanced scorecard, which are some of its primary objectives. Thus, Qantas could mitigate its financial planning-related issues, which would help it further restore the financial damages caused by the global pandemic.

Even Swap

6. Risks, Uncertainties, and decisions associated with the chosen alternative

Although innovation can fetch multiple competitive advantages to the organisation , by which it can re-establish its brand image within the market, especially during the post-pandemic, innovation can bring certain risks as well as uncertainties (Yu et al., 2021). This can include a high operational cost for the company, which has been identified as a major risk for the company as Qantas has been focusing on reducing operational costs by taking the help of various strategies and methods. Thus, the company can find innovation costly to some extent, creating some points of concern for the company. Apart from this, innovation would require additional support from research and development on the functions of the airline industry in order to gather and evaluate data regarding the areas of development. This would draw the company's attention to other sectors, which can make the company's operations complex.

7. Steps to implement the chosen alternative

Innovation can be introduced in different sectors of the airline company, which are elaborated on in the following.

Network Operation

Innovation in the network operation can support Qantas in improving the efficiency of its operational capabilities in airport traffic control. This would further add value to its network operations by enhancing the use of advanced materials, more sustainable fuel consumption, energy storage, and conversion into digital systems, as well as mitigating environmental factors (Rengarajan et al., 2021).

Trajectory Management

Innovation in this section would support Qantas in making a data-driven approach to fetching operational excellence to ensure the proper trajectory (Di Vaio & Varriale, 2019). This would also help the company mitigate long-haul passenger flight issues by ensuring operational excellence.

Aircraft Separation Modes

This is the next step in implementing innovation that would allow the aircraft to enhance the efficiency of the aircraft separation (Koseoglu et al., 2019). The tower controller would also provide enhanced signals to the aircraft, which would further allow the pilots to handle the aircraft more efficiently.

System-Wide Information Management (SWIM)

Innovation in this step would allow Qantas to take complete control of the flights by evaluating the current situation of the air quality, weather, flight information, as well as the demands of its stakeholders (Drlja?a et al., 2020).

8. Conclusion

It can be concluded that Qantas should focus on innovation primarily, which would allow it to mitigate all the issues properly. On the other hand, the other alternatives would not be able to cover all the issues, although those are capable of mitigating some of the issues faced by Qantas. The steps for implementing innovation would allow the company to take complete control of the flights, which would further enable it to enhance the service qualities to some noticeable margin.

References

Amankwah-Amoah, J. (2021). COVID?19 pandemic and innovation activities in the global airline industry: A review. Environment International, 156, 106719. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envint.2021.106719

Di Vaio, A., & Varriale, L. (2019). Blockchain technology in supply chain management for sustainable performance: Evidence from the airport industry. International Journal of Information Management. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijinfomgt.2019.09.010

Drlja?a, M., Štimac, I., Bra?i?, M., & Petar, S. (2020). The Role and Influence of Industry 4.0. in Airport Operations in the Context of COVID-19. Sustainability, 12(24), 10614. https://doi.org/10.3390/su122410614

Gans, J. (2011, September 19). Qantas and the Airline Quality Gap. Harvard Business Review. https://hbr.org/2011/09/qantas-and-the-airline-quality
Heiets, I., & Prakittachakul, V. (2020). Optimizing the Marketing Strategies of Qantas Airways and Thai Airways. Transnational Marketing Journal, 8(1), 95–124. https://ideas.repec.org/a/mig/tmjrnl/v8y2020i1p95-124.html

Heiets, I., Oleshko, T., & Leshchinsky, O. (2021). Airline-within-Airline business model and strategy: case study of Qantas Group. Transportation Research Procedia, pp. 56, 96–109. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.trpro.2021.09.012

Koseoglu, O., Keskin, B., & Ozorhon, B. (2019). Challenges and Enablers in BIM-Enabled Digital Transformation in Mega Projects: The Istanbul New Airport Project Case Study. Buildings, 9(5), 115. https://doi.org/10.3390/buildings9050115

Nolan, B. (2022). Qantas passengers were delayed on an airport runway for almost the length of their flight due to a technical glitch. Business Insider. https://www.businessinsider.com/qantas-technical-glitch-delay-travel-choas-passengers-airport-runways-2022-8

Oxenbridge, S., Wallace, J., White, L., Tiernan, S., & Lansbury, R. (2010). A comparative analysis of restructuring employment relationships in Qantas and Aer Lingus: different routes, similar destinations. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 21(2), 180–196. https://doi.org/10.1080/09585190903509472
qantas.com. (2019). Our strategic plan | Qantas IN. Qantas.com. https://www.qantas.com/in/en/qantas-group/looking-ahead/our-strategic-plan.html

Raynes, C., & Tsui, K. W. H. (2018). Review of airline-within-airline strategy: Case studies of the Singapore airlines group and Qantas group. Case Studies on Transport Policy, 7(1). NCBI. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cstp.2018.12.008

Rengarajan, S., Moser, R., Tillessen, L., Narayanamurthy, G., & Reddy, S. S. J. (2021). Decision model innovation for competitive productivity (CP) in the airport industry. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 33(9), 3021–3039. https://doi.org/10.1108/ijchm-09-2020-1041

White, L. (2018). Qantas still calls Australia home: The spirit of Australia and the flying kangaroo. Tourist Studies, 18(3), 261–274. https://doi.org/10.1177/1468797618785617

Whitley, A. (2022). Bloomberg - Are you a robot? Www.bloomberg.com. https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2022-01-20/covid-stressed-qantas-tries-to-rip-up-crew-deal-after-talks-fail

Yu, M.-M., Abdul Rashid, A., & See, K. F. (2021). Developing an innovation capital index of global airlines using a hierarchical data envelopment analysis approach. Journal of the Operational Research Society, 73(8), 1708–1723. https://doi.org/10.1080/01605682.2021.1923378

SPO101 Introduction to sports management Assignment Sample

Individual/Group - Individual

Length - 1,500 words (+/- 10%)

Learning Outcomes

a) Describe the global sport and recreation business environment.

b)Apply management and business planning tools to the sports industry.

c) Understand and explain risk in a sport business context.

d) Identify social and ethical issuesthat can influence the sport business community.

Instructions:

You are required to create a new sport or modify an existing sport for a new market. This could be an individual or team based sport. You should write from the perspective of the new Governing Body and outline the sport you have designed, including:

? Introduction to the sport – name, brief concept, season or time of year

? The target market – who will play this new sport and why?

? Mission and Vision Statements – what is the mission and vision of this new sport?

? Goals and SMART Objectives – how will you establish this sport in the next 3-5 years?
(You should have at least three goals, and each goal requires SMART Objectives).

? SWOT Analysis – table format with a minimum of five factors in each of the four segments, followed by a brief summary of the information in the table.

? Risk Management Table – identify at least five potential risks and strategiesto minimise them.

? Proposed Rules for the sport including scoring and how to win.

? Equipment and Uniformsrequired to play and to minimise risks.

? Proposed schedule or competition for the first year – what will you offer in the first year to allow your target market to play this sport?

? Conclusion – convince the reader that this sport has a future.

Use appropriate referencing to acknowledge all sources utilised in your report. It is expected that you will draw heavily on your learning from Modules 1, 2 and 3 in this subject to complete your paper.

Solution

Introduction

The report for assignment help here aims to modify an existing sport, that is, Aikido, that has decreased in popularity in the recent years. Aikido was founded in 1942 in Japan by Morihei Ueshiba (Budo Dragon, 2020). Like other martial arts, Aikido demands physical exertion and mindful concentration. It is considered as a compassionate practice providing a social human tough along with spiritual perspectives to the players. The translation of Aikido is path or do and union or ai with life energy or ki (Lukoff & Strozzi-Heckler, 2017). Here, it involves working together with a partner instead of fighting, sparring or grappling the opponent as generally observed in competitive tournaments. Aikido is based on the philosophy of the founder that is described as “the way of harmony”. This sport can be played throughout all seasons and time of the year. It has been selected for the report because of its decreasing popularity to other martial arts like Jiu-Jitsu and MMA (Canaria, 2015).

Target Market

The target market of this sport will consist of men, women and children aged between 12 to 35 years.

Fig 1: Population by Age

(Source: Gold, 2020)

It has been observed that attracting and retaining young people as aikido practitioners have been difficult in the recent years. This is clearly evident from the fact that the US contains only 2% practitioners below age of 24 and 4.8% age of 30 (Jacobs, 2020).

Fig 2: Gender Balance

(Source: Gold, 2020)

Besides, the female population is also lower in this sports community across the world. Thus, the primary focus would be to attract young people and female individuals in this sport. In addition, the target market will also include Asian markets, mixed ethnicities and Black people.

Mission and Vision Statements

The vision of the sport will be to teach individuals about the principles of balance of energies, way of harmony and respect for partner by involving men, women and children. This will be achieved by the mission of teaching various Aikido techniques through the basic principles of martial arts (Lukoff & Strozzi-Heckler, 2017). These include movements, seizures, dodging and distances for tackling work with bare hand techniques, projections and other weapons.

Goals and SMART Objectives

Below represents the three fundamental goals that will be targeted for modifying Aikido’s scenario in the next 3-5 years. These goals will be accompanied by various SMART objectives that are specific, measurable, achievable, relevant and time-bound.

First Goal: Spreading the Aikido sports in more than 5 countries, namely, Australia, Thailand, South Korea, Mexico and New Zealand
Here, the objectives for achieving the goal will be:

• Conducting international competition of Aikido sports by involving various countries,

• Enhancing marketing and communication activities about this sport in the said countries through digital media,

• Opening up more than 10 to 25 schools in each country within 3 years,

• Increasing advertising expenditure by 10% for spreading awareness about Aikido
Second Goal: Ensuring that around at least 50% of the Aikido practitioners belong in the age group of 12 to 30 years

• Introducing Aikido as extra curriculum activity in more than 35% of schools and 25% colleges or universities within 4 years,

• Assigning extra credits to this sport in such schools for attracting young people within the next four years
Third Goal: Increasing the popularity of this sport amongst children, men and women irrespective of their geographical locations

• Conducting Aikido awareness programs in public places, schools, colleges, supermarkets and auditoriums,

• Giving one week of free classes in each community school of different target markets within 4 years,

• Increasing number of Aikido practitioners in local, state and national competitions by 30%, 45% and 50% respectively within the next 5 years

SWOT Analysis

From the above table it is evident that Aikido sport consists of various strengths and limitations in terms of a physical sport or activity. These include providing a spiritual mindfulness to individuals along with causing harms without unsupervised training. It has various opportunities of expanding in different countries, but faces intense competition and decreasing popularity in the recent years.

Risk Management Table

Proposed Rules

There are various rules or regulations that should be practiced with regards to Aikido sport. This sport should be taking place in a dojo or training facility involving two participants. Any woman, man or individual can undergo this training irrespective of their age as it does not require any intense physical strength. Furthermore, the practitioners or participants of Aikido should refrain from folding their arm sleeves inside the Dojo and should not also lean their back on the walls (DeMarco, 2016). While the former shows a symbol of disagreement, the second one is against the rule. Here, the practitioner is further required to make a semi-venia before beginning the training, at the starting of each fight and further at the end of such fight. In addition, the practitioners should only be using defensive techniques instead of attacking ones as pointed under Aikido.

Equipment and Uniforms

The practitioners of Aikido will be wearing their special uniform named Aikido Gi. This includes wearing simple and baggy trousers along with a wrap jacket or robe in white or off white colour with short sleeves and a belt. These short sleeves are specified as they help participants in practicing their wrist locks alongside performing swift movements through these loose-fitting clothes (Ryde Aikido, 2022). Here, the pants will be dark or light coloured and the uniform should always be clean. Female students can wear white t-short or sports top under their wrap jacket or dogi. Other items that will be included are wooden staff or Jo, tanto, Shoto and Bokto.

Proposed Schedule or Competition

In the first year, competition will be conducted between different training centres, states and inter-school or inter-college. It will help in increasing the interest of young individuals in participating in Aikido competition for representing their schools, colleges, universities or training centres. Students succeeding in these local competitions will be given a certificate of award, certain percentage of reward money, opportunity of training at a renowned facility and participating in the state level competition. On the other hand, other candidates will continue to receive training and enhance their Aikido efficiency by getting extra training classes every weekend.

Conclusion

The purpose of the report was to modify an existing sport named Aikido for a new market. For this purpose, a brief background and concept of the sport or martial art was provided in the introduction section. The target market was identified as consisting of men, women and children belonging to the age group of 12 to 35 years. Furthermore, the mission and vision statements were provided for this sport. Goals were displayed followed by specific SMART objectives for achieving them. SWOT analysis helped in identifying potential risks, which were followed by mitigation strategies. Lastly, proposed rules, equipment and uniforms and competition for first year were provided in this report.  

References

Baldwin, H. R. (2019). A review of the benefits and risks associated with the practice of martial arts. International Journal of Martial Arts, 5, 62-75.

Boguszewski, D., Suchcicka, B., Grzegorz Adamczyk, J., & Bia?oszewski, D. (2013). The functional efficiency and incidence of injuries in men practicing aikido. Pilot study. Journal of Combat Sports & Martial Arts, 4(1), 67-73. https://doi.org/10.5604/20815735.1073629

Budo Dragon. (2020). Why Aikido has lost popularity? A look into the decline of Aikido. https://budodragon.com/why-aikido-has-lost-popularity/#Aikido_has_a_passive_philosophy

Canaria, K. (2015). How Aikido’s Loss It’s Popularity Because Of Jiu-Jitsu And MMA. https://jiujitsutimes.com/how-aikidos-loss-its-popularity-because-of-jiu-jitsu-and-mma/

DeMarco, M. (2016). Aikido: O-Sensei's Sublime Synthesis, Vol. 1. Via Media Publishing.
Gold, J. (2020). Aikido Demographics: A Special Report. https://aikidojournal.com/2020/12/11/aikido-demographics-a-special-report/
Jacobs, M. (2020). Report Shows Aikido in Severe Decline. https://blackbeltmag.com/aikido-decline

Kimmel, M., & Rogler, C. R. (2018). Affordances in interaction–the case of Aikido. Ecological Psychology, 30(3), 195-223. https://doi.org/10.1080/10407413.2017.1409589
Lukoff, D., & Strozzi-Heckler, R. (2017). Aikido: A martial art with mindfulness, somatic, relational, and spiritual benefits for veterans. Spirituality in Clinical Practice, 4(2), 81-91. https://doi.org/10.1037/scp0000134

Ryde Aikido. (2022). Uniforms & Equipment. https://rydeaikido.org/classes/uniforms-equipment/
Szabolcs, Z., Szabo, A., & Köteles, F. (2019). Acute psychological effects of aikido training. Baltic Journal of Sport and Health Sciences, 1(112), 42-49. https://doi.org/10.33607/bjshs.v112i1.778

Vitale, J. A., Bassani, T., Galbusera, F., Bianchi, A., & Martinelli, N. (2018). Injury rates in martial arts athletes and predictive risk factors for lower limb injuries. The Journal of sports medicine and physical fitness, 58(9), 1296-1303. https://doi.org/10.23736/S0022-4707.17.07536-3.

MGMT20143 Idea Generation and Business Model Development Assignment Sample

Weighting: 30% (30 marks)
Word limit: 1500 words (+/- 10%)

Objective of Assessment

1. Develop, through independent research, an advanced and integrated understanding of the key concepts of innovation, business models, and new ventures in commercial, digital, service, or social contexts.

2. Critically analyse cases of disruptive innovation by applying lean entrepreneurship principles.

3. Generate, evaluate and communicate creative ideas for new ventures to a variety of audiences.

4. Research and apply established theories related to ideation processes, business model design principles, and forecasting.
Task description -

• The objective of this assessment is to learn how to develop your own business idea, complemented by research and observational insights that detail why it is compelling.

• You are required to submit a report of your idea including the business model canvas, the interrelationships among the business model components that are essential to its success, critical risks and assumptions, and overall feasibility.

• Your report for online assignment help should demonstrate your critical thinking skills and your ability to professionally articulate your findings.

Solution

Introduction

Starting a new organization fundamental distinction between opportunity and a concept is crucial. The concept is a vision that's also designed based on the possibility that has been recognized, whereas an initiative is a positive possibility that detects the requirement for new services. Due to their being unable to recognize the issue and opportunity imbalance, new businesses constantly fail during their initial stages. An innovative business concept proposed in this report is Amazon’s drone delivery system. This business concept can help to provide clients effective delivery within a time. The system takes into account logistics; drone design and other aspects to forecast what Amazon may deploy and manage the drone control. Excluding, cost savings Research and Development expenses of up to a third on every package delivered compared to surface delivery appear realistic.

Identified gap

The primary important step of an effective and innovative concept is to find the main problem. In the existing business it can include any type of limitation structure and challenges which need to be encountered. The innovative idea of the drone delivery system can help address issues which most of the public are recently facing critically. Most of the packages are delivered lately due to traffic (Crisan & Nechita, 2019). The drastic increase of late delivery creates a bad impact within the customer which needs to be solved quickly.

Benefits of the concept

1. Benefit for the company

It is more affordable to operate and purchase than the conventional methods of transportation delivery. It can help to reduce labour cost and it can be used autonomously. It is also much safer than the traditional delivery system (Hong & Murray, 2017).

2. Benefit for their clients

Amazon can provide the items to their customers on time. Customers can track their items or products quickly and also help create doorstep delivery. This concept can help to increase the customer retention process effectively.

Business model

The manufacturing business concept will be utilized to determine whether the suggested business concept is practical. The producer creates the goods using the raw materials in this form of business structure, and can either sell the finished package directly to customers through the aid of a distribution.

Evaluation of feasibility

The feasibility analysis process can help check the viability of business model.

The concept of drone delivery is innovative. The prospect of obtaining a item delivered by drone is probably exciting to many people within its delivery area. A further benefit is a quicker delivery quick response. Drone deliveries would almost probably take less time on average than traditional deliveries (Jung & Kim, 2017). Current customers have the option of waiting multiple hours for delivery to arrive at their house or traveling to a store to purchase the merchandise. The client only has to wait a little while and obtains the stuff thanks to drone delivery. Additionally, it's possibly even probable that longer-range drones operating out of urban hubs will lower delivery costs in rural locations. Amazon stands to earn significantly if the drone initiative is successful. Amazon will have an important competitive advantage across both digital and physical stores. Business can grow as a result of drone deliveries' speedy turnaround and early novelty. The report reveals that drone delivery offers a competitive edge of at least one-third per item over conventional delivery, even though the mechanics of the system are still an unknown for individuals of Amazon's internal operations. Similar system might be used for parcel delivery, but using a dynamic traffic model. Parcel delivery necessitates point-to-point transportation between separate private entities as opposed to the connector model of delivering the product (Pandit & poojari, 2014) . Based on the postal drone dispatching model, this scattered traffic volume can either reduce or increase their distance restrictions, posing a distinct set of technological issues and possible solutions than product delivery. Amazon can have a significant competitive advantage in both online and offline retail. The quick turnaround and early novelty of drone delivery can increase business. Even though the physics of the system are still unknown to some of Amazon's internal operations, the analysis suggests that drone delivery gives a competitive edge of at least one-third per item over conventional delivery. Deliveries made by drones would almost certainly take less time overall than deliveries made by humans. Current clients can either drive to a store to buy the item in person or wait several hours for delivery to come to their home. Thanks to drone delivery, the client just needs to wait a short time to get the items.

Figure 1: Sales of Amazon from 2018-2022
(Source: Shavarani et al., 2019)

Critical success factor

The critical success factor is most essential for any organization. They need to ensure the development of the organization to retain trust of customers. The critical success factor can help to make successful business for the Amazon are mentioned:

1. Help of delivery

The on-time delivery system of items can help to ensure success rate of the company

2. Environment impact

Drone delivery has been considered an eco-friendly process which helps to maintain sustainability in the environment.

3. Affordable price

This system has not been attached with traditional system which can help to produce sustainability with affordable price.

Challenges

First before potential of drone delivery could be fully realized, a variety of major obstacles must be overcome. The effective use of delivery drones’ hinges upon that creation of real solutions to yet unresolved issues, which reflect a dynamic field of study and governance (Sudhury et al., 2016). There major categories and a single required technology can be used to categories these problems.

The two main drawbacks of delivery drones, particularly aerial drones, in comparison to traditional truck deliveries are distance and payload. Aerial drones must have lightweight batteries, which are insufficient for long-range or high loads. For instance, the present Amazon prototype may make deliveries up to 4 lb across a 16 mi range. Commercial delivery drones cannot completely replace current delivery systems due to each destination is within 16 mi of a factory, it's not like every residence is an approachable house, and not every shipment weighs less than 4 lbs. The energy efficiency, cost and time of delivery drones directly relates to their economic feasibility and environmental impact. For instance, it is immediately obvious that using a drone to transport packages will lead to lower net carbon pollution than traditional delivery methods.

Design problems that directly affect the sustainability and viability of the drone-delivery idea include improving the effectiveness of drones by developing it quicker, less expensive, greener, quieter, more able to handle more traffic. The first image that springs to mind as we consider of synchronization is a scientific knowledge image of a sky filled with drones and aero planes flying by one another in a carefully planned dance of close calls and changing paths. In actuality, stringent segregation between planes will definitely bring the skies free for decades to come due to a mix of technical challenges and cautious regulation (Shavarani et al., 2019). All pilot drone is required to employ a specific technology known as the Integrated Dependent Monitoring in certain congested airspaces. All involved aircraft must be aware of the positions, altitudes, and speeds of surrounding aircraft, as well as the controllers. . Amazon can provide the items to their customers on time. Customers can track their items or products quickly and also help create doorstep delivery. This concept can help to increase the customer retention process effectively. Similar system might be used for parcel delivery Even though many drone also have ADS in transmitters, which enable them to see the relative locations and speeds of other cooperating aircraft, the Government strictly only requires ADS out transmitters, expressly for every drone to broadcast has its position. In some crowded airspaces, all drone pilots are required to use a particular technology called as Integrated Dependent Monitoring. The positions, altitudes, and speeds of any nearby aircraft as well as the controllers must be known to all involved aircraft. The government strictly only requires ADS out transmitters, specifically for every drone to broadcast its position. Many drones also include ADS in transmitters, which allow them to see the relative locations and speeds of other participating aircraft.

Conclusion

Amazon will have an important competitive advantage across both digital and physical stores. Business can grow as a result of drone deliveries' speedy turnaround and early novelty. The report reveals that drone delivery offers a competitive edge of at least one-third per item over conventional delivery, even though the mechanics of the system are still an unknown for individuals of Amazon's internal operations. Drone deliveries would almost probably take less time on average than traditional deliveries. Current customers have the option of waiting multiple hours for delivery to arrive at their house or traveling to a store to purchase the merchandise. The client only has to wait a little while and obtains the stuff thanks to drone delivery. By simulating the Elite Air structure in the globe, the idea presents a beneficial framework to investigate the work innovation of the drone structure. Amazon can provide the items to their customers on time. Customers can track their items or products quickly and also help create doorstep delivery. This concept can help to increase the customer retention process effectively.

Similar system might be used for parcel delivery, but using a dynamic traffic model. Parcel delivery necessitates point-to-point transportation between separate private entities as opposed to the connector model of delivering the product. Based on the postal drone dispatching model, this scattered traffic volume can either reduce or increase their distance restrictions, posing a distinct set of technological issues and possible solutions than product delivery.

Reference list

Cri?an, G. C., & Nechita, E. (2019). On a cooperative truck-and-drone delivery system. Procedia Computer Science, 159, 38-47. Retrieved at: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1877050919313365/pdf?md5=8f9c34e9f2d6a510a540c5cab44b1734&pid=1-s2.0-S1877050919313365-main.pdf

Hong, I., Kuby, M., & Murray, A. (2017). A deviation flow refueling location model for continuous space: A commercial drone delivery system for urban areas. In Advances in Geocomputation (pp. 125-132). Springer, Cham. Retrieved at: http://www.geocomputation.org/2015/papers/GC15_64.pdf

Jung, S., & Kim, H. (2017). Analysis of amazon prime air uav delivery service. Journal of Knowledge Information Technology and Systems, 12(2), 253-266. Retrieved at: https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Sunghun-Jung2/publication/317389269_Analysis_of_Amazon_Prime_Air_UAV_Delivery_Service/links/5938954aaca272bcd19ffe20/Analysis-of-Amazon-Prime-Air-UAV-Delivery-Service.pdf

Pandit, V., & Poojari, A. (2014). A study on amazon prime air for feasibility and profitability: A graphical data analysis. IOSR Journal of Business and Management, 16(11), 06-11. Retrieved at: https://www.academia.edu/download/35400474/B0161110611.pdf

Ross, P. E. (2018). Iceland's consumers try drone delivery: The startup Aha takes on Amazon with basic drones bearing burgers-[News]. IEEE Spectrum, 55(10), 12-13. Retrieved at: https://ieeexplore.ieee.org/iel7/6/8482401/08482412.pdf

Shavarani, S. M., Mosallaeipour, S., Golabi, M., & ?zbirak, G. (2019). A congested capacitated multi-level fuzzy facility location problem: An efficient drone delivery system. Computers & Operations Research, 108, 57-68. Retrieved at:https://www.research.manchester.ac.uk/portal/files/87967287/OnlineVersion.pdf

Sudbury, A. W., & Hutchinson, E. B. (2016). A cost analysis of amazon prime air (drone delivery). Journal for Economic Educators, 16(1), 1-12. Retrieved at: https://161.45.205.92/index.php/jfee/article/download/1512/1090

BIZ102 Understanding People and Organisations Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Individual/Group Individual
Length 800 words (+/- 10%)

Learning Outcomes

a) Explain the importance of self- awareness and emotional intelligence, and analyse its impact on professional competencies
b) Integrate strategies to effectively interact with others in a diverse professional context
c) Identify and reflect on own strengths and their application in the business context
d) Reflect on feedback to identify opportunities for self- improvement and professional development

Instruction:

Using the theoretical concepts on Diversity & Inclusion & VUCA from the Module 4 Learning

Resources compose your reflective journal entry answering these guiding questions:

1. What have you learnt about yourself from this conversation?
2. What specific theoretical concepts from this module give you the greatest understanding of your own approach to Diversity & Inclusion?
3. What competencies, skills and qualities will be most critical for you to achieve your future career goals in a VUCA world? Explain which of your top 5 VIA Character
Strengths would be most valuable in developing this competency.

References & Appendix

1. Include your Diversity Fingerprint in the appendix of your reflective journal

2. You need to include at least four references. At least two references must be from the sources in Module 4.1 & 4.2 which present the theoretical concepts identified, to support your ideas.

3. Follow the APA 7th edition style of referencing to cite your academic resources and provide your reference list

Solution

Reflective Journal Entry

It has been learned after the conversation that I possess all the skills and abilities that are required in the workplace today. In addition to that, there has been good conversation skill within me. This has been known to me as I have made conversation comfortable and flexible with the help of which my class colleague has been able to place her points and defend my views too. Immense value has been provided by employers to general competencies of the workplace (Farnsworth et al., 2002). It has been known that there has been a presence of complexities and diversities within the workplace today due to the competitiveness of different industries.

Success of business has been sought by organizations, as well as, employers. It has been understood to me that there has been the requirement of rewarding careers as per the work culture of today's workplace. As there has been the presence of diversity and distinct stakeholders in the organizations, there has been the requirement of inclusive practice within the organizations that are associated with embracement of differences of people to harness innovativeness (Diversity Council of Australia, 2020). In addition to that, it permits employees and companies to progress for management assignment help.

As opined by Kuknor, & Bhattacharya, (2021), effective embracement of diversity and practice of inclusion is being depicted to both the expansion of enjoyment of employees and dedication to work. This results in the expansion of effectiveness of organization. I have learned that there has been the requirement of diversity for differentiating and elucidating groups of several people from each other. The concept of stereotypes, as well as, bias has provided me with the greatest acknowledgment of my approach to Diversity and Inclusion. I have clearly understood the matter of separation that results in exclusion and the matter of integration that results in inclusion.

In a broad sense, it can be said that separation leads to the shortage of employees in organizations and inclusion leads to an increase of employees. This is due to the fact that with inclusion, one comes closer as there has been the improvement of good communication skills and bonding among employees and seniors of the organization (Solkhe, 2021). The concept of VUCA world has a clear resemblance with my approach to Diversity and Inclusion. The reason for the requirements of embracement of organizations of human differences has been acknowledged with the help of Module 4. There should be a collaboration of both consumers and organizations in creating several possible opportunities for business to happen smoothly.

There has been an understanding of competencies, qualities, and skills that may be very critical for me to attain the career targets in the upcoming days within VUCA world. I am unable to paint an image of the upcoming days that I require and desire. In addition to that, there has been a scarcity of motivational skills within me. This scarcity has made a delay in my case in creating my targets for upcoming days. Failure has been observed in the matter of the skills of adaptability which is very important for any individual to acquire future targets.

Apart from these, there has been the scarcity of several emotional skills within me that are required to achieve success in future. Personal Growth has not been there within me as there has been the scarcity of motivation within me. For example, I have observed that I cannot be able to concentrate hard on my tasks due to lack of motivation. There has been a presence of worry in my mind concerning my future. I cannot decide what I should do and what I should not do. A total confusion surrounds my mind concerning this. In addition to that, there has been a scarcity of resiliency within me. There has been a scarcity of purpose in life with me. This makes it hard for me to sketch a convenient and appropriate future goal for me.

Expression of emotion, regulation of behavior, and avoidance has not been present within me. The absence of these skills may have an adverse impact on my portraying the future targets for me. I may face issues and challenges in future at the time seeking a job and when I will go for job interviews. However, 5 VIA Character Strengths within me will help me a lot in enhancing this competency. I am very brave and with the help of this strength, I will be able to face any sort of challenges that may arrive as obstacles in the middle of me and my achievement of success.

Creativity can help me in progressing a lot in my future workplace and I can be able to motivate myself with the help of this. Curiosity will help me to have eagerness in the case of any task and will help me to know the tasks of the organizations in advance. Leadership and Teamwork will help in driving my career high. Apart from this, balanced approach has been there within me to risk by which I can be able to handle critical tasks of my future organization. I will be able to help myself in any sort of critical situation that I may face in my future organization with the help of these skills.  

References

Diversity Council of Australia. (2020). Diversity & inclusion explained. Retrieved Diversity in the workplace: Benefits, challenges, and the required managerial explained Farnsworth, D., Clark, J. L., Green, K., López, M., Wysocki, A., & Kepner, K. (2002).from https://www.dca.org.au/di-planning/getting-started-di/diversity-inclusion-

Kuknor, S., & Bhattacharya, S. (2021). Organizational inclusion and leadership in times of global crisis. Australasian Accounting, Business and Finance Journal, 15(1), 93-112. https://ro.uow.edu.au/aabfj/vol15/iss1/7/

Solkhe, A. (2021). Diversity and inclusion: An analysis of current status, dimensions and methodology through systematic review of literature. Asian Journal of Economics, Finance and Management, 7-20. https://www.globalpresshub.com/index.php/AJEFM/article/view/1097tools. EDIS, 2002(2). https://doi.org/10.32473/edis-hr022-2002

MGMT20148 Strategic Solutions for Sustainable Organisations Assignment Sample

This is an individual, written assessment, to be completed in professional report format. You are required to write around 3,000 words (+/- 10%), excluding preliminaries, tables, figures, reference list and appendices. The report requires in-text referencing and a full reference list in APA style, with evidence that you have critically read and integrated a minimum of 18 suitable scholarly references.

The purpose of this assessment is to present the final report of the project you proposed in Assessment 2. This report should build on your learning log entries, your proposal submitted for Assessment 2, and the feedback from the tutor/coordinator. In order to successfully complete Assessment 3, you are required to complete the project you have proposed in Assessment 2 and produce a professional report that shows that you have followed through from finding your research questions/objectives, to completing strategic analysis, and ultimately to answering your research questions and developing recommendations that arise from your findings. The report structure will depend upon your chosen project but it will typically include the following:

- Preliminaries: Title page (with a clear project title), executive summary, table of contents

- Introduction, including: Background, problem statement, and research question(s)/objective(s)

- Literature review: Logically structured and critical review of academic, scholarly, peer-reviewed literature

- Methodology, including: Transparent presentation of what professional industry information you have used, how you chose it, and how you analysed it

- Findings from your analysis: This should include the outcomes of any strategic analyses you completed, as well as any other findings you may have uncovered

- Discussion of findings in comparison to your previously reviewed literature

- Conclusion, including: answering your research question(s) AND strategic recommendations

- Reference list

- Appendices

Solution

Introduction

Background of the Study

Sanofi is a pharmaceutical and healthcare behemoth with headquarters in Paris, France. Founded in 1973, this company has since amalgamated with others like Sanofi-Aventis. The corporation has a market revenue of €36.13bn in 2019, according the study. Sanofi has built facilities for producing over-the-counter medications and has participated in the manufacturing of other pharmaceuticals. In an effort to boost productivity, the firm has made health and wellness one of its sustainable development goals (Sanofi, 2022). Goal No. 3 of the Sustainable Development Goals focuses on reducing health problems before they start.

Research Aims

The aim of the study is to analyse and evaluate the impact of Health and Well-being on the performance of Sanofi.

Research Objectives

• To analyse the impact of health and well-being on company’s employees and their performance level.
• To introduce a health belief model for company and for pharmaceutical industry for enhancing performance
• To analyse the existing literatures and information concerned to the topic
• To analyze the challenges that the company faces to implement Health and well-being as a sustainable goal

Research Questions

RQ1 – What are the observed impacts of health and welfare on the performance standards of Sanofi?
RQ2 – What is the importance of Health and well being as a sustainable development goal?
RQ3 – What are the challenges that Sanofi faced in implementing the health and welfare in the company?

Problem Statement

It is crucial for a people to maintain a healthy life expectancy and improve their standard of living if they want to be viable over the long term. It's important to recognize that Sanofi's emphasis on employee health and wellness contributes to higher productivity and smoother business operations. However, in the present context, greater emphasis is placed on the elimination of a broad range of diseases and the resolution of several health issues.

Research Rationale

The purpose of this research for assignment help is to solve the challenge of quantifying the value of employee health and happiness to the business. The issue emerges when health and happiness are pursued as long-term objectives. Difficulty in eradicating and stopping the spread of deadly illnesses is a major issue in the world today. The relevance of employee health and happiness to the long-term success of the business is highlighted, shedding new light on the present predicament.

Overview of the study

The study is focused on the analysing the impact of health and well being in pharmaceutical industry, it is being observed frequently that employees are experiencing burn out very frequently leading to less productivity in work and when it comes to Sanofi which is a pharmaceutical industry, it demands a heavy research and study as well as development. Hence, taking care of the company’s employee which are the key assets, it is essential for developing and implementing new policies for the company to implement in order to ensure a positive and healthy environment leading to a good productivity.  

LITERATURE REVIEW

Introduction

This section will focus on the Literature review section, it is a type of review whose objective is to get familiarise with the existing and current research and discussions on a certain subject or field of study. In this study, the topic of research is Impact of Health and Well-Being in the Performance of Sanofi, hence each of the research paper will be focused on analysing the well being and health policies and other parameter into an organization in pharmaceutical industry (Scribbr 2020).
An in-depth understanding of chosen area may be gained via a literature study. Concepts, research strategies, and experimental methodologies crucial to the discipline will be covered. It will also aid in getting a glimpse into the ways in which scholars have used the ideas covered in the class to solve actual, tangible issues (Western Sydney University 2018).

Making prevention a reality: living health and wellbeing at Sanofi

According to Carroll et al. 2021, many factors of health and well-being are generally acknowledged, encompassing socioeconomic situation, level of income, schooling, access to health care, and society views. Professional health and welfare are becoming more important, not particularly in light of the current coronavirus outbreak. Sanofi, a worldwide biopharmaceutical business including over 100,000 employees in 100 countries and over 1200 in the UK, translates scientific advancement into healthcare products that assist individuals around the world overcome health difficulties (Carroll et al. 2021).

Figure 1: Employee Wellbeing
(Source: Charlie 2021)

The paper and Sanofi offer a diverse treatment portfolio, preventing sickness with vaccinations, give therapies to alleviate pain and suffering, and Sanofi supports those who experience from uncommon illnesses as well as the millions who do have long-term disorders. the purpose of the research paper is to assist individuals on various health journeys, including our staff (Carroll et al. 2021). Occupational health is a business primary concern at Sanofi because they aspire to be leaders in this ground, but it is also a direct result of the culture and commitment to being responsible business, setting priorities health and wellbeing again for beneficial of the company's employees in addition to assist decrease healthcare costs as well as demand on the National Health Service (NHS). Even though the primary objective of occupational healthcare has to be public health, there are crucial economic and commercial factors (Carroll et al. 2021).

Authors have discussed that poor employee mental health and related disorders are estimated to cost companies up to £45 billion each year, with 89% low productivity, 86% incapacity to turn off from business, 73% leaves, and much more than 60% mental health absenteeism. Furthermore, for every £1 invested in health and wellness programmes, companies may expect a £5 return on their investment due to lower attendance, reduced absenteeism, and workforce turnover. Sanofi acknowledges these earnings quality, as well as the negative effect of poor health and happiness on commercial requirements. Sanofi's objective is simple yet vital: to preserve, educate, promote, and supporting individuals (Carroll et al. 2021).

Figure 2: health and Well-being in the workplace
(Source: Lee 2019)

In the research paper, it is observed that Sanofi performed a complete audit utilising the Public Health England tools to objectively evaluate the service and achieve best-in-class workplace health performance. This toolkit examines the existing information in numerous areas, including accessibility of resources, access to assistance, and execution of wellbeing programmes in mental and physical health, violence prevention, and overall well-being and safety, using a red, amber, and green (RAG) scoring system (Carroll et al. 2021). The research and the authors in this research has focused on the toolbox assesses occupational health effectiveness and recommends realistic action plans to address any detected deficiencies. Sanofi audit lasted three weeks and included an internal peer review that focused on input from internal surveys and continuing employee requirements.

In addition, the research paper conducted an optimize performance in contrast to other industries/sectors in order to get a better grasp of overall best practises. This is also reflected in Sanofi's involvement and leadership in the Thames Valley Chambers of Commerce (TVCC), which has enabled the company to create networks and exchange best practises with peers and other businesses (Carroll et al. 2021).

Building programs for health, safety, and well-being of the company employees- design considerations for meeting unique requirements of organizations

According to Shanafelt et al. 2019, burnout among doctors, nurses, and advanced practice professionals has reached epidemic proportions in the present health care practice environment. Burnout among health care practitioners is driven mostly by organizational causes instead of personal resilience issues. The moral-ethical argument which includes caring for the Company employees, the feasibility study (expense of turnover and poorer quality), and the regulation case are the four key motivations that encourage health care executives to develop well-being initiatives. The researchers have discussed in their research paper, finally, health care professional burnout is harmful to patients. The authors explore the aim, scope, value, and lastly the resources of organizational well-being initiatives, as well as success measures and a framework for action. The goal of such a program is to supervise organizational efforts to decrease professional fatigue risk, create effective well-being amongst health care workers, and, as a result, maximise the performance of healthcare facilities. Those categories should be measured, benchmarked, and evaluated over time by the program (Shanafelt et al. 2019).

The success of such programme will spread as well as create deep expertise in the drivers of specialist fulfillment among the pharmaceutical and medical professionals, as well as an approach to evaluating flaws and challenges of the system and further pertinent components of corporate culture, as well as experience and knowledge with different techniques to foster improved performance (Shanafelt et al. 2019).

Challenges that organisations face in implementing health and well-being as a sustainable goal

According to Manandhar et al. 2018, enhanced healthcare infrastructure aids businesses in achieving their full potential. However, directly opposed to the aforementioned, it has been claimed that, as funding and financial assets of businesses in the health and very well of staff members have decreased, many systems of protection and health are quite low across several businesses as well as, as a result, it lacks necessary sections that are considered necessary for the infections are prevented. Companies would lose a tonne of money because their employees aren't empowered or aware of health risks, despite what we just read (Darrow et al. 2020).

Since a moral-ethical angle, employees who tends to have low burnout and maximum specialised satisfaction is extremely desirable, as well as the arguments in favor of the strategic plan for improving clinician well-being are robust and growing. It is observed that a well-being program that is maintained and suitably planned, managed by a qualified and professionals practioners in the research area, offers an increasingly important foundation for healthcare establishments to execute their goal.
The paper has thoroughly discussed the topics concerned with why the health care companies must act for the well-being of the employees and in what way they must support each other as well as bringing new policies for employees to cater to everyone. Along with that, the purpose of the well-being program has also been discussed to address the risks bringing more improvement to the pharmaceutical industry.

Figure 3: Health Belief Model
(Source: Manandhar et al. 2018)

 
METHODOLOGY

It is necessary to opt for the right research approach in order to collect feasible data and come up with the desired output. In this study of analyzing the impact of health and well-being of the employees and the performance productivity in Sanofi, the research approach which is being used is the Deductive approach and Qualitative Data collection techniques are used following the Secondary data sources.

Research approach

The researcher has selected the Deductive Approach, as its name suggests it includes a collection of data and finding the ones which are suitable and related to the study. Conventionally, when researchers think of scientific inquiry, they visualize a logical method of inquiry (Streefkerk 2019). The researcher looks at the work of others, reads up on the current ideas of the phenomena being investigated, and puts forth hypotheses based on what they've learned. The researcher has decided to use what is known as a deductive method, which involves coming up with several hypotheses connected to a few key ideas and then drawing up a research strategy to test those hypotheses (Sheppard 2020).

Figure 4: Deductive Reasoning
(Source: Streefkerk 2019)

Data collection Technique

The data collection technique which is being used in the study is Qualitative Data, this sort of data involves the collection and analysis of non-numerical data in order to better develop an understanding of the study concepts, opinions, and ideas. This is utilized to gather in-depth insights into the issue and generate new ideas and concepts for research. The researcher in the study is using the qualitative data collecting method (Bhandari 2020). This topic will be subjected to a thematic analysis by the researcher. The term "qualitative data" is used to provide conceptual findings that supplement the primary data.

Figure 5: Qualitative Research Design
(Source: Penmypaper 2019)

Data collection sources

In this study, the data collection source is Secondary Data, secondary data may be found in a wide variety of archival and published sources, including but not limited to government documents, academic journals, and popular media. Data that has previously been obtained from primary sources and made accessible for further study is referred to as secondary data. Such information is based on data that was gathered in the past (Formplus 2020).

Figure 6: Secondary data
(Source: Valcheva 2020)

Findings

In this study on the impact of health and well-being on performance in the pharmaceutical industry, it is observed and found that the pharmaceutical sector, health, and well-being are known to be a critical components of employee sustainability and enlarged productivity. Pharmacists are continually exposed to biological and chemical risks that are potentially harmful to their health. Additionally, a lack of proper safety requirements and violations may have an influence on employee performance and have long - term costs for corporate persistence.

As a result, it is essential to maintaining optimum health and well - being procedures while ensuring that all personnel follows such rules. Tips for keeping enhanced standards of safety in the pharmaceutical industry and the companies such as Sanofi which are discussed in the study.

• Offering the employees flexibility to work wherever and whenever they want to work in a specified working environment leads to more productivity.

• Giving employees a voice is very necessary to let the employees come up with their ideas and thoughts and lead to a positive working and influencing the working environment. This will also aid the pharmaceutical company to have new research and development ideas.

• Supporting their personal needs, it is also essential for a company to look after their personal needs and support for well-being. This will lead to a positive impact on productivity.

Discussion

The world is still suffering from a worldwide pandemic that has affected almost every individual in some manner, and as some have correctly said, this is the new VUCA reality. Prioritizing one's own and one's family's health has become a must for everyone. The epidemic manifested itself not just as a medical worry, affecting people's physical health, but also their mental health. To decrease the possibility of propagation, social distancing techniques, isolation, lockdowns, and the shutdown of educational institutions, businesses, and entertainment venues were used (Shetty 2021).

These restricting restrictions, in turn, influenced how individuals engage socially, resulting in a decline in their mental health. Employees at many organizations have reported a decrease in their mental health. According to a Harvard Business Review survey, 42% of respondents reported a decline in their mental health.
Mental health maintenance is an essential component of healthcare, and pharmaceutical firms must serve as trailblazers for a shift toward a more positive dialogue on the subject. The epidemic has sparked considerable debate about how to manage workers' mental health. This, in turn, may help reduce the stigma connected with discussing it. Additionally, the availability of professionally trained counselors who can give help pushes companies forward in the approach of 360° digital integration of employee wellness (Shetty 2021).

• Conducting sessions with the professional counselor - Offering mental health support to the employees through offering a counselor advice and making a one-to-one session available.

• Letting digital support be engaged in health and well-being for increased productivity - Digital initiatives increase employee well-being. Wearables and applications may measure employees' heart rate, oxygen levels, and emotional condition. Aggregated data may help pharma companies determine which workers require professional aid (Shukla 2020).

• Flexibility with working hours and traveling as they move forward for hybrid working - Working hours and travel as the organization and people transition to hybrid working If work hours are cut by 3 hours, for example, and operating shifts are implemented, not only will facilities continue to function normally, but personnel will also be able to replenish well before following day (Shukla 2020).

• Financial support to the employees - As companies continue to adopt social distance rather than emotional separation, organizations must assist their workers to become more resistant. Adopting a comprehensive employee welfare policy that starts with a two-way medium of communication, changing how they operate with the new baseline in mind, giving financial assistance, and incorporating all-inclusive health services must be pharmaceutical companies' top priorities (The Catalyst 2020).

Conclusion

Health and well-being in the pharmaceutical industry have become very good but I'm already crucial need as employees are working 24 × 7 in the healthcare and medical industry which also includes a significant part of the pharmaceutical industry leading the leading to the employees working at the same proportion as the other medical industry employees. Hence it is necessary to ensure the positivity and Wellness of employees’ health and well-being of time blows in the industry is very important, This also influences positive productivity the work and leads to more growth and development It is also a benefit for the company as well.

The study has focused on the Impact of Health and Well-Being on the Performance of Sanofi, it is a well-known pharmaceutical company that has brought these considerations into the highlight and developed many policies concerned with employee wellness ensuring more productivity with positive results.

The study has thoroughly analyzed the background of the company with the research aims and objectives, research questions, and rationale overview. Further, in the research, the literature review sections have focused on analyzing the existing data from journals, research papers, etc. And developing an in-depth understanding to carry out future research and form a new opinion. All the research is conducted by using secondary research sources and qualitative data collection techniques following the deductive approach to ensure that cream data is collected, analyzed, and presented. The discussion and finding section in the study has focused on the key findings of the studies such as major steps taken by Sanofi and other companies in the pharmaceutical industry for ensuring the health and well-being impacting productivity and the key challenges faced.  

REFERENCES

Bhandari, P. (2020). What Is Qualitative Research? | Methods & Examples. [online] Scribbr. Available at: https://www.scribbr.com/methodology/qualitative-research/#:~:text=These%20are%20some%20of%20the,among%20a%20group%20of%20people. [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Charlie (2021). Employee Wellbeing - ENCOMPASS Benefits. [online] ENCOMPASS Benefits. Available at: https://encompassbenefits.com/encompass-blog/health-safety/employee-wellbeing/ [Accessed 4 Oct. 2022].

Darrow, J.J., Avorn, J. and Kesselheim, A.S., 2020. FDA approval and regulation of pharmaceuticals, 1983-2018. Jama, 323(2), pp.164-176. doi:10.1001/jama.2019.20288
Formplus. (2020). What is Secondary Data? + [Examples, Sources, & Analysis]. [online] Available at: https://www.formpl.us/blog/secondary-data [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Lee, Y., 2019. Workplace health and its impact on human capital: seven key performance indicators of workplace health. Indoor environment and health, p.43. DOI: 10.5772/intechopen.85936

Manandhar, M., Hawkes, S., Buse, K., Nosrati, E., & Magar, V. (2018). Gender, health and the 2030 agenda for sustainable development. Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 96(9), 644. DOI: https://doi.org/10.2471%2FBLT.18.211607

Penmypaper. (2019). Qualitative Research Design 2019 - Definition & Techniques. [online] Available at: https://penmypaper.com/blog/qualitative-research/ [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Scribbr. (2020). What is the purpose of a literature review? [online] Available at: https://www.scribbr.com/frequently-asked-questions/purpose-of-a-literature-review/ [Accessed 4 Oct. 2022].

Shanafelt, T., Trockel, M., Ripp, J., Murphy, M.L., Sandborg, C. and Bohman, B., 2019. Building a program on well-being: key design considerations to meet the unique needs of each organization. Academic Medicine, 94(2), pp.156-161. DOI: 10.1097/ACM.0000000000002415

Sheppard, V. (2020). 1.7 Deductive Approaches to Research. [online] Bccampus.ca. Available at: https://pressbooks.bccampus.ca/jibcresearchmethods/chapter/1-7-deductive-approaches-to-research/#:~:text=A%20deductive%20approach%20to%20research,theories%20(see%20Figure%201.5). [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Shetty, C. (2021). How pharma companies can ensure mental wellbeing of employees during the pandemic. [online] People Matters. Available at: https://www.peoplematters.in/amp-pledgeforhealth-how-pharma-companies-can-ensure-mental-wellbeing-of-employees-during-the-pandemic-31212 [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Shukla, R. (2020). Maintaining Health and Safety in the Pharmaceutical Industry - Lindström. [online] Lindström. Available at: https://lindstromgroup.com/in/article/maintaining-health-and-safety-in-the-pharmaceutical-industry/ [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Streefkerk, R. (2019). Inductive vs. Deductive Research Approach (with Examples). [online] Scribbr. Available at: https://www.scribbr.com/methodology/inductive-deductive-reasoning/ [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

The Catalyst. (2020). Three ways the pharmaceutical industry can positively impact health equity. [online] Available at: https://catalyst.phrma.org/three-ways-the-pharmaceutical-industry-can-positively-impact-health-equity?hs_amp=true [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Valcheva, S. (2020). Secondary Data: Advantages, Disadvantages, Sources, Types. [online] Blog For Data-Driven Business. Available at: https://www.intellspot.com/secondary-data/ [Accessed 5 Oct. 2022].

Western Sydney University (2018). Literature review purpose. [online] Available at: https://www.westernsydney.edu.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0006/1254786/Literature_review_purpose.pdf.

MBA505 Business Psychology, Coaching, and Mentoring Assignment Sample

Assessment Task

The purpose of this assessment is for you to demonstrate and develop your knowledge and skill in Mentoring and coaching as an important people development technique within organizations.

This subject requires you to thoughtfully develop your abilities in coaching and mentoring, and in weeks 8, 9,10 and 12 we will explore styles and techniques in doing this. These skills will serve you well in many facets of your life. To assist with developing your skills, you will be using these skills to interact with your fellow students or others to sharpen your abilities, allow you to observe others and receive assistance so you can learn to work meaningfully with others in the future.

Assessment Description

In writing up your experience of these coaching and mentoring experiences you should reflect on:

• What happened in the interaction, including what aspects went well and what needed improvement,
• How relevant theoretical reading or research you have done applies to the situation,
• What you learned or gained from the experience, and
• Practical actions you could take to improve your approach in the future based on your reading, reflection, experience and observation.

Assessment Instructions

• This is an individual assessment to be submitted via Turnitin.
• You are to write 2000 words, composed of three pieces of 650 words each as follows-

→ One reflection related to your experience of mentoring (covered in week 8),
→ One reflection related to your experience of coaching (covered in weeks 9 and 10),
→ One reflection related to the application of coaching in the workplace (covered in week 12).

• You are expected to include references to strengthen your understanding of the theoretical bases of your work.

• Your writing should be based on very recent experiences only, ie those which have taken place during the in-class sessions or in the workplace during the period of the subject.

• As with all scholarly work, competent and relevant citing and referencing is essential.

Solution

Introduction

The present study is based on reflecting my own experiences regarding mentoring, coaching and the application of the same in the workplace. Along with this, the study aims to put forth the observations, experiences and practical actions I have taken in order to improvise my approach in the future. It also emphasize on how these learning and experience can contribute in my future endeavour as a mentor or coach for management assignment help.

Reflection relating to experience of mentoring

Mentoring involves relationship between a more experienced and less experienced person in terms of knowledge, managing network structure, developing relationship etc where the main goal is personal and professional growth of protégé (Ragins and Kram, 2007). During my learning period I acknowledged that in an organization it is a role or responsibility of mentor to provide strategic approach for development of mentee (employee or group members) by pairing them in more experienced team or making them under more experienced individual. The specified concepts do assist in developing unique culture rather productive organizational culture. The reason behind same is that employees get opportunity to work with someone who is more experienced and enhance their potential as well as improve their performance (Ferayanti, 2020). It would be appropriate to state than mentoring does assist in making significant transitions at workplace. As far as I have witnessed and observed the key variants or characteristic for a successful partnership between groups or two members are confidentiality, understanding, positive expectation and trust. I personally experienced that trust and positive expectation are necessarily required to be in mentee towards mentor so that he or she could learn from mentor and improve their performance.

Mentoring is one of the most effective and powerful development tool applied in organization to that employee could create and promote diverse culture through application of internal resources as experts (Ferayanti, 2020). During my learning period I got opportunity to assess mentoring program of organization and assess reason due to which mentoring program fail in organizations. Through assessing same I analysed that I do have sufficient skill in encouraging different members to work together but I need to improve on provoking them to give best to each other so that mentor is able to acknowledge the area he or she is required to work on. It was a new experience as I got to know about areas on which I have to work such as analysing different relational learning process, learning process, outcome and behaviour. The main reasons which I assessed, due to which mentoring program fails is misbalance between personal development and career development and unavailability of common goals or mutual expectation between mentor and mentee. These learning and acknowledgement would assist me in future in playing role of mentor in organization of which I would be part in efficient way. A successful mentor is the one which does utilizes his or her personal qualities, values and skills and are aware regarding power issues in relationship (Carr, Holmes and Flynn, 2017). Even I got to know about characteristic which are required to be an efficient mentor i.e. having clear purpose of mentoring, supportive, confident, helpful, and able to maintain balance between personal development and career development.

Presently, I do have characteristic such as confident, supporting, helpful but I have to learn keeping balance between personal development and career development as both of them do have major role in overall productivity of an organizations. Thus, I am working on same so that before completion of course I am able to develop skills to required extent so that I could act as efficient mentor. Previously I did not know that mentoring is beneficial for mentor also but during this course I got to know that mentoring is beneficial for mentor, mentee as well as organization. A mentor does benefits in form of self satisfaction and accomplishment through mentoring along with skill development. Even I assessed that not only mentees but mentors also required training for getting better results. The acknowledgments received during my learning period would not only assist me in being proficient mentor but also provided me information about key practices which I could apply in organization of which I would be part in future. Overall, these insights relating to mentoring would not only assist me in developing and promoting diversify culture in organization but also in incorporation of key practices relating to mentoring program for an organization. Lastly for enhancing my skills relating to being proficient mentor ; I would ensure more participation in group activities and work on areas I lack such as deep assessment different relational learning process, acknowledging range of development relationship with assistance of my teacher and senior so that I could excel in same and attain main goal.
Reflection related to the experience of coaching

Leadership coaching is considered as an extremely customized type of learning. It is engaged with individually assisting executives for learning to make out most of that learning for brining successful action, improvisation in performance, effective business results and personal growth (Anthony, 2017). It comes up with several benefits such as proper management of stress and welfare, navigation of culture, leading change, emotional intelligence, effective communication, management of conflict, development of high performing team and strategic thinking (Bernard, 2018) Prior to the module learning, I only though that coaching is all about working as well as interacting with other individuals. However, with the course, I have been familiar with the broader concepts of coaching, its fundamental meaning and principles, its benefits and related models. From the coursework I learned about the significant models of coaching which can be used to offer the base and proper structure for a coaching conversation. I gained insight about one of the most important models i.e. GROW model. It is the tool that unlocks potential and helps in improvising performance by raising self confidence as well as motivation. By this model, it is easy to ask out for efficient questions in a cautiously structured manner that thereof supports in-depth awareness as well as higher responsibility which thereof results into practical steps towards attaining goals and resolve barriers (Panchal and Riddell, 2020).

By considering the above model, for better understanding the coursework provided me with class activities wherein I was asked to form questions for each of the four stages. In addition to this, I gained practical experience on coaching by working with groups, and considering a real time issue that is required to be solved. When there were practical activities, I faced issues in terms of insufficient objectivity and interpersonal skills, for this reason I experienced that feedback play a mandatory role when working with groups, it is important to take notes of everyone involved reaching at a mutual solution. I also realized that in order to make coaching successful, one needs to entail feedbacks at the highest extent. It needs to be collected from team members and managers. For gaining sights we made use of psychometric assessments that can help in determining individual variations. This was really effective in terms of workplace, as it determines the areas for improvement, strengths and provides insights into the personal attributes of leaders in comparison with others. From the coursework, I came across the assessment that can be used at workplace and these comprise of emotional intelligence, cognitive ability, personality, 360 degree psychometrics, on the whole coaching works as well on the whole psychometric assessments work. As a coach, I have gained a good experience as these models helped each one us to determine their personal strengths and weakness, I learned that I have a bit of stage fear and being an introvert I cannot express my opinions and thought, but through this course I have been able to change myself by taking part in group activities and presentations. This has improvised my whole experience as I participated in resolving my team conflict and helped them coping up with their questions and queries.

I have worked my best to stay on top of psychometric assessments by practicing real time online tests, determining and working on my weakest areas, obtaining performance feedbacks and considering whether the technology is working effectively or not. Overall, I can cite that I am needed to improve on my interpersonal skills and improvement areas through taking training, online classes, in-class activities, face to face training, reflective practice, and considering professional development courses.

Reflection related to the application of coaching in the workplace

I realized that presently firm face considerable competitiveness, and innovation as well as change demand for highly motivated as well as top performing people. By considering this aspect, organizations consider ways by which they can allow people to adapt to change, learn new aspects and reflect appropriate behavior in order to be successful. In this way, I got to know about coaching, it is all about changes and for change, constant learning as well as application of new experience, knowledge and skills is paramount. The major objective of coaching is to establish competent, successful, effective and top performing workers (Jackson, 2019). From the coursework, I learned about the realistic application of workplace coaching and how it can garner the positive benefits of cost effectiveness, flexibility, increased productivity, higher self reliance, attainment of performance as well as potential, greater morale and time effectiveness.

By considering this aspect, from the coursework, both theoretical as well as practical knowledge has been gained by me regarding coaching, I can be applied by me in future endeavor as a leader/manager/coach by knowing my employees first, accelerating and supporting development as well as learning environment, mutually working with employees for clarification of values as well as vision, making sure that performance standards are effectively communicated to employees, proper diagnoses of problems, searching out best possible solutions, and developing an action plan. I can state that through this course, I have been capable to develop the necessary qualities of; being enthusiastic, focused, observant, supportive, knowledgeable, and goal-oriented and a good communicator. With the module, I have been able to practice coaching on real time basis, as several activities such as rating myself, developing 2 minute argument, providing group presentation among others has allowed me to build my confidence, carry on responsibilities, consider time management. From the activities I experienced that coaching can be obstructed through organizational culture, insufficient understanding, resistance, lower skill and experience level and insufficient amount of resources as well as time. By keeping this in mind, I acknowledged that everything should be balanced as a coach, and employees must be provided with frequent and positive feedbacks, a culture based on team feedback must be created, allowing employees to think out of box and contribute with new ideas and innovation, employees must also be pushed towards providing opinions and perspectives.

Previously, I did not have such considerable knowledge, but now I can undertake administrative tasks, develop programs, monitor and enhance performance by constructive feedbacks and carry on various significant duties and roles at the workplace. In addition to this, from the course, I also gone through several meaningful videos related to workplace coaching, workplace roles, coaching conversation and coaching cultures. Also, my experience was made even better by further activities such as determining coaching areas, wherein we worked as a group to list the workplace coaching applications. This helped me to determine how I perceive coaching and how it would be beneficial for me when I apply the same in the workplace.

However, I am needed to work on my improvement areas by taking part in skill coaching, training courses that covers ethics and professional development, designing action plans, considering learning training such as personal skills training and agile leadership training.

Conclusion

It can be concluded that I have learned the key concepts, applications, assessments and models of mentoring and coaching in the module. I also improvised my skills and characteristics related with time management, communication, observant, positive, supportive and goal oriented. I was able to determine my personal strengths and weakness, and work on my improvement areas to polish my skills and capabilities. Through the GROW model, I also able to choose from different options, consider goal setting and make decisions as a good coach. In modern business world, it is important for the leader to be open and innovative, for this aspect these experiences have well-prepared me in order to make difficult decisions, manage teams, and be adaptable to changes.

References

Anthony, E.L., (2017). The impact of leadership coaching on leadership behaviors. Journal of Management development. doi < https://doi.org/10.1108/JMD-06-2016-0092>
Bernard, M.E., (2018). Coaching high workplace performance. In Coaching for Rational Living (pp. 295-324). Springer, Cham. doi < https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-74067-6_15>

Carr, M.L., Holmes, W. & Flynn, K., (2017). Using mentoring, coaching, and self-mentoring to support public school educators. The Clearing House: A Journal of Educational Strategies, Issues and Ideas, 90(4), pp.116-124. doi < https://doi.org/10.1080/00098655.2017.1316624>

Ferayanti, M., (2020). Mentoring Prospective School Principals in Indonesia: Which Mentoring Skills Need Improvement?. In Proceedings of the 4th International Conference on Learning Innovation and Quality Education (pp. 1-9). doi < https://doi.org/10.1145/3452144.3453836>

Jackson, S., (2019). Coaching women towards authenticity: An appropriate workplace environment. International Journal of Evidence Based Coaching and Mentoring, Vol. 17 no. 2. pp.64-78. doi < 10.24384/c2z3-qd45>

Panchal, S. and Riddell, P., (2020). The GROWS model: Extending the GROW coaching model to support behavioural change. The Coaching Psychologist. https://psycnet.apa.org/record/2020-89290-002

Ragins, R, B., & Kram, E. K., (2007). (Online).The Handbook of Mentoring at Work: Theory, Research, and Practice. Available through < https://www.researchgate.net/publication/255662364_The_Handbook_of_Mentoring_at_Work>. [Accessed on 5th June 2021]

MGN428 Developing Entrepreneurial Mindsets Assignment Sample

Assignment Brief

Weight 50%
Individual Task
Due Week 13
Max. 2500 words

In Brief

Throughout the unit you are required to reflect upon your entrepreneurial self and your entrepreneurial mindset and document these reflections in a report. Your report will comprise three components. First, you will reflect on a personality test around your entrepreneurial mindset and your social impact awareness taken at the beginning of the unit. Second, you will identify and interview an entrepreneur or intrapreneur and reflect upon this conversation. And third, you will reflect on a personality test to be taken at the end of the unit, and consideration of any changes in your entrepreneurial mindset throughout the unit. This final assessment will help you understand your journey in developing entrepreneurial skills and mindset.

Task Description

Self-reflection is the capacity of humans to exercise introspection and to attempt to learn more about their fundamental nature and essence. It is also a very powerful learning technique. In this Assessment, we ask you to focus your exploration lens onto yourself, away from the content of the unit itself.

There are three specific points along your MGN428 journey at which we request you to self- reflect, and document the thoughts you arrive at during these self-reflections.

The first point is the personality test that you undertake near the beginning of the unit. The purpose of this test is to understand your entrepreneurial orientation as informed by the answers you provide to a series of questions that are commonly used to this end. In your self- reflection at this first point, think about what you experienced in taking the test, and why you experienced these experiences. Also consider the results of the tests and evaluate their accuracy, as you see it. Do you think the results are a good reflection of your entrepreneurial orientation? What else did you learn about yourself from the taking of the test as well as its results? Your self-reflection should include these and other themes.

The second point of self-reflection will be made at a time that is convenient for you during the semester. For this exercise you are required to identify and arrange a conversation with an entrepreneur or intrapreneur. This individual could be someone you know very well (e.g. a family member or a friend), or someone in your more distant network or someone recommended to you. You may also tap into the network of QUT Entrepreneurship and the Foundry, which can connect you with someone to converse with. In your conversation with the entrepreneur or intrapreneur, find out about their journey. Why did they embark on this journey? What are their primary motivators? What have they learnt? When have they failed, and how did they recover? What were some of the successes they accomplished? Where are they today, and where do they want to be in the future? These are just some of the questions you may pose during the conversation. Once your conversation is complete, your task is to document your own thoughts about entrepreneurship or intrapreneurship. As you do this self- reflection, you may want to put yourself in the shoes of the person you conversed with, and consider how you may have reacted or behaved under the same circumstances. What would you have done differently? What would be your own strength areas, and also weak areas in experiencing such an entrepreneurial journey?

And finally, the third point of self-reflection is near the end of the semester, when the same personality test undertaken at the beginning will be retaken by yourself. In a similar fashion to your self-reflection exercise at the first point, conduct the same self-reflection once again. However, on this occasion, focus on the differences you observed in the testing process and the results of the test. How have you changed, and why do you think these changes have happened? And just as equally, in the instance where you observed no or little change, what are the reasons for this? As you answer these and other questions, look for the sources of explanation within yourself.

Please note that the process of self-reflection may not be straight forward to you. It is encouraged that you review the resources made available on Blackboard, although it is highly encouraged also that you explore resources beyond these to feel comfortable in how you will undertake the self-reflection exercise.
The report itself can be written as one comprehensive treatise of your self-reflections, or then a document divided into three sections reflecting the three points where you exercised self-n reflection. While there are no specific formatting guidelines, it is always good practice to produce a clear, easy to read and follow, and well-structured document. In terms of the language use, there is no requirement for a highly academic writing style, as the document is self-reflective text, and should come from within you, and be authentically written.

Solution

Introduction

The purpose of this self-reflection report is to understand my own entrepreneurial orientation at the beginning and end of the semester. In this regard, I have undertaken the Big Five Personality Test for analysing my orientation and further engaged in a meaningful conversation with an entrepreneur in my circle of acquaintances for exploring entrepreneurship.

Section 1: Personality Test at Beginning of Unit

Understanding entrepreneurial orientation has become significantly important for both individuals and companies to help in entrepreneurship development (Wales, 2016). It has often been considered as an essential factor helping in the successful development of new products or services, contributing towards high business performance and enhancing social performance. It also includes autonomy and aggressiveness as important factors to be included under entrepreneurial orientation (Cho & Lee, 2018). I have used the Big Five Personality Traits test for analysing my own entrepreneurial orientation. In this regard, the test has helped me to understand the presence of five traits in my behaviour or personality. These include openness, conscientiousness, extraversion, neuroticism and agreeableness (Awwad & Al-Aseer, 2021). It has been observed that individual personality traits generate a significant impact on entrepreneurial alertness and intention by evaluating individual suitability to entrepreneurship. Thus, I have undertaken this test to explore my alignment towards entrepreneurship for assignment help.

While undertaking the Big Five Personality Traits test, I came across various types of questions. These questions were directed towards my relationship with peers, ability to understand my emotions, my personality and behaviour and others. Here, I experienced certain difficulties in answering some specific questions as I was unsure about my feelings towards them. In this regard, I had to select the “neutral” option for answering such questions as I was unable to analyse my own emotions, feelings or opinions towards myself regarding such questions. However, I felt it easier to answer questions about relationships with peers, taking up tasks, socializing and new experiences. Furthermore, the Big Five Personality assessment provided scores on the five major dimensions of my personality. This helped me to comprehend my own traits and behaviours associated with entrepreneurship development, alertness and orientation (Leutner, et al., 2014). I scored moderately high on openness dimension that depicts my tendency of thinking about abstract and complex things by being creative, intellectual and adventurous . This helps in entrepreneurship orientation as openness helps to generate new, creative and smart ideas. I scored high on conscientiousness as well, which shows that I emphasize on self-discipline and control for pursuing my goals (Leutner, et al., 2014). Scoring high on this dimension can have negative effect on my entrepreneurial orientation as I tend to be more organized and responsible, while entrepreneurship involves high uncertainty and disorderly things.

Besides, I scored low on extraversion that implies that I do not actively engage or socialize with people for earning any social rewards . While this can help me to generate more creative or innovative ideas for entrepreneurship, it can also be difficult for me to network with people in the professional industry. Moreover, I gained relatively high score in agreeableness that determines my tendency to put others’ needs before my own interests. This trait can be helpful for me in gaining cooperation of others during the entrepreneurship venture (Kerr, et al., 2018). However, high agreeableness can also make me less competitive, tough-minded or less sceptical, which might make it difficult for me to climb the corporate ladder. Lastly, I scored moderate in the neuroticism dimension, which shows that I have adequate capability of handling my negative emotions of stress, anxiety, fear or guilt . I need to focus on decreasing this dimension as high neuroticism can lead to excess stress when I face uncertain or unfavourable situations during entrepreneurship.

The Big Five Personality test has enabled me to better understand my own personality while looking at the different traits. I have come to understand my own strengths and weaknesses, thus, I can work on them in the future. It has further helped me to analyse how I can use specific traits for enhancing entrepreneurship orientation. I have become more aware about my own behaviours and actions and work on them accordingly to improve my entrepreneurial alertness. The test has made self-reflection more comprehensible for me to develop my entrepreneurial skills and abilities (Porter, 2017). I am now well accustomed with the fact that high agreeableness and neuroticism might not be helpful for me in the future if I tend to start my entrepreneurial venture. Here, I will focus on working on the same along with improving my conscientiousness. In the future, I will also try to strike a balance between being a highly introverted or extroverted person and instead, start networking for improving my entrepreneurial orientation. For developing an entrepreneurial mindset, I would also need to emphasize on being socially responsible and accountable towards my behaviour and actions. In this regard, I will learn to improve my skills and abilities so that I am able to contribute positively towards society and environment through my entrepreneurship venture. Thus, having widespread knowledge about my personality traits have now helped me to develop entrepreneurial orientation, which would further help in benefitting individuals and society.

Section 2: Conversation with Entrepreneur/Intrapreneur

During the middle of the semester, I arranged an interview with one of my acquaintances who has recently opened up a café shop in our locality. He has been working as an industry professional in the marketing department for a renowned organization for around ten years. However, the person has always dreamt of opening up his own business venture, which recently came true in the past six months. The café shop has been running well with college students, office goers, business men, family and friends’ groups visiting it often throughout all days of the week. I realized that arranging a conversation with this café owner would be beneficial for me to gain new perspectives on entrepreneurship orientation as well as knowing about starting a business venture. For this purpose, I conducted a meeting with him and requested to provide me with detailed insights about his experience of opening up the café. He was more than willing to cooperate and help me in this interview. I engaged in a detailed conversation for two weeks everyday to gain as much knowledge from him about entrepreneurship. Thus, this was of immense help to me as I learnt about the importance of entrepreneurship orientation and alertness, key entrepreneurship skills and developing such abilities in myself.

The café owner decided to start his own business venture in our locality that had no coffee shops and people generally preferring tea. Here, the café shop also serves tea alongside coffee to the customers along with a book store that provides them with the opportunity of enjoying their coffee or tea while reading a book. The owner made me realize about the importance of generating new ideas and using creativity for starting a business. Furthermore, he undertook the risk of opening a coffee shop in a place where individuals prefer tea. Here, no coffee shop was present, which presented an excellent opportunity to the person in starting one himself. I came to know that the main reason behind starting this venture was his love for coffee and passion of doing something on his own (Campos, 2017). These acted as motivators for the entrepreneur. Thus, he was willing to leave his secure job and follow that passion of starting his business venture. (It displayed the presence of innovativeness in his personality of inspiring new ideas Anwar, et al., 2022). The café owner also represented risk-taking behaviour by jumping for something uncertain my making resource commitments. His proactiveness has also been evident from this as it searched for opportunities and utilized them for the business venture. Thus, I could identify all the three elements of proactiveness, risk-taking and innovativeness in his behaviour while conversing with him. This helped me to understand the importance of these factors that have helped in building entrepreneurial orientation in the café owner. Here, the owner also displayed presence of competitiveness aggressiveness in his personality as he undertook the risk of serving tea as well despite the presence of various tea brands and shops in our locality. He also used autonomy by including both these tea and coffee options alongside books in his shop to compete with the existing rivals in the market. Thus, it made me understand that this high entrepreneurial orientation has contributed towards the high performance of the new business venture.

From the conversation with the café owner, I learnt how entrepreneurs are willing to undertake business-related risks, compete aggressively with rivals and favour change and innovation. In this regard, I also came to learn from him about how he undertook extensive research before starting the new venture. He focused on understanding consumers’ tastes and preferences, competitors’ offerings and current market trends. This made him analyse the viability of opening a café shop in our locality. In this regard, I learnt about the entrepreneurial mindset of the person that has helped him to engage in this entrepreneurship venture. This is because he possesses a frame of mind where he focused significantly on intuitive information processing after collecting relevant data from the market research (Ismail, et al., 2015). He developed an intuition from such data processing that customers might like trying coffee as well if they get the chance of visiting a coffee shop serving both coffee and tea. He also emphasized on attracting the book lovers by including a book store along with the café. Thus, such entrepreneurial mindset helped the owner in starting the venture in an uncertain and highly competitive business environment.

In the middle of the semester, this conversation with a local entrepreneur of a café shop was of utmost importance to me. I learnt from a real-life experience about how the person started a new business venture despite facing difficulties. Thus, it helped me to comprehend about entrepreneurial mindset along with developing an entrepreneurial orientation, which will be beneficial for my own entrepreneurship development.

Section 3: Personality Test at End of Semester

I undertook the Big Five Personality test again at the end of the semester. This was because I wanted to identify any changes in the five personality traits of openness, agreeableness, conscientiousness, neuroticism and extraversion. In the new test results, I observed that my score of openness to experience has increased than the previous one . This shows that I am now more comfortable in dealing with uncertain and unforeseen events that help me to learn about new experiences. My creativity, intellect and imagination have improved in this regard because of the various group and individual tasks and assignments that I have carried out during my entire semester. In this regard, I have come across various events and experiences in my course that have taught me to be creative and unconventional with my ideas. I have used my critical thinking and analytical skills in different tasks where I had to provide solutions to various real-life business scenarios. This has helped me to think outside-the-box, which has further made me embrace new experiences. Thus, enhancing this openness can further prove to be beneficial for me in the future as I will be able to come up with innovative ideas for starting a new business venture. Therefore, I will gain more entrepreneurial orientation through the help of this dimension.

Furthermore, my score on conscientiousness has significantly decreased in the new test result . This shows that my ability to exercise self-discipline and control for pursuing the desired goals might have deteriorated during the semester. I think that this low score can be because of the difficulty that I experienced in managing time of handling different tasks during the semester. I lost control over my routine and tasks during the middle of the semester as I was struggling with appearing for exams, performing extra-curricular activities, participating in group or individual projects and submitting different assignments. During this period, I was having difficulty in managing all these tasks and prioritizing them to achieve the desired outcomes. This might have it difficult to have control over such tasks, thereby leading to lack of self-discipline on my part. I also became somewhat impulsive and often lost focus while handling all the tasks simultaneously. While this might be helpful for displaying entrepreneurial behaviour, low conscientiousness can hamper my professional development in the future.

My score on extraversion has also largely increased in the new test result . This displays that I am now comfortable in engaging and interacting with people as an act of socializing. I have also developed a tendency of gaining admiration, excitement, friendship and power from the social relationships. In my opinion, this extraversion has been possible because throughout the entire semester I had to participate in various group projects. I was involved in presenting project with other team members before the classmates, which required me to frequently interact and converse with them. Furthermore, I also participated in role plays by forming teams as part of our group assignments. This also forced me to come out of my shell and engage in conversation and discussion with the team members. Such group projects enabled me to express myself gradually and voice my opinions. I also started liking interacting and speaking to people during the end of the semester. This extraversion nature can be helpful for me in the entrepreneurial orientation as now I will be more comfortable in networking with various business professionals.

However, the agreeableness score has slightly increased in my new test result .This displays that my tendency or intention in putting others’ interests before my own has further increased during the semester. I think that this agreeableness trait has improved because I participated in different group projects. Such projects made me put more emphasis on achieving the group goals instead of focusing on achieving my individual goals. It taught to put others or the team’s interest above others, which might have enhanced my agreeableness trait. Furthermore, these projects have also made me learn about trusting and forgiving for the greater good to achieve the team goals. While this trait can be beneficial for me to improve teamworking skills, it might not be effective for entrepreneurial orientation. This is because high agreeableness might make it difficult for me to start a business venture as it requires being competitive, sceptical and tough-hearted.